Home

User Manual - Serendipity Software

1. 132 Broadcast Message 132 Chatterbox sssini ed eo bum 132 Connect tO SefVef uses otii eere 132 Download PPD idein ts 132 Server Men oi edridisfeer ii oet eci ton 132 SUDA E85 3 de etai eas 130 Submit Files As Asset 131 Submit Files As Imposition 131 Submit Files For De Imposition 131 Submit ICC Target 131 Submitt ICC Target Without Colour COFFE CU OD eei onines n 131 System Settings aude esent Dite 132 Test Prints A deut ddl ia rb aeR rq Er adAE 131 Su 21 ADOUL aeae ks dU nene 21 File Mehl nienn innari 21 Help Me adeant rtu ext atii 21 i c 26 Diris 0 PR 21 Restarting S ossobaipiq ue tpa eii UE ES 21 Safe MOG scindere imitation 21 Start as Cluster Node 21 Startup OptIODS scie deett es 21 Update DOonplesa secnm ae etu RE 21 Server Settings Colour Management 138 Generals aite uini s 138 Working Paths wo nod edem 139 Ser VerLO9 oae ostio 81 Filtering messages ss 81 Setting The Colour of a DropSpot 74 Siftand SOL ac oaa epa ptum 53 54 Signature D lete a H 64 Di plICatesuadi toco RH Hi ton aD 64 NOW auno Maie NO KOREA e I DORT PS 64 Signature Decorations 49 Signature Group 63 Auto Paglnate ceeiditteiva dettes 63 Close Page Number Gaps 64 Deleting d Pag
2. 138 ICC Engine Accuracy 138 D GSS ets necu teiduemo acia 57 SerVer Settings ciriciri 138 COLOUTSPACE ccenn cio 67 76 Convolution Matrix sss 49 Copyright Notices sss 151 Correction EU T i eite e aene 40 Cropmar kS eisern o teta DDR 49 B 020 0 1i 50 CUPS HO 148 D D DOE ois iania aaa d oficios 48 De Imposition eene 50 MO GUN reos etc b e enel a 77 Densitormete onc ent ce n tci cad 89 Export Valu s ed atas eni uiia 89 Measure Targets enia iier 89 Device Link Profile mem 40 Disable PDF Autoseparation 48 Displays cedo ntes utsd ue mitate M LAUR 91 ATDIODL iiec oce Et bu edd 94 CalchecR unito dan 92 Galcheck History assi iiec 93 CON bal Ons eos RR ERIGI n EH 91 LIPDOBOOULiusinicvedie i ied ive ie 94 White POI Esau Goes tomo at rau 91 Dongle Updating Strings 21 Viewing Licensed Bits 21 What s on the DVD 7 Dongle Updater sss 23 Updating the Dongle 23 DotGain Cu rVve etre retraites 31 Applying to a Pagesetup 46 Ita port from CSV see estu 31 Invert CUT Veisiusaotnducainm dne 31 ablegen onte do Ra 31 Trace Saved QUEVE dim beatis 31 Drawing a Rectangle around a Job 49 DYoODEOIdGEs iec
3. 38 PUTRI nada dann DE DEM GIO ONU RM UA RE dud ERR Lan rA A UR AMETE UNS CGU MUDUA E RAE DNDM TUTO DAR URN CRLIN URNA LTDA TUE 42 PP SS UN seeded edidi du tive E Ced Bic ted Uic ntn ela coc etd tide feet cede tcc dened ect ra cnt dr nU D 45 Pape AD Oe af 019 TM A E err a 51 Paper PrO O c late neni IH mn er oR Ge RP RE E E ee ome 53 PPS MR MC N 57 Regular Express ON osn dara diced oda d CoU IUD MG Doo REA OC P e A buo E a RR a cR UI 58 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 2 BIB eet m e DOE cede A D cba MM ANE MLIEM M M Iu RN DM AD IMMAL att 61 DOB ig GGDOHD aA cantent a baa ncn aatem oet oV OD oon Ao Econ rdc topo 63 wisis Eois RETURN NOM UC UE 66 Nucl duiiinliue IT 69 CODE UEabIOTE suos cR LA D n EDU MMNMELI KU LAM IE 69 Module S Ex coca UII NAI MM EMI MEI IM MM MM 71 DOORVTOBLPIEOD essence nnns Redi ae veh con vt Oi na vm US end a eC EE HCN Ee OH tere ee ee ee ee 72 6 siciu Bra eT T 73 Clusters 22108 Fs nn nT a ETRRURENE 74 TEC OO UNG son MY 74 Media ESI PERDRE EET INE NR K 75 Sur 76 Queues rc in eec M XE 79 ISIPNIODI
4. ics Fued c jea Submitted assets are visible in the Asset queue in the QueueManager and remain in the queue even after printing until deleted from the Asset queue This can be done via Studio or the QueueManager module Unlike other queued jobs assets exist only as placeholder thumbnails until a manual nest or tile is submitted for printing from Studio The submitted jobs are then imaged rendered and the nest is output appearing in the appropriate queue Studio Interface The Studio interface is made up of four 4 sections The main Layout area where jobs assets are placed and nests created The Asset panel displaying thumbnails of assets available for nesting or tiling The Property panel defining the tiling document area editable media dimensions and frame properties The Template panel where nesting templates can be loaded from a library of saved templates Layout Area Menu Options Studio Menu Save New Template Saves the current frame layout to the Template library The untitled nest can be renamed by clicking on the text Untitled Only frames are saved not the images within them Save Template Saves the current nesting layout to the selected template from the library overwriting any existing data Remove Template Removes the selected template from the library list Export Template Export a saved template or templates to a user defined location Import Template Import a saved template Th
5. 25 Workbench Data Types 27 BOoORUITUOTS octies deen notin 27 Caleheck Chart iuncitnanincsiieneniny 27 Ca DIG Oeo uto aine 27 DotGaln Curve oui ee 27 Gradation GUEPVE isset deu et s 27 IGG Tweak Seboatednedie impen atri 27 Job Genie e 27 MEUA inna tabat dads 27 OUED Ub 25er quce cartoons 27 l agesel Up sescenti ote at DC 27 PARES CLUP POG scenam ede ns 27 Paper Prone cincatatinnnancnweien 27 PrESS inoa a 27 Regular Expression 27 Replace Colour Selissuomuisiva t 27 d uper PU 27 Signature Group se 27 Special Colour Sel sssau icd de etotien 27 Y Yule Nielsen Number 56 100 102 150 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 161
6. Media Selection List This list is only active if the Pagesetup button is selected in the Pagesetup selection list When a Pagesetup has been chosen a list of Media compatible with the Pagesetup will be displayed for selection An active selected Media is highlighted in blue If no Media is selected the submitted job s will be output to the Pagesetup s default Media Note The Serendipity Client saves the last Pagesetup and Media selection so it need not be selected every time a job is submitted to the same Pagesetup Information Panel This panel displays the settings for the currently selected Pagesetup or Media Submit Options The lower section of the Submit window has the following options available when submitting files Flow Control e Hold After Imaging Check this box to hold the job after the Imaging stage has completed Held jobs can be released to continue processing via the QueueManager toolbar or contextual right click menu e Hold After Rendering Check this box to hold the job after the Rendering stage has completed Held jobs can be released to continue processing via the QueueManager toolbar or contextual right click menu e Nest Submits the jobs for imaging and rendering then on to be nested with other jobs Nesting criteria are defined in the Output for the Pagesetup Media to which the job is sent see Workbench Output for further information Note This Nesting function only requires that the Output used
7. Once the installation has finished proceed to the Running the Software section of this manual Creating Dock Start Icons To make it easy to start the Server and Client it is recommended you create a Dock shortcut To do this 1 Runthe Blackmagic Server and Client applications from the installation location 2 Once the Server and Client icons appear in the dock right click or CTRL click the mouse and select Keep in Dock from the menu 3 Alternatively drag the Server and Client icons directly onto the Dock before they have been launched 4 Toremove the Dock icons drag them off the Dock onto the desktop and release Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 9 Linux Installation Installing the Dongle Driver The first step is to install the dongle driver To install 1 Remove all SuperPro USB dongles 2 Navigate to the dongle linux folder on the installation DVD 3 Double click the sntl sud 7 5 1 0 1386 rpm file to install the driver Installing Serendipity Blackmagic Important Note Before installing on a Linux x64 operating system please ensure the following 1686 32 bit libraries are installed e libstdc i686 GNU Standard C Library e mesa libGLU i686 Mesa libGLU runtime library e zlib i686 The zlib compression and decompression library e freetype i686 A free and portable font rendering engine e libXrender i686 X Org X11 libXrender runtime library e fontconfig i6
8. files can then be submitted for de imposition from the RIPMonitor and separated during processing into smaller groups or individual pages to fit the printer or to view a publication in its intended form The interface has a toolbar with various options and a series of five 5 panels used to configure the Signatures A display panel shows the layout of the selected signature s to the right Signature Group Import or create groups of Signatures defining the page sheet and size parameters of press impositions The imposed Toolbar Options Group Groups two or more pages together Pages must be the same size and alignment The Group button is only available when valid pages are selected Ungroup Ungroup a group of pages Only available when a group is selected Suppress Pages Suppress the selected page or pages marks it as not for print Auto Paginate Automatically allocates page numbers to the signature This will include any page currently suppressed Offset Page Numbers Offsets the selected page numbers by the desired amount Enter the offset value to be added to or subtracted from the page numbers Edit Page Numbers Edits the page number of those selected Tab moves to the next selected page The page numbers can also be edited by clicking on the page Pair Pages Automatically pairs the pages along the long sides The pages must match the headers must be in the same position and they must be j
9. 1I x v 0 M9 rnas The Data Types section has two 2 views Browse amp Search FETELE Browse allows the user to view and select any of the database items jaam for display The tab containing the magnifying glass flips to a Search window which acts like a filter showing any items containing the search text AOO Workbench adn Browse A Ikem 7 Type Modified serendipity specials Special Colour Set 5 03 09 11 29 AM Find items containing serendipity tiff output RIP 5 03 09 11 29 AM serendipity tiff separated Job Genie 23 10 08 5 04 PM seren Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 24 Menu Options Application File Edit Modules Access all available Applications via this menu Each application will open in its own separate window System Settings Windows OS Access the System Settings Preferences for the Serendipity Client This option is available under the Serendipity Client menu for Mac OS X users Quit Windows OS Quits the Serendipity Client application This option is available under the Serendipity Client menu for Mac OS X users Files Select files to send to a Media and Pagesetup for processing Files for Deimposition Submit files directly for de imposition assigning the files to one or more imposition signatures Files As Imposition Submit files directly as an imposition assigning the files to one or more imposition signatures This option
10. e RIP Driver Choose the RIP driver input filter from the list of supported RIPs The list of available drivers will depend upon the licenses enabled on the dongle Custom Settings Depending on the driver selected there may be specific parameters requiring setup for a valid configuration Use the Edit button to set up these parameters Polling Polling is the method used to look for files The configuration for polling the RIPped files is set up in this section When polling Blackmagic looks in the specified location defined under Paths for files matching the RIP driver selected A list is compiled and sent back to Blackmagic for display in the RIPMonitor It takes a three 3 successful polls before a file is shown in the RIPMonitor and the files irebe Pon peri nantes 96605 T must be stable not changed since the last poll pice HANE CUNG The available options are e Enable Polling Turn polling on or off e Poll Interval Configure how frequently to poll for files The Poll Interval should be set according to any specific requirements Setting the Poll Interval too short can flood the network with polling requests packets causing it to slow down Setting it too long can take a long time to show stable files ready for submission e Fast Polling This will automatically poll two 2 more times as soon as one 1 automatic poll has completed It will not wait for the next scheduled Poll Interval before it polls again
11. e Save As Saves the currently selected Target colour centre of Chart 2 to the set as a new special colour Enter a name for the colour and click OK Default name is that of the original colour followed by an asterisk Print Swatch Print user configurable colour swatch charts of Special Colour Sets All swatches are processed as individual spot plates as they would be when included with a normal job allowing users to see how a spot colour will print to a particular Media Colour Swatches print at a size and spacing determined by the user the name of the colour and optional Lab or device values are printed below each patch The following fields are available to configure the swatch chart e Patch Width Enter the printed width for the colour patch e Patch Height Enter the printed height for the colour patch e Include Colour Values Enable to print colour Lab or device values below each colour patch A larger vertical spacing value may be required to accommodate the additional text e Horizontal Spacing Enter the horizontal spacing to apply between each patch e Vertical Spacing Enter the vertical spacing to apply between each patch e Margin Enter a value for the margin to be left around the printed swatch charts e Patches Per Row Enter the number of patches to be printed on each row of the chart e Patches Per Page Enter the total number of patches to be printed per chart page A multiple of the patches per row
12. o Calibration Tolerance Enter a value in this field or use the Xi in i slider to set the tolerance in cd m for monitor or light booth brightness calibration o Measure Click to use a connected Spectrophotometer to measure and display the brightness cd m and white point K of the monitor Follow any onscreen instructions for the selected instrument The reading is constantly updated allowing the user to manually adjust the brightness using the monitor s own controls This option is only available if the Use Software Calibration option is selected or is the only mode available see below e White Point Select the white point temperature for the monitor Choose from ihe ine ee Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 91 Custom Type in the field provided or use the slider to enter a custom temperature in Kelvin K D50 Sets the white point to D50 5003 K Horizon Light D65 Sets the white point to D65 6504 K Noon Light Native Sets the Displays application to use the monitors native white point Gamma Select the gamma correction to be used for the monitor o Custom Type in the field provided or use the slider to enter a custom gamma value between 1 0 and 2 6 The Custom button will auto select if a non standard gamma setting is chosen Note If either 1 8 or 2 2 are chosen the 1 8 or 2 2 buttons will auto select o 1 8 Select this to set the gamma correction value to 1 8 This button
13. 4 In the Queue panel of the gray configuration area select the p appropriate driver for your printer from the dropdown list of licensed drivers Y 5 In the Destination panel select a destination driver ie the connection method for your printer and enter the appropriate information for example the IP address of the printer If USB or m Bonjour Zeroconf is selected click the Edit button to select the IE correct device service from the Custom Settings popup window z 6 Configure any Collating or Nesting requirements as needed See the Workbench gt Output section of this manual for further details on this option 7 OPTIONAL After a Media is created it can be assigned to the Output via the Change Media button Assigning a Media to the Output will only allow jobs submitted to that Media to print See the Media section of this manual for further information 8 Save the Output configuration when completed by selecting File menu gt Save Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 17 Media Configuration 1 Ze 7 Select Media from the Data Types list on the left and create a new Media by selecting File menu gt New The name Untitled will appear in the item list highlighted for renaming This is the name of the Media that will appear in the Output and Pagesetup Rename and select the item B 979 In the Output panel of the gray configuration area select
14. Checkboxes at the top of the window allow you to choose which ink channel to view Shift click to view another channel at the same time Double click a channel to see all Revert to this Date Reverts the linearisation curve assigned to the Media to the selected historical previously measured curve Unload Unloads the historical curve data being viewed in the Measurement panel and loads the currently assigned curve Measurement Curve Name Displays the name of the Linearisation Curve currently selected This can be the saved curve assigned to the Media or a selected History item Last Linearised Located top right above the measurement panel Last Linearised displays the date and time the printer media combination was last linearised The display shows the colour coded linearisation patches for each ink channel The patch number and the Dot 96 it represents are listed across the top of the panel Measured Values Density or Lab are shown within each patch If no values are present the Media has not yet been linearised Advanced Options Yule Nielsen Number Enter the YN number if you know what it is for the media in use The default is 2 The Yule Nielsen number or N Factor is used to compensate for dot spread on different media types This is basically a fudge factor added to the standard Murray Davis formula used to calculate dot area from a density reading An N Factor of 1 means no compensation is made and just the Murray Dav
15. Export Export the colour patch data from the display panel to a text file Import Import colour patch data into the Calcheck application from an exported text file Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 86 Clustering Clustering is the ability to share the workload of processing jobs across multiple devices Slaves or cluster nodes can be installed on other machines on the network and jobs can be sent to them from the Master for processing The Clustering application allows you to add and manage these cluster nodes They can be enabled for use in imaging rendering or both 2505 Cree seee sete ome meeen Aeee aem oa O e o e As a node device starts up its speed is calculated When a job is submitted for processing the Master machine has priority as no network traffic is required If the Master is busy processing another job the job can be sent to the fastest available node The Aee node processes the job and once completed sends it back to the am Master It is then ready to accept another job Nodes can be installed on any machine on the network Running a Cluster Node requires a separate Blackmagic dongle If you have extra Blackmagic dongles any Server can act as a node if it is started as a Cluster Node see The Blackmagic Server section for more information Note In this mode the Server can only be used as a Node slave for another Server It is recommended that the database be
16. Menu Options Tabs Menu e Add Tabs Add a new tab to the Jobs main window Select from a list of factory default layouts New tabs can be imported for use via the Manage Tab Library option The factory default tab layouts available are Job Queues default loaded view RIPMonitor Adds a tab with the RIPMonitor module Book Monitor Adds a tab with the BookMonitor module Blackmagic SoftProofing Addon Only Status and Drop Contains the MediaStatus Status QueueStatus DropZones and ClusterStatus modules Logs Contains the ServerLog and ClientLog modules Jobs Contains the QueueManager module with the Jobs view selected Assets Contains the QueueManager module with the Assets queue selected Drop Area Contains the DropZone module with Assets dropspot added by default Right click to add any additional dropzones to the Drop Area tab o ServerLog Contains the ServerLog module only O O O O O O 0 e Rename Tab Rename the selected tab e Manage Tab Library Add remove or preview tab layouts for the Jobs application There are eight 8 layouts available as standard factory e Close Tab Close the currently selected tab View Menu e Previous tab Opens the previous tab window e Next tab Opens the next available tab window e Titlebars Show or hide the titlebars for each module within the Jobs application tabs This will show or hide all titlebars in all tabs and is not limited to the currently selec
17. Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Table of Contents Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual iater n osa aeaa a adaa aaa cece senstecaaceeasduusscuecacnanscuvdeceuveeadactesveaxsseueaee 5 BES Cea ACU me 7 Wigts ontHe DV se a sn an de e uda NUMAE MALUM qM LUAM UM 7 Windows Mmstalla E 8 Instale COTS DIV ncc 8 Installing Serendipity BlaCKM ag IC ainar anaa NRE A 8 Installationsor tne Serendipity Agen tess od a cats eats date Gcenaita ect eet cia eer OT IM ae eens 8 Mac OP SEE Et 9 Installing the Dongle DEIVeEiunssastvern tenir iti vad civic cii erc etel bv esi Eit eint rid onc ea sd i cubo d ptu bL RS 9 Instalhing the Serena prey Printer DEIVeES o0 adito Ep Obr c cat tr Deae rA c E Ud cn ia an an 9 Installing Serendipity Bae REdB LC doin t en E naan e eA t cov oed d neo fea cn n a Ree 9 Installauon of the Ser CMC IPL Cy AJEN Eureen cnc Fo ava Oo RAE ER EA AVE EF ORAE 9 Creaunm DOCKS CA CONS ates cesar hc vacates tein enun aa e dovr von ertet vcn Cone sedare vet epos 9 BniPdlelEisnj i H 10 listalims the Dongle DEIVelssiod meme ureter p Uti t e at ott aset to eL cod ie Adeo ee 10 Installing Serendipity Blac kinai 22152555 ATI uris tirer te Eder tickets rte a
18. Set the maximum AC value for the selected colour e Patch Type Identify important patch types from the set The options are o Paper Select the patch that represents the paper being checked o Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Identify a patch for each colour from your set o Gray Used to identify gray patches in the chart o Generic Most patches are generic and are classified as generic if they don t fall into one of the above types AC Tolerance 4 00 Patch Type Generic ar Note When generating patches from an ICC profile the patches are automatically assigned the correct type Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 29 Target Standards Ae AH AC There are three 3 standards that can be used to compare against a proof These are Ae AH and AC The first standard Ae is always enabled The other two standards must be enabled for the results to appear on the Calcheck To enable select the tab and tick the Target checkbox For each standard specify the limits used for a pass and fail status For Ae also choose which of the Ae standards are to be used deltaE CIE94 CIE2000 CMC 1 1 or CMC 2 1 Important Note The correct standard to be tested must be selected and saved with the chart Only that standard will be tested for a pass or fail If you want to check another standard change it here and save it again For example if you are checking deltaE and you want CIE2000 you
19. The MediaStatus module has two 2 functions 1 Toshow the current calibration status of a selected Media data type For the calibration status to be shown or updated for a Media it must have been Calchecked using the Calcheck Media menu option see below or the Check Media option in the Calcheck application 2 Toshow how much of the media e g Paper has been used A meter is displayed graphically detailing the percentage used For the Usage meter to function values for the Media Length or the number of sheets loaded must be entered oc in the Output section of the Media data type aaa teehee Geen Each Media displayed in the MediaStatus window has the following Used 9 47 m of 0 00 mm 0X ETE information Logged Period 9 12 09 3 33 PM 12 05 10 4 46 PM Printed 22 Jobs 7 99 m e Media Name FER ae an ac xls e Calcheck Status Toggled via the Calcheck Info option see tpson11880 FograProof 720dpi copy 10 12 09 11 00 AM below Displayed as one or more Ticks Crosses to the right of Gui ann the Media name showing a Calcheck Pass or Fail against the joco v d user defined AE AH or AC Hover the mouse over each to ponte i Rene show a tooltip displaying the AMax and A Avg values C Madmum MM Paper r048 g Aens Usage Meter Bar showing the amount of media used Text under the bar states the exact amount used as a percentage of the total units Reset Counter Resets the usage count for the Media Logged Period Time period da
20. Updated 16 July 2014 5 Product Overview Serendipity Blackmagic is used to proof post RIP data to either an output device such as an Inkjet printer or to one of several file formats Serendipity Blackmagic runs in a Server and Client configuration The Server runs on a network computer and is protected by a USB dongle The dongle licenses the level of software and the input filters and output drivers purchased The Client is used as the configuration tool and monitoring application for the Server It can be run on the same machine or on another locally LAN or remotely WAN networked computer The Client connects to the Server via standard TCP IP network protocol and is not licensed so it can be run multiple times on the network Serendipity Blackmagic has an input filter for most of the major manufacturers proprietary RIPs The input filters read the native RIP format and understand how jobs are assembled the plates associated with a job and the directory structure RIPs that include databases and impositions are also read and understood Jobs are proofed using the same post RIP data that goes to the press thus maintaining data integrity and accuracy of the proofs Files are ripped once by the proprietary RIP and output as many times as desired The jobs reside on the RIP are monitored by the Serendipity Blackmagic Server and are displayed by the Client in the RIPMonitor with all associated plates stitched together The files can be sel
21. e Black Point Compensation This setting is designed for use when processing input from large gamut sources such as photographs and RGB images Black Point Compensation enhances shadow details in these images assists when viewing shadowed areas in non ideal or everyday lighting conditions and prevents flooding in CMY gray areas This setting only functions when using colourimetric intents and when Always Use ICC is checked Black Point Compensation should not be used for normal CMYK proofing jobs which are generally well within the gamut of an output device Inkjet printer e Intent Select the rendering intent to use Options include o Perceptual All colours are moved proportionally to each other so the eye perceives the colours to be correct i e colours out of gamut move into gamut and those in gamut move proportionally to those out of gamut o Relative Colourimetric Those colours out of gamut are moved into gamut and those in gamut are left untouched o Absolute Colourimetric The colours are left alone so those out of gamut cannot be reproduced Adjusts the white point of the media to match that in the input ICC profile o Saturation Those colours out of gamut move into gamut but all colours increase in saturation as a result e Retain Pure Black When ICC profiles are used all colours even solids are made up of a mix of different colours Selecting Retain Pure Black uses only black for areas containing just black Whe
22. o Localhost This is used to poll a hard drive local to the Blackmagic install or mapped network drive on the same machine o FTP Uses File Transfer Protocol FTP to poll and transfer the files to Blackmagic o Secure FTP SFTP Uses Secure File Transfer Protocol to poll and transfer the files to Blackmagic File Transfer Priority Specify the priority to be used for transferring files to Blackmagic Adjust from Lowest to Highest or anywhere in between Specify one or more paths to the location of the publication planning files The options available are Testing New Adds a new path to the Paths field Selecting this displays another window to type the path or browse to locate the folder containing the jobs Browse will only work if the connection method has been specified and is valid Delete Deletes the selected paths Delete All Deletes all paths from the list Once the configuration is complete test the parameters are correct The configuration must be saved before a test can be done If it is not saved a prompt will appear to save and test A test poll checks the connection path validity and job presence Messages appear in the window to alert you to any problems or give confirmation of a valid configuration Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 28 b d Calcheck Chart The Calcheck Chart data type is where charts are configured and stored for use in colour validation checks The
23. o Lowpass No limiting is imposed until the coverage for combined number of inks reaches the set limit at which point any higher ink coverage is clipped to the ink limit o Lowpass favour Black The same as Lowpass but favouring Black limiting it proportionally less than CMY as colours approach Black e Media Information This side of the screen displays information about the driver and Media configuration important to the Paper Profile Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 56 Press The Press data type is used to emulate the properties of a press for softproofing Each Press configuration can be assigned a press ICC profile dotgain curves press sheet dimensions the number of ink keys ink and paper characteristics all combining to produce accurate onscreen softproofs The Press can be switched on the fly while softproofing to instantly show how a job will look if printed on a different press or on different stock Dimensions Enter the size of the printable sheet area of the press and its number Of ses Ink Keys The Key Width is calculated from these values Colour Management This panel is where the Press ICC profile is assigned along with any process CMYK spot colour or device platesetter dotgain curves required to reproduce the colour performance of the press Colour Management Replace Colour Set Select a Replace Colour Set to be applied Replace Colour Se Press ICC Prof
24. o Thumbnails Display all jobs as thumbnails This is the same as the Print Gallery mode o Publications Only display jobs belonging to a publication For any of the above display modes further filtering is available Active Jobs currently processing Waiting Jobs with a status of Waiting Done Completed jobs Search Find jobs that are in the queue All jobs matching the search text will be displayed All elements of the jobs are searched against not just the name so this can be a useful filtering tool The search can be inverted with cmd shift I Mac or ctrl shift I Win The search box will turn black to indicate when the inverse search is selected Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 76 There are a number of actions that can be performed on a job Options become available when one or more jobs are selected Only actions valid for the job status are shown For example the action to Nest Now is only available if the job has a status of Waiting to Nest The following are available in the Toolbar or by selecting job s and right clicking to access the context menu Job Info Shows information about the currently selected job or jobs The Job Info contains all details of how the job was processed and displays a thumbnail preview of the job and its configuration A dropdown toolbar at the top of the Job Info window has the following options Print Portrait Print Landscape Print to PDF
25. s own sampling method giving the highest quality It takes longer to process than Bicubic and uses an averaged area from input to output This setting provides better resampling for contone data such as Postscript and PDF Logo Logo Position a company logo sign off slugline or colour bar for checking consistency Enable Logo anywhere around the job The logo passes through the same colour management as the B job and can therefore be verified The file is not rotated during output except if Auto wan TS Y Rotate When Nesting is enabled If the logo file is positioned along the left or right Height 110 mm sides the EPS file should be created in the appropriate orientation e Enable Logo Turn the Logo effect on or off Lem e Dimensions Enter the print dimensions of the Logo e Logo File Select this to choose a Logo file Effects Various effects may be applied to jobs passing through the Pagesetup Effects are applied in the order they appear here Some effects have separate attributes for customisation and can be edited once they are in the Applied Effects column The Effects are e Border Place a border around the job Line width and colour can be specified Effects e Centering Centre the job in the specified page area Enable Effects e Convolution Matrix Design your own filter effect according to a pre defined 7 Available Effects mathematical operation known as convolution Border e Cropmarks Place cr
26. 1 10 dot is the value of the density being measured Dot x100 E solid is the density of the solid patch 1 10 Therefore a YN value of 1 has no effect on the dot percentage area A value other than 1 will compensate for the dot spread on the media If the YN is greater than 1 the Dot decreases and if the YN is less than 1 increases This can be seen from the graph on the Lineariser The curves display the compensation therefore if the YN number is less than 1 the dot percentage calculated is increased so the curve applied will go down The reverse is true for a YN number greater than 1 For most of the testing done during initial development the value of 2 the default setting seemed to work well It was also noted on occasions better results were obtainable by setting different values for each process colour Note As the ICC profiles are created after Linearisation any value entered will be used for printing the ICC chart and will affect the output This means when the ICC profiles are applied the same YN number must always be used in the Lineariser to obtain correct results Maximum Densities Override The Maximum Densities Override allows the user to cap the top end density to any value less than the maximum value read If a value less than the highest value measured is entered the curve will change The top end will move down and the rest of the curve will adjust to compensate for the new end positi
27. After selecting choose an online instrument to be used from the popup list When the device is ready the measuring window becomes available If instructed calibrate the instrument and begin patch measurement e Change Media Change the Media currently assigned to the Paper Profile e Print Density Chart Prints a density chart containing the patches currently turned on Where patches are turned off there will be a space on the output print e Print Density Chart All patches Prints a density chart containing all patches irrespective of their on off state e Prink Inklimit Chart Prints an ink density chart containing all enabled limits as one job to the selected Media and Pagesetup e Print Inklimit Chart Separate Jobs Prints an ink density chart for each enabled ink limit colour combination as a separate job using the Media and Pagesetup selected e Configure Inklimit Chart Configures the combinations of inks to be tested for ink limits Select which colours will be printed the start and end ink percentage points and step increments Note If you have a combination selected but insufficient patches to fill the row an empty chart will be printed For example if you select to print 3 ink limit and have 2 colours selected only the chart border will be printed e Preview Graph Show a graph of the patches currently turned on See the Graph section for more information e Sift and Sort Enable or disable this option to Sift
28. Console Navigate control screen Duplicate Page Settings Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On Only When viewing a publication with duplicate purple pages choose from these page load options o Manual Select When a page with duplicates is selected in the Show Pages screen the page to view must be manually selected This is the default mode of a non Veripress Touch Console o Select Newest Page Useful in publishing workflows where page updates revisions are common This option will automatically display the latest version of the page Publication Load Page Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On Only Set the page to be viewed on load when viewing a publication from the following options o ManualSelect When a publication is selected for softproofing the Touch Console opens and the Show Pages screen allows the user to select the page to be viewed first o First Available Page Publications are loaded on the first available lowest numbered page o Show Sections When enabled section buttons are displayed in the Touch Console Show Pages screen This function allows loaded multi section publications to be viewed one section at a time displaying the page range within each section Note An option to Edit the Touch Console User Interface is available via the File and contextual menus in the SoftProof application for Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On users only below Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version
29. Files may appear incomplete in the RIPMonitor if there has not been sufficient time between polls for a job s complete set of plates to finish the RIP process e Log Statistics Log the polling statistics in the Server log The log message reports Started automatic poll on lt date gt when polling starts and Completed automatic poll on lt date gt when finished e Ignore Mod Time Ignore the modification time on the file Useful for Harlequin RIPs that update the modification time on the file when moving the job between the Held and Active queues e Job Genie Assign a selected Job Genie to the RIP This options becomes available when using a TIFF Based RIP User Configurable PDF or Postscript input filter If used only files defined as valid by the Job Genie will appear for submission in the RIPMonitor see the Job Genie section for further details Connection The connection specifies the method used for polling The options are e Agent The most efficient connection method This option connects to a Serendipity Polling Agent installed on the system where the RIP files are located e Localhost Polls a directory path on the computer where the Blackmagic Server is installed e FTP Uses File Transfer Protocol FTP to poll and transfer the files from the RIP to Blackmagic e Secure FTP SFTP Uses Secure File Transfer Protocol to poll and transfer the files from the RIP to Blackmagic File Transfer Priority This specif
30. To upgrade 1 Make sure the Blackmagic Server and Client are not running and remove any Blackmagic or any other SuperPro USB dongles from the computer 2 Onthe Blackmagic installation DVD navigate to the dongle windows folder and run the Sentinel Protection Installer exe file Alternatively download and run the latest driver install from the Safenet website http www safenet inc com support downloads sentinel drivers Run the Sentinel installer Select Upgrade and Next Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the upgrade Restart the computer when finished a a Installing C Runtime Libraries To run correctly Blackmagic 5 4 requires the installation of Microsoft Visual C Redistributable libraries that may not be present in your Windows operating system If these were not installed for the existing Blackmagic version they will need to be installed now To install 1 Navigate to the windows folder on the Blackmagic DVD a ForWindows 32 bit Run the vcredist x86 exe file b ForWindows 64 bit Run the vcredist x64 exe file 2 Follow the prompts to install Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 11 Installing the Blackmagic 5 4 Upgrade Current Windows file folder security and permissions makes it necessary to install Blackmagic v5 4 in the root directory of the hard drive e g C Serendipity rather than Program Files where earlier
31. allowing for colours to be added to the set Double clicking on a selected colour in the list will open an Add Colours From Library window to replace it with a chosen colour Colour Adjustment View and adjust the colourspace values and plate properties of a selected colour The name of the colour selected is shown at the top A window displays the Original colour and the Modified colour as adjustments are made A correctly calibrated monitor with an assigned Match ICC profile will display an accurate representation of the colours Available adjustment options are ColourSpace Choose between Lab or CMYK or multicolour if an N Colour ICC profile has been assigned to the Special Colour Set The sliders change accordingly for making any adjustments to the Lab or CMYK N Colour values These can be entered directly or fine tuned using the up down arrows Paint Mode Choose the Paint mode for the colour The choices are o Overprint Knockout Primer Opaque Adds an Opacity 96 slider Transparent Tint Adjust the intensity of the colour by adjusting the slider entering a tint value or using the up down arrows DotGain Curve Choose a DotGain Curve to apply to the colour Note A DotGain Curve applied to a special colour has precedence over global Process or Special DotGain Curves assigned to a Pagesetup The Pagesetup curves are ignored for the colour Weight Optionally assign an Ink Weight in g m to the selected colour This weight is u
32. options for use to manipulate or fine tune the colour to achieve the desired results Colour Correction Paper Profile Epson7900 EpsonProofing e Correction LUT Select a Correction LUT to be applied in the form um d A Linearisation LUT Epson7900 EpsonProofing of a Gradation Curve Preview the curves edit them or create new A amp Correction LUT None curves e Linearisation LUT Select a Linearisation LUT to be applied in the form of a Gradation Curve This is normally done as part of the standard calibration process with the use of the Lineariser Preview the curves edit them or create new curves e Paper Profile Select a Paper Profile to be applied If the output is to a printer this is also part of the standard calibration process ICC Profiles ICC Profiles are used to match colours from one device to another for example a Press to an Inkjet It does this by mapping an input to an output colour ICC Profiles e Output ICC Profile Select an output profile This is the printer on ICC rrote a or other output profile and is used to convert Lab data to the D output colourspace This output could be RGB CMYK CMYKOG or N Colour depending on the output device chosen and the detected colourspace e Output ICC Tweak Set Select a Tweak Set from the available list Lists can be previewed edited or new ones created e Device Link Profile Select a device link profile
33. 3D toggles between a 3D or 2D view of the publication Three dimensional viewing shows the page turning as you navigate through The turning speed can be adjusted FlipBook Settings 3D mode adds 2 sliders on the right side of the Page View The first alters the angle at which the 3D virtual book is viewed the second zooms the view in and out Note The performance of the page turning may vary depending on the size of the thumbnail being viewed and the performance of the graphics card e View as Calendar Only available in 3D mode Changes the flip axis to horizontal so pages flip up and down in the same manner as a calendar e Export Exports the FlipBook as a PDF Select the resolution compression type and quality Choose between exporting the whole book or a range of pages e Export as Spreads Exports the FlipBook as a PDF but as spreads The same options as above apply e Export as Movie 3D view mode only Exports the FlipBook as a QuickTime movie After selecting this there are three further options o Codec Type Choose the preferred compression type from the menu o Quality Choose the preferred quality o Keyframe Spacing Choose how often a keyframe is saved The settings you choose will affect the size of the movie the quality and the compatibility with other applications There are many Codec types available and not all work on all systems Commonly used types are Apple MPEG4 and H 264 avc1 Increasing the quality setting als
34. 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 114 o Grid Size Define the snap to grid size for frame placement in the Layout area o Paper saving Cropmarks Enabled by default Cropmarks will appear in paper saving mode when the option is enabled via the Property panel Only available when using Studio o Visual Warning Enabled by default Overlap Displays a dashed line around any assets placed in the Layout area that have overlapping frames Out of Bounds Displays a dashed line around any assets placed in the Layout area that are outside the defined media Edit Menu Undo Undo the last change made The amount of available undo levels is configured via the Client Settings 0 Operating System default level Redo Redo the last undone change The amount of available redo levels is configured via the Client Settings 0 Operating System default level Cut Cuts the currently selected frames to the Clipboard Copy Copy the currently selected frames to the Clipboard Paste Pastes the frames in the Clipboard to the Layout area Paste is centred at the current mouse pointer position Delete Assets Deletes any selected assets from the Studio application and the Asset Queue Create Crosshair SHIFT 1 Create a frame containing a configurable crosshair in the Layout area Click on the box within the Property panel to view further options Create Horizontal Line SHIFT 2 Create a frame containing a configurable horizontal line in
35. 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 128 Edit Touch Console UI Opens an Edit Interface window to allow for the configuration of the enabled visible buttons for control of SoftProof in the Main screen of the Touch Console Enable or disable buttons by selecting them Those disabled will appear with a red cross and will be excluded from the Touch Console when using it to view softproofs The Toolbar has a Preview checkbox when ticked the edit interface will show the IG Touch Console buttons as they will appear after saving While in Preview mode the button titles can be edited to reflect local terminology Click on the text to open the name field Hit Enter to save the name change ive ve Iv ivive v The Reset button re enables all buttons and restores default button names L JEJE s Ive ve o e Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 129 Serendipity Client Menu Items The Serendipity Client menus provide access to direct job submission options system settings and extra functions Application Menu Windows Linux or Serendipity Client Menu Mac OS X Preferences Select this menu option to open the Client Settings Preferences for the Serendipity Client containing default values and preferences configured for the Client and its applications and modules See the System Settings gt Client Settings section of this manual for further information Submit Menu Submit Files Select
36. 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 50 Publish Allows Pagesetup Pools to be published on a network as a Drop Pagesetup Pools The Pagesetup Pools data type is used for printing to one or more Pagesetups Load balance between multiple Pagesetups or print to multiple Pagesetups simultaneously These can be published in the same way as an individual Pagesetup or the Pool can be set to auto proof from a RIP configuration Publish Publish DropFolder Folder or as a network print destination for printing from another software application To Publish a Pagesetup Pool it is necessary for Printer Mac Windows TCP Port Activate port number the Serendipity Megarip PPD to be installed on the same system on Renee COM Mr aging C JOA ARa tung EC which the Blackmagic Server runs Server menu gt Download PPD M AA Beak ti ae ae G e Publish DropFolder Allocate a folder where files can be Py er x va icon m rb me dropped in for processing Valid File Types include By Print Aven dor Merino Meere Postscript PDF JPEG TIFF Image Serendipity Blackmagic MT fpe MTM ad cia pas x27 Image EPS PNG PSD tr d men diam on mM e Location Select a folder as a DropFolder The folder must SE MIA hu XP MTM exist and have read write permissions TE ts rneer cs ae e Default Reset the DropFolder location to the default one E M po OMTM Real ology _EpsonWT7 oof 144 Serendipity Blackmagic installation directory drop Pageset
37. 92 The remainder of the display area shows the current Calcheck status of each connected monitor Information includes e Process Colour Gray Paper delta values e Average maximum standard deviation delta values e Display name top left e Timestamp of the last Calcheck top right e Chart and Instrument used bottom left e Overall Calcheck score bottom left Note In cases where multiple areas of a screen have been calchecked the summary will display the worst results from across all calchecked areas Clicking on a Display name under the Calcheck header e g iMac will allow the user to perform a Calcheck on the chosen monitor The main part of the display area white box will show the detail or summary of the Calcheck as it is performed The top section above the main area has the following options e AAII Shows all ofthe A results measured as defined in the Calcheck Chart Ball ar an j ax e Ae Shows all of the Ae results only The Ae standard used DeltaE CIE94 CIE2000 CMC 1 1 CMC 2 1 is selected in the Calcheck Chart see Workbench Calcheck Chart for details CIE2000 is a recommended standard to use for display verification e AH Shows all of the AH results only e AC Shows all of the AC results only e Summary button Shows Calcheck summary results e Detail button Shows results for each measured patch of the Calcheck Chart The lower section of the main display area contains the following
38. Actual Pixels 90 e 180 Rotate the image 180 degrees A Show Actual Print Size 2 e Invert Invert negate the image e Fit Width 92 3 e Mirror Mirror the image t Fit Height 904 e Autocrop Remove any whitespace around a job There must be a completely clear area on any one side of the job cr 90 CW e Unsharp Mask Apply an unsharp mask to the image This will affect the 4 90 CCW edges within the image 180 e Use Press 2 Switch between Press 1 and 2 as configured in the 4 Invert SoftProof Settings for non RGB images viewed in SoftProof ii Mirror e Full Screen Switch between full screen mode and window mode t Autocrop e Thumbnails Select the Thumbnails tab within the SoftProof window Unsharp Mask e Page Index Select the Page Index tab within the SoftProof window e Notes Select the Notes tab within the SoftProof window e Loupe Display a virtual loupe on top of the loaded image The loupe amp 1 Full Screen F can be resized and magnification level changed if required The current Es Use Press 2 magnification is shown at the bottom of the Loupe 10096 means 1 v es Thumbnails OT screen to 1 job pixel Wi Page Index OX S Notes N C9 Loupe E Thumbnail Panel The thumbnail panel displays a small image of any jobs currently open in SoftProof Clicking on the relevant image will switch the SoftProof preview to that window Notes Panel 5 amp 5 Ee Notes gives users the ability to draw a text box on the imaged m e
39. Blackmagic Server 1 Openthe System Preferences for the Mac OS X EL 2 Choose Print amp Fax 5 PUSATNA 3 Click the icon at the bottom of the printer list panel to create a new printer zm 4 Selectthe IP icon atthe top of the Add Printer window prx 5 Protocol Select HP Jetdirect Socket from the dropdown menu I z 6 Address Enter the TCP IP address and port information for the O 3 printer setup in the folowing format Computer I IPaddress PagesetupPortNumber see image for example The IP meni i address for the printer should not be used Print Using Serendipity Sackmagi lt a 7 Name Enter the desired name for the printer It should be easily T a recognisable as a Published Pagesetup and or the particular gir Pagesetup being published d 8 Print Using Select Printer Software from the dropdown menu Cone i 9 A list of available Mac OS X system printer drivers will popup Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 142 10 11 12 Either scroll down the list and select Serendipity Blackmagic or type Serendipity in the filter field and select Serendipity Blackmagic and click OK Click Add to add the new printer Set the published Pagesetup Printer as the system default and or share the printer on the network as required on LAN Ir Stee A n Ate Software EET Q 2 Opes Pret uten tere Configuring a Pagesetup
40. C Render 1 Minimum Broadcast Interval 15 Output unknown files to printer If Email Notifications are setup for users Log printed jobs _ Secure mode e Enter the mail server details in the Mail Server field This is the eee outgoing SMTP server e Enter the email address for the Sender From field of the email a in the Sender Email Address field Sender Email Address Cancel C0 gi Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 135 System Settings The Systems Settings section contains default values and preferences configured for the Server and Client The settings are split into two 2 different sections Server and Client Access the Client Settings via the Application menu Win or Serendipity Client menu Mac Access the Server Settings via the Server menu Client Settings The Client settings are divided into three 3 tabbed categories General Colour Management and Application Shortcuts General e Client Settings Internationalisation Select your preferred language from those available This displays all Client and log messages in the chosen language The default is English A restart is required if the language setting is changed Show Tooltips Enable or disable tooltips within the Client Turn Sound FX Off Check this to disable the sound effects Sounds are used for things such as drag and drop and error message alerts Undo Levels Set the number of levels for
41. Fast Quick descreening algorithm Note D Dot is used where the output job is being sent to a photocopier or similar device with a front end RIP that applies a screen of its own If you did not remove the dot the job would be double screened producing poor output Use Fast for all other methods when the incoming screening is not to be preserved e Plates and Plate Type Override the descreening mode selected with other modes for the plates This is needed so that for example if RDT is used for all plates except Black which uses RDT Smooth 2 you will avoid getting moire Postscript PDF Options The following options are only used when the incoming data is Postscript e Use Bounding Box for Page Size Some Postscript jobs do not place a page size in the job information Checking this will use the bounding box as the page size e Simple RGB to CMYK Conversion This is a compatibility mode from older versions of the product Images are converted from RGB Postscript PDF Options to CMYK quickly using a basic method The colour is not very Use Bounding Box For Page Size accurate and is not recommended for contract proofs ian es uh oan e Fail on RGB Images Causes a job to fail if it contains RGB images If Z Antialiased Subsampling this is not checked the jobs will process but RGB images will be c pu ignored and not printed IV Use CMYK simulation from PDF for unknown colours e Antialiased Subsampling Used to assist in the ren
42. If the job passing through does not match the colourspace of the Device Link Profile the standard input and output profiles selected will be applied Device L Device Link Profile None Upload ICC This option is available on all of the ICC choosers and is used to upload an ICC profile from a local or network folder location to the internal Blackmagic ICC folder To Upload an ICC Profile 1 Click the Upload File button a 23 C fear 3 Ce 2 Browse to the location of the ICC file E mom o 3 Open the file Emm 20 8 m m zd 4 Select the location to save the file lib icc is pm a ma dan Main default SE m T3 HE 5 Click OK ie 6 Save the setup Media Pagesetup etc once the file 5 m ms has been uploaded Screen Printing The Screen Printing mode separates a job into single plates and prints them as black This is designed to print with a halftone dot onto a clear film media To increase the density of the output choose a combination of inks This option can be used to produce films for use Sereen Printing in the Screen Printing industry piqurbiai quies f Cyan f Magenta f Yellow Black e Enable Screen Print Mode Turns the Screen Print mode on or off C Light Cyan C Light Magenta C Light Black Ink Combination Select the inks to be combined for a single EE ciiin separation output In Screen Printing mode all jobs are separated and there must be a Paper
43. JL bi senno ec 63 Ac M 63 Impositions Grouping pages e 63 Inclusive Page Grouping In a SIBBatUTO ucescspitinipiitri uniri 63 Ink and Paper Press Configurations 57 Tile LATTES Fie bee etant dor ined 56 AT OTIUDET G 2 poscenti DIES 56 Inklimit Contig re CHAT Cie das edu wb oi in 53 Input PHP aom tae RO RUE 61 Installatie He sso endet eiie 7 What s on the DVD ees 7 J JO BOCrETIO 05er itr ripae outre 33 ACTIONS oae Hg de a tide 33 DeTinitTons ase euet bs 34 Interface Options ss 33 Job Grouping sss 35 Plate Identification 35 Plate Mapping secet 36 Separator Options 35 Tabs COM ct Eiles 2i babet 33 Displayen ie och ded 37 Filename Break Down 34 ODUODS S soniotn nu oq ttis 34 Jobname Plate 35 Publication Pages 36 Publication Part 36 E C 33 role apio Rm 77 79 Job Ownersbipz cose ire tili eo iun 77 Job Queuing Load Balancing 52 JODS asia oce Gat dh aa 19 98 Tasu nnde ubt M o M 98 Viewing in RIPMonitor 80 K KOCK OUTS sete tea ae at 67 L Language Encoding Signature Group eee 64 LinGarisation LUT ascen ise 40 DIBe APIS CE ucuoaoanca edidere
44. Media files from the Workbench to a specified location for use with the C5 application Export Import Folders Allows users to export or import the folder structure used within the Workbench It will not import or export the contents Undo Undo the last change There are multiple undo options and this is configured via the Client Settings section Redo Redo the last undone change There are multiple redo options depending on the undo status and configuration in the Client Settings Find Opens a text box at the bottom of the Workbench panel to locate the search text on the screen Split Vertical Horizontal Changes the view to either Vertical or Horizontal split on the screen Show Type Column Used in conjunction with Show Usage to display the type of data listed Show Modified Time Column Displays the last modified time for the items listed Show Usage Displays the items within the database the currently selected item uses e g a selected Pagesetup would show the Media and Output it currently uses Reverse Usage Reverses the usage shown above was called Show Referrers in previous versions Organise Data Types When enabled this option will organise the Data Types in the Workbench list into related categories This is the default view Access all available Modules via this menu A floating window will appear for each separate module opened Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014
45. Media used to process the job for the job Pagesetup The Pagesetup used to process the e Node The Server or Cluster Node the job was job processed on Queue The output queue the job was sent to e Signature Group The signature group used to for processing de impose the job Size The size of the job disk space used e Signature The signature within the group Width The width of the job used to de impose the job Height The height of the job e Page The page number of the job DPI The imaged resolution of the job e Publication The publication name Output Colourspace The colourspace of the e Notes The number of notes saved with the output file job e Section The section of the publication The columns can be manually resized by dragging the header divider bar to the desired width or resized to fit content by double clicking the divider bar Toolbar Options Queue Order Allows you to configure which queues are viewed by the QueueManager Available amp Showing Render Queue Thumbnails Enable or disable thumbnails for the Render Queue in the Thumbnails view of the QueueManager Show Idle Queues Show Hide entries in the QueueManager for idle processing queues Group by Queue Enable Disable the grouping of jobs by Queue before other column sorting is applied Show Show certain jobs in the QueueManager Select any or all of the options to filter jobs Choose from o Jobs Display all jobs as text line entries
46. Output The Output data type determines the output format of processed jobs and where they are sent to for printing or file output The Queue panel sets the output driver used and allows auto cleaning of job Output queues The printer connection or file destination is configured in the Destination panel The Collating section has options for Nesting and Duplexing Maintenance allows for automatic printer maintenance functions to be configured Queue e Output Driver Select the desired output driver from the dropdown list Those available will depend upon the options es enabled on the dongle The selected driver affects the options tnt re in a Pagesetup and Media pointing to it D e Change Media Select this to optionally assign a Media to the Output A chooser window will appear with Media displayed matching the Output driver type The options as set in the selected Media are displayed for view can be edited or a new Media can be created e Status Choose whether an Output Queue is Active able to print output or Inactive Print Output is paused This can also be controlled from a QueueStatus module e AutoClean Configures Blackmagic to automatically delete printed jobs from the Output queue based on times and or number of completed jobs in the queue Auto cleaning is performed the next time a job is submitted after an auto cleaning condition has been met Options include o Job History Keep Most Recent When enabled set a nu
47. Plots the date of the measurements on the X axis against the dot percentage on the Y axis The points on the chart represent the patches For any patch the effective dot and how it varies across the history is shown Dot 96 Patches Plots the patch number along the X axis against dot percentage on the Y axis A diagonal line from 0 to 100 is shown as a guide to a linear curve This graph will show if the patches are generally higher or lower than a linear measurement as well as differences over the course of time Dot 95 Delta Patches Plots the patch number along the X axis against the dot percentage delta on the Y axis It shows the percentage difference from the target For example if the target is 4096 and the measured value for that patch is higher or lower the error is shown in the graph Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 101 Yule Nielsen Number The Yule Nielsen Number is essentially a fudge factor applied to the standard Murray Davis formula used when calculating dot percentage area from density The value is used to compensate for various media types as some react differently to others in the way a dot will spread on a particular media and thus affect the dot percentage value It is sometimes helpful to change the YN number and some manufacturers will quote a YN number for a given media but this is rare The YN formula used for calculating the dot percentage is dot YN
48. Portrait Print to PDF Landscape Prev Next buttons at the bottom of the Job Info window are used to display the info for the previous or next job in the QueueManager Note Job Info amp thumbnail can also be displayed by double clicking on the job If multiple jobs are selected double clicking will display info about all in the window Holding the control key Win or command key Mac will allow the font size to be adjusted via the mouse wheel for easier viewing Job Ownership Displays two panels General and Ownership showing the type created and modified dates of the job plus the user and group permissions See Accounts Admin Secure Mode for more information Modify Allows various attributes of the job to be modified These include o Name Change the name of the job Publication Name Change or add a publication name Page Number Change the page number of the job Copies Change the number of copies of a job Change Media Change or assign a Media associated with the job o De Imposition Change or assign a Signature and Signature Group to a job Reprint Displays a window to reprint a job or jobs Cancel Cancels the currently processing jobs Delete Deletes the currently selected jobs Hold Holds the currently selected job Only available when the status is Waiting Release Releases a currently selected Held job Retry Retries a failed job View Errors Views the errors of the selected job if the status is listed
49. Press Contains the colour and dotgain attributes of a press Used by the SoftProof application to show the effects of printing a job on a particular press e Regular Expression Used in conjunction with the RIPs for autoproofing jobs based on matching particular rule sets e Replace Colour Set Used to match and replace certain colours as they pass through the system e RIP Configure a polling path and auto proof settings for RIP data proofing e Signature Group Create or import signatures for de imposition e Special Colour Set Used to identify and match colours when jobs are polled and processed Data Types User Interface and Context Menu The Bookfilter Media Output Pagesetup Pagesetup Pools Press RIP and Signature Data Types have multiple configuration panels or sections governing the different functions they control These data types have a row of buttons or tiles across the top of their configuration panels allowing the user to instantly jump to the section named If any of the panels are not required they can be hidden by using the X in the top right corner of each To show any hidden panels click on the panel name in the row and it will appear Shift click will hide them again Publish Colour Correction ICC Profiles ColourKeys Input Screening A contextual right click menu is accessible in any of these individual sections allowing the user to access the Find function Jump to another section or change the backgroun
50. Publishing a Pagesetup M t S Xenon toti ee ped 142 MW IBOOMSS diri tecti beds 144 Q Queue Order uote oic teste tei 76 Oueue Manage aceenss mend tea meia 76 Configuration Options 78 MOCIY oen oat Rao N 77 Toolbar Options 76 Viewing Options ssssssssssssrrsssrssrsrsrnsrrssrnesnn 76 QUCUEST TUS out oett re cese cas bentes d 79 Change Quete aont eundi 79 Queue Order cuoio Dite 79 R Real Dot Technology usd eor nicis tu 48 Registration Marks uiia rins 49 Regular Expression sss 58 GCOBOH IOS aged qe n it dt 58 EXpEBSSIOBS codeine beet nes 58 String EU edant rd 58 Relative Colourimetric Rendering Intent47 Render in RGB str treeues 48 Rendering Intemts 2 coii tuii 47 Replace Colour Set acsi eer 59 Add Colours From Library 59 Adjustment Panel 60 lE c 59 SLETT ON EE AE dois te ted 77 Resampling BICUDIC se ovii toD tib A 49 BID dE dcdit te rel LE 49 Filtered iiie niit AS ER RE tee 49 Nearest Neighbour 49 Retam Pure BlIackacsmouasa actis 47 RGB ICC Prone 3 5 ud onda tma 47 RGB to CMYK Conversion 48 EID seonuu ab CRT COAST 61 AUtOPEPOO HnE 3 iiio cetuntuterh tetris 62 Connection sete ote dtes tact man cobi 61 gi c M M 61 JOD Filtern iirinn 62 Patliscui asesino pne DR x es 62 POIlWB saucia d eR
51. RP Toolbar Contains job handling functions and wi ELLE viewing options 2m e Jobs This is the large window to the right and displays all successfully polled jobs from the selected RIP e RIP List A list of all the configured RIPs allowing the user to select each in turn to display any jobs This is on the left side of the window and can be shown or hidden as desired Active RIP queues are displayed in black inactive are red e RIP Menu This is a pull down list at the top of the window of RIPs configured and shows the current selection Hiding the RIP Menu will also hide the Polling On Off drop down selector ree ve CA we te beum be pogr ad tome ivi t pages 2 Note If you only have one RIP configured it is better to hide the left RIP list and top RIP menu as there is nothing else to display This will provide more room to view your jobs Toolbar Queues Frint Gallery Logs C IMMMER S A Cc X ae X c1 L Expand Jobs Collapse Jobs f Submit Submit For Deimposition X f Submit As Imposition Submit As Asset VPress M Group By Job Poll M Toggle RIP Polling M Show RIP Menu IV Show RIP List e Expand Collapse Jobs Show Hide the plates associated with the selected jobs Double clicking a job will also expand or collapse the pl
52. Screen Printing Enable Screen Print Mode and select Black for the Ink Combination and any others required Once this option is selected jobs submitted to this Media will always be separated and printed using the selected colours One or more inks must be selected from the available choices If Gray is selected as the Colourspace only Black will be shown as a choice e Output Screening Select Halftone and tick the SuperCell option Choose the preferred dot shape and enter the screen angles and rulings SuperCell gives a better shaped dot and the round dot tends to be more commonly used The default angles of 15 45 75 and 90 are shown by clicking the Defaults button however these can sometimes produce undesirable effects mostly caused by the Yellow plate To counteract this offset all angles by 7 5 degrees to make them the following o Cyan 22 5 degrees Magenta 82 5 degrees Yellow 97 5 degrees Black 52 5 degrees Special 52 5 degrees O O O O Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 69 Paper Profile Configuration In Screen Printing mode only one patch can be turned on per colour Therefore the value for the patch does not matter which one chosen does For a variable dot printer when the Use Light Inks option is turned off there will be four 4 patches for each colour The first patch represents the media and the other L 100 00 PANN aad L 16 00 three the dot sizes small medium and
53. Snaps the frame proportions to the asset s native proportions and resizes Resize is anchored at the opposing edge or corner of the frame Cropping Assets Cropping mode is activated or deactivated by double clicking anywhere within a frame containing an asset image When active the asset is separated from the frame and appears with an orange border The cropping frame will have a green border Either the frame or the asset itself can be selected and moved to the desired spot for cropping Double clicking the box after placement will show how the asset will be cropped Asset before and after cropping If the crop box is resized larger than the asset within see cropping example the space around the asset will also be printed to the size of the entire frame Submitting a Nest or Tiles The menu option Studio Print opens a Submit Chooser window to send the manual nest to a Pagesetup and a Media If tiling mode is active this option will change to Print Tiles Cloaking and Nesting with Large Format Flatbed Devices One of Studio s primary functions is the laying out of jobs for print using large format flatbed printers When activated the cloaking feature locks images and frames after they have been submitted as a nest to the printer Cloaked images appear shadowed in the Layout area see example are static and non editable unless decloaked This allows for easy placement and printing of new jobs onto blank available areas of
54. The buttons available depend on which A standards are defined in the chart for the Calcheck The Ae summary values listed are CIE76 by default This can be changed to CIE94 CIE2000 CMC 1 1 or CMC 2 1 by setting the measurement standard in the Calcheck Chart e job Media The Job or Media being calchecked The field displays N A if a Calcheck is done without assigning a Job or Media to it e Date The date and time the Calcheck was completed e ACyan AMagenta AYellow ABlack AGray APaper The A values for the significant CMYK process gray and paper substrate patches are displayed here e Pass Fail Displays a green tick pass if all the measured patches fall within the A tolerances as defined in the Calcheck Chart A red cross fail is displayed if any patches measure outside the defined tolerances e A Average The average delta of the patches measured in the Calcheck AMaximum The maximum delta measured for any patch in the Calcheck e Ao The standard deviation of the patches from the A Average e Score The relative quality of the printed Calcheck as compared to the reference values Rated from 1 100 Measurements Panel The Measurements panel contains the detailed reference and measurement data for each colour patch in the Calcheck Chart used for the check Colour patches that pass are shown in black those that fail are shown in red The following sort columns are available depending on the Astandards defined in the Ca
55. There is no need to update Version 3 curves if your printer is performing satisfactorily However there have been significant improvements made to the Lineariser so it is worth considering re linearising with Version 5 Available Media This panel displays a list of available Media Select a Media to view its current linearisation curves and data or to linearise a new Media Any changes made are applied to the currently selected Media Linearisation History Shows a list of all the linearisations performed for the selected Media allowing the user to track the performance of the output device The following sort columns can be selected using the contextual menu on the column header bar Column order can be changed by dragging and dropping the columns into the desired order or by using the Configure Headers option in the context menu e Date Date and time the linearisation was measured e Type Shows whether each linearisation curve was measured in Density or Lab mode Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 99 The panel has one 1 button Trim To Trims the number of stored histories to the value shown from oldest first The following options are available from the context right click menu within the History list Show Charts Launches a separate window that plots the linearisation history of the Media Gradation Curve on various charts See below for further information on the available charts
56. Time 3D Select the speed for the flipping of pages when in 3D mode Render Queue Thumbnails Enable or disable render queue thumbnails Show Borders 2D Enable or disable the borders when viewing in 2D mode O O O oO Press Configuration o This panel allows you to view or change the Press configuration FlipBook uses to display Publications Fiet Setia File Settgs Vw Options Aes Configurar View Ogtions Press Cantgquratan 08 3 View Menu These options are also available from the FlipBook View Menu View 3D View as Calendar Ink Weight Opens the Ink Weights window displaying the FlipBook publication s ink weights and coverage Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 97 Jobs The Jobs application is used to display jobs before after and during processing and allows users to manage jobs through the system to plot their progress The Jobs application consists of an easy to navigate user l CEREO iege tees CEE Mete One mtt tenes Qon ome Oe e interface with tabs and layouts available for various monitoring functions Tab layouts may be added or managed ne os according to individual preferences and are saved at the Client XC aaaea level allowing different users to display information appropriate to their location and workflow Jobs is the default monitoring application and will be run automatically on launch of Blackmagic after the initial software installation
57. Undo The default is zero 0 which means no restriction Default Units Set the measurement units used by the Client and all of the Applications Modules Instant Messaging Nickname Enter a nickname to use when accessing the Chatterbox application Memory Cache Maximum Size Set the maximum cache size for the SoftProof application The default is zero 0 where the Server chooses the default depending on system configuration R Cancel General Colour Management Application Shortcuts Internationalisation Default B General User Interface Settings mi Show Tooltips v Turn Sound FX Off Undo Levels 0 Default Units mm B Instant Messaging NickName SoftProof 4 Memory Cache Maximum Size 0 MB Maximum Preview Resolution 0 DPI 9 Maximum Preview Resolution Set the maximum preview resolution for SoftProof for both Imaged and Rendered options The default is zero 0 which is the full job resolution of the output file Colour Management Choose Default Match ICC Profile Select a default match ICC profile for accurate display of CMYK data CMS Dithering Disabled by default Use CMS Dithering for smoother results whenever conversion between 16 bits to 8 bits is required Calcheck Managed Enabling this will display the current calibration status of the selected monitor When selected there will be a small icon showing a green tick or a red cross This icon is shown in the
58. a new one Device Linearisation Curve Select a Device platesetter Linearisation Curve to be applied Preview the curve edit it or create a new one ICC Profiles Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 Preview the set edit it or create a new one Fi Replace Colour Set EROR Cyan Magenta Yellow Black DotGain Curves Select a C M Y or K DotGain Cyan DotGain Curve None Curve to be applied Preview the curves edit them or create new ones Magenta DotGain Curve None Specials DotGain Curve Select a DotGain Curve to be applied to the Special Spot Plates only One curve affects all Special Colours the same way Preview 6 Specials DotGain Curve None 6 Device Linearisation Curve None Always Use ICC Enable this to always use the assigned ICC profiles for jobs submitted to the Pagesetup and Media If this is not enabled the ICC profiles selected are only used in colourspace conversion This is the default option for any new Pagesetups created Honour Embedded ICC Profiles Enable this to use an ICC profile embedded in a submitted TIFF JPEG or EPS file as the input match profile When enabled embedded file profiles will always take precedence over any Match ICC assigned to the Pagesetup 46 Note The TIFF Image output driver has an option to embed an ICC profile into TIFF files that are output by Blackmagic
59. and Sort the patches in legacy Paper Profiles from previous versions e Reorder Inks Change the order of the inks in the paper profile to match the order used in the ICC profile Often used for N Colour profiles Highlight the ink channel in the list and move using the up and down arrows or drag and drop inks to the required position e Configure Ncolour Available for Ncolour Paper Profiles Opens the Ncolour Ink Configuration popup interface used to customise a printer ink set This option allows the user to profile printers loaded with non standard replacement ink sets see Ncolour Ink Configuration below e Upgrade Upgrades a legacy pre version 5 4 01 paper profile to the current version nw LI 1 6941 gt L ET 5 gt L m r v 3 J 8 Li i 1 L 10000 LOLS 3 0d is uM Contextual Menu Right Click All of the above options are available via the right click menu in addition to e Downgrade Enables the Paper Profile to be downgraded to allow compatibility with earlier software versions v3 v4 0 01 v5 1 v5 2 5 4 Density Patches This area shows the patches making up the Paper profile Each patch represents a dot size or combination of dots available to the printer being profiled n S tae eva 35 16 The number of ink channels shown and the number of patches shown for PARNA each channel will vary depending on whether the printer has variable dot capability
60. application starting a Calcheck of the softproof display to the standard patch set in the chart assigned to the current Press On completion the Calcheck status of the monitor is updated with a tick cross This button is only available if the currently selected Press Config has an assigned Calcheck Chart Note on Spot Colours When performing a calcheck of the softproofing display any special spot colours included in the currently loaded job are measured and included in the Calcheck for the purposes of a pass or fail View FlipBook Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On Only View FlipBook opens the selected publication or book in the FlipBook application Once a publication is opened FlipBook controls will appear on the console View 3D Toggle between 2D and 3D views View Calendar Toggle between left to right and calendar flip page turning Show Borders Rendered Thumbnails Toggle between imaged and rendered thumbanils for pages in FlipBook Full Screen Enable full screen mode Decrement Increment Start Page Even Odd Top Page Read Direction 1 gt 2 2 lt 1 buttons Top Section and Page Navigator buttons allow sections of the E FlipBook window to be toggled on or off ES es peY Previous Next Page Flip through the pages Zoom In Out Adjust the zoom level of the loaded FlipBook E Adjust Camera Angle Toggle a popup slider to change the viewing angle Reset Camera Reset the camera
61. as Failed Rush Jobs Moves the currently selected jobs to the top of the current queue for processing next The status must be listed as Waiting Jobs currently being processed will be completed first O O O Note Rush Jobs will move the job up the current queue only If the job is in the imaging queue and Rush Jobs is selected the job moves to the top of the imaging queue Once complete it will move to the bottom of the rendering queue You will need to Rush Jobs again to move it to the top of the rendering queue View Original Views the Original Imaged file for selected jobs in the SoftProof application View Printed Views the Printed Rendered file for selected jobs in the SoftProof application Render Again Submits the selected jobs to the rendering queue for processing Only available when the status is Done Move to Pagesetup Moves the selected jobs to another Pagesetup This will send the jobs to the rendering queue again with the attributes of the selected Pagesetup View the Pagesetup edit it or create a new one prior to submitting the job Copy to Pagesetup Copies the selected jobs to another Pagesetup This will send the jobs to the rendering queue again with the attributes of the selected Pagesetup View the Pagesetup edit it or create a new one prior to submitting the job Nest Jobs Submits the selected jobs to be nested This sends the job to the rendering queue to re render for a nest The Collating sect
62. as a Blackmagic Image File This can be submitted or placed in a hot folder or on a DropSpot Export Export data from SoftProof The available formats are CIP3 PDF Postscript Separated and TIFF Multichannel Submit Submit the current job to a Media and Pagesetup with any changes This re images and re renders the file When submitting the image to be processed again with any relevant changes the current image resolution is submitted If the resolution is restricted in the Server Settings this is the resolution that will be used Edit Touch Console UI Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On only Opens an edit interface window to allow the configuration of the enabled visible buttons for control of SoftProof in the Main screen of the Touch Console Buttons are enabled or disable by clicking on them Any disabled will appear with a red cross and will be excluded from Touch Console when using it to view softproofs The Toolbar has a preview checkbox to see how the Touch Console controls will appear and a Reset button to restore and enable all buttons SoftProof Settings Opens the preferences for SoftProof allowing for configuration of default viewing conditions See below for further information SoftProof Settings The SoftProof Settings allow you to select viewing preferences including how to load a job and the quality and press settings used to produce accurate proofs The settings window is split into three 3 tabs View Opti
63. as specified by the user Clean Print Head When enabled the printer will clean the print head Print Nozzle Pattern When enabled the printer will print a nozzle check pattern to verify all print nozzles are clean and functioning Nozzle Check When enabled the printer will perform a nozzle check e After printing o Linearisation Chart When enabled the printer will print a nozzle check pattern immediately after printing a linearisation chart If the pattern is incomplete the print head will need to be cleaned and the chart reprinted o ICC Chart When enabled the printer will print a nozzle check pattern immediately after printing an ICC Target Chart If the pattern is incomplete the print head will need to be cleaned and the chart reprinted e Calcheck Settings Specify the Calcheck Chart to be printed when the above Calcheck option is enabled Note The Calcheck Chart will only print if there is a valid Media attached to the Output via the Change Media button If the Calcheck fails the output will be made inactive automatically e Pagesetup Select the Pagesetup to use when processing the Calcheck Chart maintenance option Printer Maintenance This panel is used to manually execute a printer maintenance function or test print on enabled output devices Select the desired maintenance function from the dropdown menu Printer Maintenance e Execute Initiate the selected printer maintenance function or print Print
64. backed up and job queues cleared before a Blackmagic Server is started as a Cluster Node This avoids any conflicts with existing job IDs or settings Master Panel This panel displays information about the Master Server machine e Product The Serendipity Blackmagic software in use e Version The Server software version e Hostname The network name of the Master Server e IP Address The network IP address of the Server e Speed The relative speed of the Server calculated by Blackmagic e Processors The number of CPUs in the Server machine e Platform The operating system kernel version of the software e Process Imaging Rendering Schedule Last Check whether the Master Server is to perform any Imaging or Rendering Jobs The Schedule Last option allows nodes to have priority over the Master when jobs are processing This is advantageous when polling large RIPs as it allows the Master to concentrate on gathering the list of jobs and displaying them Cluster Nodes This list shows nodes that are available and running on the network Information about each node is displayed in the window Online nodes are displayed in green offline nodes in red The following sort columns can be selected using the contextual right click menu on the column header bar in the Cluster Node panel Columns can be reordered by dragging and dropping them into the desired order or by using the Configure Headers option in the contextual menu The so
65. chart is selected The data from a chart measured by a third party software package can be loaded for a Calcheck be selecting CGATS ISO12642 file from the instrument list The file must have been saved in an appropriate format Print Chart Opens a chooser window to select the Calcheck Chart for printing and the Pagesetup and Media to submit the chart to The chart will be printed in a configuration suitable for reading by the chosen instrument Menu Options The following options are available from the Calcheck menu or the contextual menu right click from within the Calcheck application Load Media Select a Media to load into Calcheck Any Media that have been calchecked previously will display complete results of their last Calcheck A new chart can be printed and or new measurements taken and the results updated to the Media Check Media Select a Media to be measured This option assumes a Calcheck Chart for the Media has been printed It immediately opens a window to select the chart for measuring and initiates measurement on the selected Spectrophotometer On completion results are saved to the Media and previously calchecked Media will be updated Load Job Select from a list of previously calchecked Jobs sitting in the QueueManager Once loaded complete results of the job s last Calcheck are displayed A new chart can be printed and or new measurements taken and the results updated to the Job Info Check Job Select any job curren
66. charts are comprised of user created or imported colour patches along with target standards and tolerances These items are saved to the database and can be used and or adjusted at any time The Calcheck Chart is then used in conjunction with the Calcheck application to provide a validation check for a hardcopy proof or a monitor TCI Once the chart is setup it normally never needs to be REM changed the standards to be used are saved with the chart f When reading the chart with the Calcheck application simply pus load it and measure If you wanted to use a different standard ee i this is done in the chart and not the Calcheck The chart can be attached to the job as it passes through the b ns E Pagesetup or printed from the Calcheck pc a The window shows a list of the patches on the right and pean colour information on the left For each patch selected its Lab mem a values delta tolerance and patch type can be adjusted The overall target preferences are specified in the lower half of the left panel Toolbar Options e New Colour Create a new colour in the list with default values Values and colour names can be adjusted as desired e Delete Colours Deletes the selected colours from the list e Duplicate Colours Makes copies of the selected colours Use shift or control keys for multi selection e Rename Colours Pops up a renaming window allowing for name changes on one or more colours sim
67. claims are assumed by the product vendor ansi2knr c is included in this distribution by permission of L Peter Deutsch sole proprietor of its copyright holder Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park CA ansiZknr c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation principally that you must include source code if you redistribute it See the file ansiZknr c for full details However since ansi2knr c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do The Graphics Interchange Format is the Copyright property of CompuServe Incorporated GIF sm is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated Copyright 1980 1993 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment 4 This product
68. cor au v vw Backmagic Pagesetup rameutar swoevel serendipity sottware co Bono HP Color Laserjet CF207 Fen Bono HP Color Laserjet CP202 5dn 18AB6F Boryour HP Color Laserjet CP202545 tangelo sedeve WP Color Laserjet CF202 San ois Name Slackmagic Bonjour Pagesetup Location Serendipity Blackmagic Print Using Serendipity Blackrmnagic More Printers Add If the field does not auto fill choose Select Printer Software from the dropdown menu A list of available Mac OS X system printer drivers will popup Either scroll down the list and select Serendipity Blackmagic or type Pici e Serendipity in the filter field and select Serendipity Blackmagic Click Add Naim Name Enter the desired name for the printer It should be named to be easily recognisable as a Published Pagesetup and or the particular Pagesetup being published Click Add to add the new printer Set the published Pagesetup Printer as the system default and or share the printer on the network as required Print amp Fax Back magic Bonjour Pagesetup Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies p Bacwrag lt gu Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 143 Publishing a Pagesetup on Windows 7 Blackmagic Pagesetup s can be set up as Windows system printer destinations to allow jobs to be easily submitted via the Print option of third party software or design packages Jobs printed to a Published Pagesetu
69. defined in the Dotgain table editor Note The Process and Special DotGain curves only apply to CMYK input jobs RGB jobs will not be affected A Gradation Curve A Gradation Curve is used to adjust colour in a job by applying a curve to the individual process colours The Gradation Curve can be applied to a Media either as a Linearisation Curve or as a Correction Curve A Linearisation Curve is normally applied as part of the early calibration stage and this is recommended A Correction Curve is applied if a small amount of fine tuning is required after normal calibration NON ertet procedures Toolbar Options e Trace Saved Curve A green line appears showing where the curve a cT was last saved and where the curve has been edited e Invert Curve Inverts the selected curve e Gradation Table Enter values manually to adjust or create a curve e Preview Curves Displays a window with all curves in their respective colours so they can be assessed in relation to each other This is updated dynamically as changes are made e Lineariser Loads a Linearisation Curve directly into the Lineariser application Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 31 ICC Tweak Set Build up a library of colours that need tweaking adjusting for accurate output with the ICC Tweak Set data type A tweak set alters colours during the ICC mapping stage from input to output profile and is selected on a per Media b
70. directly above the Page Index displays the Job Name for each currently viewed page on the left and right sides respectively Pages with more than one version will show a dropdown to select which version to view The Page Numbers being viewed are shown in the centre of the bar Menu Options The following are available from the FlipBook File Menu Open Publication Reload Publication Export Export as Spreads Export as Movie Two other options are also available Edit Touch Console UI Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add on Only Opens an Edit Interface window allowing for the configuration of the buttons enabled and visible for control of the FlipBook in the Main screen of the Touch Console see the Applications Touch Console section for more information Enable or disable buttons by clicking on them Those disabled will appear with a red cross and will be excluded from the Touch Console when using it to view a FlipBook The Toolbar has a Preview toggle to see how the Touch Console controls will appear and a Reset button to restore and enable all buttons FlipBook Settings Configure the FlipBook viewing options and press configuration View Options o Allow Multiple Windows Enable or disable Allows multiple Publications to be opened and viewed in separate FlipBook windows If disabled a newly opened Publication will replace the one currently being viewed Page Order Choose between reading left to right or right to left Flip
71. display available for calibration e Calcheck Lists each connected display available to calcheck e History Lists the calcheck history reference only of each connected display e Ambient Measure the ambient and white point of the light source e Light Booth Appears only when a light booth is connected and will list each connected device Calibration The Calibration function displays currently connected monitors and their calibration status By clicking on the Calibration header each connected monitor shows the following details e The name of the Display viewable screen dimensions in mm x mm and its identification number in a multi display environment Display iMac 520 mm x 320 mm e Pixels width height Pixels 1920 x 1200 Resolution 93 78 x 95 25 DPI e Resolution DPI ICC Profile iMac 070911 icc e ICC profile Status OK e Calcheck Status TI GASSONI 7 09 11 1 09 PM i Calibration Expires Never z Last Calibrated time Hardware Calibration Supported e Calibration Expires time period e Hardware Calibration supported or not for the particular display By clicking on the Display name calibration options and settings available for the monitor are shown These include e Brightness Only available if hardware calibration is supported and selected for the monitor see below Choose to set the brightness level in either o Candela Brightness in cd m tege o Set the level from 0 100 UEENSS impos ENB
72. dongle driver 1 Remove all SuperPro USB dongles 2 Navigate to the dongle linux folder on the installation DVD 3 Double click the sntl sud 7 5 1 0 1386 rpm file to install the driver Installing the Blackmagic Version 5 4 Upgrade To upgrade 1 Navigate to the linux folder on the installation DVD 2 Double click the install sh file and select Run in Terminal 3 Aterminal window will pop up and the installer will display the default installation directory 4 Press Enter to install or type an alternative path then press Enter Note If using an alternative install path ensure the folder exists and that the current user has read write execute permissions for the folder 5 Theterminal window will close when the installation is complete 6 Plugthe Blackmagic dongle into an available USB port 7 Startthe Blackmagic v5 4 Server and the Serendipity Client If the installation location was not changed the existing database should appear once the Server and Client have restarted reformatted and intact in the Workbench The Client should open with the previous versions configuration If the installation location was changed or in the event the existing database is not complete the database backup needs to be imported using the Archives application To import an existing database backup 1 Openthe Archives application from the Serendipity Client Application menu 2 InArchives select File menu Open Archive 3 Navigate
73. e Add DropSpot Select one or more Pagesetups Media to add to the 0 Peseecssesessemmseensamcisom sm DropZone Selecting this displays a chooser window showing all available i d Pagesetups Media Eine oom e Add Asset DropSpot Adds a DropSpot for the Asset queue Assets are then manually laid out nested and printed using the Studio application Q See Applications Studio for more information Asse e Reorder DropSpots Displays a reorder window Select one or more DropSpots in the list and drag them to a new location or use the up and down arrow keys to move the position Click OK when finished e Increase DropSpot Inset Increases the size of the DropSpot e Decrease DropSpot Inset Decreases the size of the DropSpot e Font Options Allows you to change the size of the text Additional contextual menu options are available for individual DropSpots e Remove DropSpot Remove the selected DropSpot e Edit Pagesetup Allows you to edit a section of the selected Pagesetup all sections or create a new one e Edit Media Allows you to edit a section of the selected Media all sections or create a new one e Change DropSpot Allows you to change an existing DropSpot e Set Copies Set the number of copies for every job dropped on the zone e Set Colour Select a colour from the list for the currently selected DropSpot Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 74 MediaStatus
74. e Queue Colour Select a colour for the currently selected Queue for easy identification e Queue Order Allows you to organise the queues into your preferred order or adjust any settings e Joblist View View the queue in Joblist mode This is the same as selecting Show gt Jobs e Publication View View any publications in the queue This is the same as selecting Show gt Publications e PrintGallery View View the jobs as thumbnails This is the same as selecting Show gt Thumbnails e Edit Output Allows you to edit the Output and not the job For changes to be effective resubmit the job for printing or rendering depending on the attribute changed e Edit Media Allows you to edit the Media the job was processed with For changes to be effective resubmit the job for imaging or rendering depending on the attribute changed e Edit Pagesetup Allows you to edit the Pagesetup the job was processed with For changes to be effective resubmit the job for imaging or rendering depending on the attribute changed e Edit RIP Allows you to edit the RIP of the source file where the job was submitted from if a configured RIP For changes to be effective resubmit the job or refresh polling e Edit Signature Group Allows you to edit the Signature Group used for de imposing of the currently selected job For changes to be effective resubmit the job for de imposition Important Note When editing any of the items from here you are edi
75. ed 61 Spe PALS vi dete io aedi NC naa 62 Testing Poll Configuration 62 RIPMOTIEOI aactor metior dri bano aa ex 80 RIP ASU saco storia reenact cee minis 80 Submit Jobs for De Imposition 80 Witt al PRESS uicti abide nO MO 80 R Sette oce a a sen 41 Cot atro Nishana inaani 50 Running the Software 16 Essi JobSet i 77 S Saturation Rendering Intent 47 Save AN ArChiV Ce asit an sans Rd 84 The Databases dvi qe in ux 84 Scale PACE d j roti MN Na AEIR i 50 Scheduled Backup oues ots eripi 84 Screen PEIDUTE oon ie erede 69 COMME rato Dodd idea yc ap vein 69 DO ANC Vi sene tissus bn epa uf 30 Searching For messages in the ClientLog 73 For messgaes in the ServerLog 81 Secure Mode eene 133 138 ACEHIVAEE oiuieiiiictei tendis potis pies 133 135 CONBULATION csse voient eor is 133 Creating GrOUPS atten erre rete tcs 134 Creating Users sess 134 Error Notifications 134 Hosts Panel catene wgvipodtided 135 Setting up Users and Groups 133 DUSer PEIVIIGBOS societates 134 Selective Import Choosing Signatures to import into Signature Group ues 63 Sending A Job to another Pagesetup 74 Separated POStSCEIDLU ien odere susiceeises 78 Serendipity Client Menu 130 Serendipity Client Menu Items 130 Accounts Admin
76. fill the media dimensions Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 115 e Auto arrange with Rotation Automatically arranges nests the images placed in the Layout area to best fill the media dimensions by appropriately rotating the frames View Menu e Zoom In Zoom into the Layout area view Holding down Z Left click will also enable this function e Zoom Out Zoom out of the Layout area view Holding down SHIFT Z Left click will also enable this function e Fit All Scales the Layout area view to show all frames currently in the nest e Fit Document Scales the Layout area view to show all assets and frames within the dimensions as defined in the Document panel e Print Size Shows the nest in the Layout area at actual print size e Fill with Document Scales the Layout area filling the view to the shorter width or height dimension as defined in the Document panel e Clear Guides Clear any guides from the Layout area e Guides Enabled by default Create a guide by clicking in the horizontal or vertical ruler section of the Layout area and drag the guide to the desired location See below for further information e Full Screen Toggles between a windowed or full screen view e Asset Toggles the Asset panel F1 can also be used e Property Toggles the Property panel F2 can also be used e Template Toggles the Template panel F3 can also be used e Sidebar Toggles the view of the s
77. for each reading If this is not selected the last reading is updated This is available after the device has successfully connected e Ae Select the value of deltaE to display for when comparing measured colours with those in a loaded set This is used in conjunction with the Show All Swatches option e Show All Swatches Select this to view all swatches By de selecting this only those swatches below or equal to the deltaE value entered will be displayed Colours within the defined tolerance values will show in blue Measured Loaded Set Panels The Measure and Loaded Set panels show the following information e Colour A swatch visually representing the colour e Name The name of the colour This can be edited by clicking in the name field e Values the Measured Lab values of the colour or the colourspace specific values of the Loaded Set colour The Measured Panel displays these additional data fields e Lch the Lch values of the measured colour e Lab above the list shows the Lab values of the currently selected measured colour e Xyz above the list shows the xyz values of the currently selected measured colour In addition the Loaded Set panel displays the following e e CIE94 CMC 1 1 CMC 2 1 Delta L Delta a Delta b These columns list the relative delta s of the loaded set colours when compared to the selected measured colour e Space The colourspace of the colour Lab or CMYK e Mode The paint mod
78. from the pull down menu first and m then enter the value Press Enter to apply the value Eoo None Delete Deletes the selected pages or groups oce oue v Duplicate Duplicates the selected page or group This is positioned at top left X20 Y 0 New Place Creates a new page or group Selecting this changes the button to Place Enter the page attributes as desired and click Place to position the page or group Press Esc to cancel ig lg kel e Number Enter the page number of the selected pages Top Bleed Enter the amount of top bleed to apply to the selected pages Bottom Bleed Enter the amount of bottom bleed to apply to the selected pages Left Bleed Enter the amount of left bleed to apply to the selected pages Right Bleed Enter the amount of right bleed to apply to the selected pages Page Head Select the position for the head of the currently selected pages The diagram shows the change The page head is indicated by a line and folded corner Choose between o PageHead Up o Page Head Down o Page Head Left o Page Head Right Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 65 Special Colour Set Blackmagic uses special colour sets to identify and match colour plates when jobs are polled and processed Special colours can be created manually or imported from one of several popular applications A library of sets can be built up for use in different proofing situations Colours can
79. if it has light inks and if the light inks are configured to be treated zn F Zs s D E Dot number 3 X Pi Light Magenta Lab 70 288 53 162 22 144 Ink amount 67 L 95 17 ue 66 26 L 49 8 Im Magenta as separate or combined channels These options are selected in the Output and Custom Settings of the Media chosen when creating the Paper Profile Before densities have been measured all patches will be turned on and will wa have default L value densities These densities are updated by data input L 95 19 V 88 32 from the Measure Patches option Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 53 e Patches can be turned on or off by clicking the upper half of the patch e Click the lower half of the patch to manually enter L value densities for that patch number Pressing Enter or TAB stores the value and moves to the next patch for entry e Hovering the mouse over the patch number displays a tooltip providing information about the patch including default or measure Lab values Sift and Sort Options When enabled the Sift and Sort options for each ink channel allow users to set the maximum ink coverage for the channel and display the channels name For legacy paper profiles created in previous versions of Blackmagic using patches with Density values rather than Lab values this option also allows users to set the patch order and sift for the optimal combination of dots for the ink channe
80. in the configuration panels The display panel is interactive and is used to e Select one or more individual pages within a signature for editing ud mens in the Pages panel ei e Select pages for grouping or ungrouping pairing or page offset e Show where pages of multi selected signatures fit within a publication in a bottom Page Navigator panel Pages belonging to the signatures are shown in green pages from non selected signatures are shown in red doubled up pages are shown in purple Selecting all signatures makes it simple to check the integrity of the eee Group SESESEZESESERERESESERERERERERERES e Select a page from the Page Navigator to highlight which signature it Mp ie art Mw ei sil gal pal s belongs to i 42 57 58 59 6i 61 6 63 amp 65 66 When viewing multiple signatures the thumbnail sizes can be increased or decreased with the cmd keys Mac or ctrl Win Plate Turn the Plate options on or off by selecting the Use Plate tick box The Plate settings are e Width e Height e Centre Offset The value to offset the centre by This is dependent upon the gripper position e Gripper Size e Gripper Position The plate width and height will alter the press Sheet size if the plate size is larger If the plate size is smaller the press Sheet size is not affected A plate size larger than the sheet size will appear with a red line outline within the signature preview panel Serendipity
81. includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 5 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 1990 1994 Regents of the University of Michigan All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of The University of Michigan not be used in advertising or public
82. is only available for Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On and allows jobs to be de imposed on the fly see Touch Console for details Files As Asset Select files to send to the Studio Application Asset queue Assets will appear in the QueueManager queue as thumbnails but are not processed until submitted for printing from the Studio application ICC Target Submit an ICC Target to a selected Media and Pagesetup ICC Target without Colour correction Submit an ICC Target to a selected Media and Pagesetup All ICC options and colour correction curves are disabled Test Prints Select one or more Media and Pagesetups to send internal test prints for processing New Create a new item in the database Save Save changes to the database Duplicate Make a copy of the currently selected item Revert Reload the last saved version of the currently selected item Delete Delete the currently selected item Print Print the details of the currently selected item Get Info Displays a popup window with two panels General amp Ownership General displays the type created and modified dates for the selected item Ownership displays the User and User Group permissions for the item Show Orphans Shows any item currently in the database not being used by a Pagesetup or RIP Add to Archive Add the selected items into a new Archive window See the Archives section for further information Export as C5 Pack Allows users to export
83. large A dot size for each colour must be 2 vd pa chosen If the Colourspace is Gray Black will be the only available ink 100 04 E a l i The image here shows an example using the patch 4 of Black and patch 2 of each Cyan 1 KS UA Magenta and Yellow There is no need to measure the value for the patches the default 1 100 00 ESIZ 65 33 values are sufficient Comparative densities are not relevant when only using one dot 1 x x tch In testing it was found that a combination of large Black patch 4 and small Magenta patch 2 produced good results If too much is used for example large Black large Cyan and large Magenta the result is wet output and the dots tend to fill in the shadow area Large dots of a colour like Cyan will produce film looking blue instead of black Black should always be the dominant colour Ink Limiting There is no need to enter any Ink Limiting as the plates are separated so there is no mixing of 2 3 and 4 inks Linearisation As Screen Printing mode prints only Black separations the creation of a simple Linearisation Gradation Curve to be applied to the Media is all that is required The Linearisation Curve can be created in one of two ways Method 1 Using the Lineariser application and a supported Spectrophotometer 1 Open the Lineariser application 2 Select the Media used for screen printing and print a chart for the Spectrophotometer to read Only the Black channel patches will be printed an
84. loaded select Edit menu Add to Database Whole Archive This will import the entire database Alternatively choose individual items to import from the list and select Edit Add to Database Selected Nodes The database items will be imported and appear in the Workbench for use For further information on Archives and backing up databases see the Archives section of this manual Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 13 Linux Upgrading to Version 5 4 Archiving Current Installations To Archive a Database 1 Run the existing Blackmagic Server and Serendipity Client a ee i aa imu Sna 2 Go to the Serendipity Client Application menu gt Archives FS ee fee ee S This application is called Archiver in earlier versions Somes n E 3 Select File menu Perform Full Backup inem quieme Spp a 4 Alternatively select Edit menu gt Add to Archive all and v add all database items to the archive file or right click in Pme i ES the Archives window and select Add to Archive all gt C mnnn _ j zj Everything from the contextual menu C MEE cH ure 5 Once all database items have appeared in the Archives 5 M window select File menu gt Save Archive to save the sdb 7 z C EC RM archive file to a chosen location RN EE 6 Closethe Archives application when finished Installing the Dongle Driver The first step is to install the
85. method is faster than TCP IP printing for these devices Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 42 Nowhere This is used for internal testing purposes or for softproofing workflows Files created by the print driver are not sent anywhere they are left in the default raster location A print time for simulation can be entered PAP AppleTalk Select a networked AppleTalk device to print to The Change button displays any valid AppleTalk devices Secure FTP sftp Send the job to a secure server using FTP TCP IP Port Print to a networked device over TCP IP USB Printer Print to a printer connected via USB Collating Collating Collation Method Duplexing 18 Collating is a method of gathering various outputs and grouping them together TONES There are two 2 methods of collating available depending on the output driver n TUUM selected If an output driver that supports Duplexing is selected the additional Bou O Duplexing collation method becomes available Otherwise the only option is mm Nesting e Duplexing Duplex jobs with multiple pages to form double sided printing This is only available for printers supporting duplexing modes Nesting Add Separator Page Adds a blank page between duplexed sets This is useful when de imposing and duplexing perfect bound jobs A blank page is inserted after the Maximum Jobs is reached for duplexing to begin Top Page Determine if the top p
86. nettes 95 Page Ide X coonnes tio eda 96 l age Ode seio mi apis irdis ovra 97 SEL Sio ea cedi trenes eaaet 97 Flow Control 46 51 130 Folders Adding to the Workbench 26 Fotoba Cut MaEKS aan aede iod 49 FEP mer RS 28 42 PONE oat iot tpi eod cedat ion 61 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 158 G GIOSSALY edisotid qoia au pddo Cad vo aan 150 Gradation Curve sse 31 Invert CUEVe n evt imis pd eph 31 BULUM 31 Preview CUEVES ais ted ite 31 Tablon tac ao adt n ien 31 Trace saved Curve iineoae 31 EU POPES ZG iioii itii dia pon inii 64 Group By JOD asian tontceataectspats dede ca Ur et 80 Pages within Signature Group 63 H Hold After Imaging 62 82 Hold After Rendering 62 82 Honour Embedded ICC Profiles 46 I ICC Apply Correction to CMYK Specials 138 Engine Accuracy esses 138 Upload ICC to Server 40 ICC Profiles ac ats uitcatetibivimn vdu tein D 32 40 ICC Tweak SOU was nette tenir 32 COLOUTS PACE cai wien cotneimutein eter 32 Tweak Value uade ade 32 Ignore Items neuen iatis cere 58 Import Language Encoding 64 Import Colours Into Special Colour Set 59 66 Importing Signatures DDynastr passe se eee tita hte 63 EOS oot ite n 63
87. or module in the list 2 Use the Edit option in the context menu right click or click in the Shortcut field to the right of the application module name 3 Typein the key or key combination for the shortcut and press Enter The shortcuts will now appear in the Application and or Modules menu of the Client To remove a shortcut 1 Highlight the selected application or module in the list 2 Usethe Clear option in the context menu right click or 3 Click in the Shortcut field and delete the shortcut Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 137 Server Settings Server settings are saved to the Server and are common to all connected Clients The Server settings are divided into three 3 tabbed categories General Colour Management and Working Paths General e Default Units Set the units used by the Server Options are mm m cm inches points picas metres or feet sa e Maximum Memory for PS RIP Set the maximum memory used TTE by the Postscript RIP The default is OMB which uses the internal Maximum Memory For PS RiP bus default amount Maximum Memory For Rotation OMB e Maximum Memory for Rotation Set the maximum memory used init face for Rotation The default is OMB Server chooses the default Maximum Print Preview Resolution 180 DPI depending on system configuration ascii NIU 9 j e Low Quality Thumbnail Selecting this produces a lower quality Phere d ESTE pq thumbna
88. out for nesting or tiling The area is surrounded by a ruler marked with the user defined measurement units appropriately scaled to the current zoom level All assets and frames are shown at accurate relative size The dark gray area is the work surface onto which assets are placed and positioned If in tiling mode the edges of the total area to be tiled appear on the work surface as a red box Layout area with loaded template Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 116 Asset Panel The Asset panel displays all jobs that have been submitted to the Asset queue Any assets that appear may be used in Studio for nesting or tiling Place assets by selecting with the mouse and dragging dropping them onto the Layout area Assets can be selected singularly or in multiples see image example The Asset header bar has the following view options e List View Display assets in text form filename jobname A thumbnail preview of the image will appear at the bottom of the panel e Small Thumbnail Display the assets as small thumbnail images with the jobname listed beside them e Large Thumbnail Display the assets as a large thumbnail image only e A search field is available at the bottom of the panel Enter text to find a jobname containing the search string Non relevant assets are temporarily filtered out of the view as the string is typed This search field will not appear when in Large Thumbnai
89. page numbers after pairing When pairing a large publication the lowest page number of the pair is used as the resultant paired page number This usually produces gaps in the page numbers Close Page Number Gaps closes the gaps so pages are sequential e Import Language Encoding Select the appropriate language encoding for the signatures so the names can be displayed correctly in the native language This is set from the contextual menu right click Signatures Signatures This panel lists all of the Signatures in the group The Plate Sheet Grid and Page options for C the selected Signature are shown in the configuration panels on the screen o Signature Options e New Creates a new untitled signature 10 55 e Delete Removes the selected signatures from the list e Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected signatures Duplicate Signatures can be multi selected or dragged and dropped to another position in the list for de imposition purposes When multiple Signatures are selected all will be shown in the display panel The Plate if in use Sheet and Pages settings can be edited to make mass changes to all selected Signatures Display Panel Signatures selected from the list are displayed in this panel with all Plate Sheet and layout properties as defined in the configuration panels visually represented If multiple signatures or pages are selected differing parameter values will be shown by bold underlined field titles
90. pages with the same publication name This is a collection of book or magazine signatures that have been de imposed but a publication may consist of any number of pages AN FlipBook lt 2 gt admingdurian swdevel serendipity software com au 9100 NFR not for resale Publication Pagination FlipBook allows you to load the publication and flip through pages as you would with a real magazine or book This enables MescODIOMONLIUIENNO NND xb I EJ TOR moe CDM ONE you to check that your de imposition has worked correctly that pages are in the correct order orientation and if there are any d duplicates Larger views of the pages can be called up and the whole publication can be exported to PDF or as a QuickTime movie 4 FlipBook can be opened in three ways 1 From the Application menu of the Serendipity Client Publications can be dragged and dropped from the QueueManager into the FlipBook window and will open automatically 2 From the QueueManager application by selecting a job RISE COLF ch te ll vig N LCS ORE TETE coal te a and choosing View Flipbook The View FlipBook option is only available if the job has a publication name i a Ss o to ST n oie as ae sp 18 3 From the BookMonitor application by selecting a Publication title and choosing View FlipBook Available for Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add on Only If the pages for the selected publication title have not been imaged or rendere
91. part of the string For example clicking a part named Page will show Page in the string This will display the page number only in the RIPMonitor It may be useful to add Page before the Page part so the RIPMonitor will display as Page 1 e Display Specification Shows the parts created in Tab 2 e Jobname String Shows the string that will be displayed in the Name column of the RIPMonitor and QueueManager You can enter any valid character or use filename parts e Job Directory Buttons Allows you to enter the job directory into Jobname Publication and or Section String fields e Publication Name String Shows the string that will be displayed in the Publication column of the RIPMonitor and QueueManager in Publication view You can enter any valid character or use filename parts e Section String Shows the string that will be displayed in the Section column of the RIPMonitor You can enter any valid character or use filename parts Edition String Shows the string that will be displayed in the Edition column of the RIPMonitor You can enter any valid character or use filename parts Check the Serendipity Software KnowledgeBase for HowTo s on creating a Job Genie http skb serendipitvy software com au Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 37 Media The Media data type contains all of the settings controlling the output of jobs as they pass through the Blackm
92. screen to load manage and proof jobs within the SoftProof application Workbench The principal configuration tool for Blackmagic see the Workbench section for more information Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 83 Archives The Archives application allows you to make backups or archives of your Workbench configurations Individual items or complete systems can be archived for safekeeping Stored items can be loaded into the Archives app for adding to the Blackmagic database This can be used for copying a database to T e another Server or for recovery from failure or corrupt configurations EE EM 5 Mo MURAT T You can configure the Archives app to automatically backup your ET rear S settings on a regular basis TO E Important Note Archives cannot be back ported to previous versions a Soe els ie version 5 archives cannot be used with version 3 Version 3 T c T emu archives can be used with Version 5 however and will be z Sm r automatically allocated to their respective databases when loaded EDU c a Se ane File Menu Options EE um e Open Archive Open a previously saved archive A chooser a window allows you to browse and select an archive sdb file to load You can also load an archive by dragging the database into an open Archives application e Save Archive Saves the archive to a compressed sdb file e Save Version 5 3 Archive Saves
93. that ask questions for e g Job contains unassigned colours Do you want to add them to VirtualPress Information Used for messages that tell you something for e g Job has a duplicate plate Warning Used where the message has a higher importance and usually the Client failed to do something but operation can continue for e g Failed to save new password Old password will continue to be used Critical Used for serious errors that will most likely affect operation for e g Failed to load rendering dll You will normally be required to take action to rectify these errors before continuing Search You can search the log for jobs or messages Enter the text of characters you want to search for and the ClientLog only displays the lines that match the search Display Options The following sort columns can be selected using the contextual right click menu on the sort column header bar in the log Type The level of the message reported For e g Question Information Warning or Critical Date The time the message was reported Source The module or application that reported the message Summary A summary of the message that was reported Command Internal command used to communicate messages to and from the Server by the Client Error An error code reported by the Server This is useful for de bugging problems Action The action taken by the user relating to the message For e g the button pressed wh
94. the Asset file to be tiled It can be resized as required Once the Asset has been placed lock the frame in place Frame menu gt Lock This will allow you to preview how the image will overlap and the tiling by making the image transparent Submit to print when ready The option will appear in the Studio menu as Print Tiles Note Automatic cropmarks and alignment marks will be added to any tiling jobs when submitted via Studio Studio Rendering Effects There are various rendering effects available when using Studio They will not be visible in the Layout area and will only affect the job when it is rendered ready for printing Any effects can be previewed using SoftProof once the job has been rendered and nested The available rendering effects are Cropmarks Available as a checkbox within the Studio application Enabling this will place cropmarks around the selected frame This effect will adjust the placement of the job on the media to compensate for adding cropmarks during the rendering phase The type of cropmark to be used is configured in the Studio Settings Convolution Matrix Available via the Pagesetup see Workbench data types Allows you to design your own filter effect according to a pre defined mathematical operation known as convolution This effect is not available when using the C5 Client Mirror Available via the Pagesetup Mirrors the job Negative Available via the Pagesetup Allows for the job to be negated or i
95. the Height field in the Media section of the Property panel see below Media section for further information The dimensions entered will appear in the Layout area tiled and overlapped accordingly to cover the entire document area After placing and locking an asset making it transparent in the document area you are able to preview how the image will be tiled and overlapped onto each media sheet before submitting to print e Width Total width of the area to be tiled e Height Total height length of the area to be tiled e Tiling Enable or disable tiling mode e Tiling Overlap The size of image overlap for each tile Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 117 Media The Media section of the Property panel is used to define the print size of the media be it a roll or sheet The height length does not necessarily need to be entered for roll sheet media The Layout area will automatically adjust the sheet guide length when assets are placed if a width has been entered e Page Size Select a pre configured page size from the dropdown menu or enter custom dimensions o Manage Custom Page Sizes This option allows users to create and manage custom page sizes for use in Studio Any page sizes created here are will also appear in the Media Cut Sheet page size options in the Workbench and in the Signature Groups Grid page size section e Width The width of the media being used for prin
96. the a Embed appropriate driver for your printer from the dropdown list of m m EM licensed drivers This should be the same driver as was used for Ma e ES the Output configuration Configure the print resolution to be used if available and the print colourspace e g CMYK from the dropdown menus Select any custom settings for your printer Click the Edit button to nee RUE select any options from the popup settings window These options M s may include paper type print mode cutting options light ink WwW usage Click Accept to close the window E Set your Output ICC profile via the Choose ICC Profile button In most cases for a new install this will be the Standard SWOP CMYK profile Optionally load your own profile by choosing the Upload File button and navigate to your profile Click OK to assign the profile Save the Media configuration when complete by selecting File menu Save Note This Media configuration is the minimal setup required to get your proof print workflow functioning For proofing work the Media will need to be correctly calibrated For a complete HowTo guide for configuring a calibrated Pagesetup Media Output refer to the Support section of the Serendipity Software website Pagesetup Configuration po 09 De Em Select Pagesetup from the Data Types list and create a new Pagesetup by selecting File menu New The name Untitled will appear in the item list highlighted for renaming Renam
97. the archive to a non compressed sdb file compatible with version 5 installations up to and including version 5 3 xx e Close Archive Closes the currently opened Archive e Perform Full Backup Adds all Workbench data types to a new Archives window Once done you are prompted to choose a name and location to save the file Once saved the Archives window is dismissed automatically e Automatic Backup Preferences Allows you to configure the frequency time and location that a system backup is performed The options are o What Day Choose a day ofthe week every day every number of days or never o What Time Choose the time the backup is performed o Location Choose the location the archive should be saved to A check is performed Auto Backup Time Client Started Time Backup Performed when the Client is first started and every hour Monday 2am Monday 9am When Client is started 9am afterwards to see if a Tuesd backup should be Tuesday 12 10pm ped No Tuesuay TAnpa 9 30am performed The Client must be running for a Everyday Tuesday Aan Client is con 7 backup to take place The 12am Midnight 8 20am 12 20am each day table gives you a guide as The following to when a backup would Thursday occur in different 8 30am Wed at 11 30pm scenarios Sunday 10pm Monday 8am Friday 5pm Edit Menu and Context Menu Options e Add to Archive All Select everything or all of a particular data type for e g All Pagesetups e Add
98. the selected publication Note Books publications can be opened in one of two ways Selecting the Book title then View Original View Rendered will open the Book at the first available page Expanding a Book selecting a specific page then View Original View Rendered will open the Book at the chosen page View Options The following sort columns can be selected using the contextual right click menu on the sort column header bar in the Display panel e Name the name of the Publication Page sourced from the planning file e Section lists the section to which a page belongs as defined by the planning file or by a Bookfilter Job Genie e Page The page number of the page file as defined in the planning file e Date the Date Timestamp of the planning file e Date of Issue the publication date of the publication page as defined in the planning file e Files the directory path and name of the source planning file for the Book e Edition lists the edition to which a page belongs as defined by the planning file or by a Bookfilter Job Genie The order of the columns can be changed by clicking and dragging them to the desired position or by using the Configure Headers option under the contextual right click menu The columns can be manually resized by dragging the header divider bar to the desired width or resized to fit content by double clicking the divider bar The contextual menu also has options to Edit BookFilter change the Col
99. the window Font Options Allows you to change the size of the text in the window Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 75 QueueManager The QueueManager displays information about submitted jobs and the jobs current status Queues can be viewed simultaneously showing job progress through Imaging where the incoming file is interpreted and its resolution sampled for conversion to the print resolution Rendering a a where colour management cropping rotation and effects are risen emn E applied for printing and Printing s AL The QueueManager also allows jobs to be manipulated in a number of ways such as holding promoting deleting and reprinting SE E View Options There is a lot of information available for viewing about each job as it passes through the system The following sort columns can be selected using the contextual right click menu on the column header bar in the QueueManager display panel Name Job name e Copies When multiple copies of a job are sent Process Time Time taken to process the job for printing this column counts down the Status The jobs current status number of jobs left to print Source The source of the submitted job e Screening The screening applied to the job Date The date and time the job was e Thumbnail Shows a thumbnail of the job processed e Job ID The internal Blackmagic ID number Media The
100. ticked the dots selected are most likely a poor choice and may not be valid or that the ink channel has been turned off by not choosing any of its dots Separate Ink Channels only M Me Fea Vo Va Fo Fa Wo We Mm Separation Control ais Separation Control displays where a light ink mixes with standard or Mapa ee heavier inks within a process ink channel For example the coverage level E where Cyan is printed and where light Cyan finishes Manual Separation Control is available when the Paper Profile is linked to a Media for a printer that has light inks enabled and the Treat Light Inks as O Ba Ha Ma Ha Ms Hs Separate Channels option is enabled These settings are in the output Custom Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 54 Settings of the Media The graph displays the portion of each ink used at ink coverage levels and where the inks start and cross over To view individual inks on the graph click the ink colour checkbox at the bottom of the screen Click an ink twice to toggle all graphs on or off Shift click to display selective graphs The sliders on the left show the inks where control is allowed i e those with light inks as well as heavy inks The graph on the right changes as you adjust the sliders to see the effect of different values To view individual inks on the graph click the ink colour check boxes at the bottom of the screen Note For v5 2 Paper Profiles optimal Separation
101. to and select the saved backup archive sdb file Click Open The archive will open in the Archives window and display all database items from the previously backed up configuration 4 Once the archive has loaded select Edit menu Add to Database Whole Archive This will import the entire database 5 Alternatively choose individual items to import from the list and select Edit Add to Database Selected Nodes 6 The database items will be imported and appear in the Workbench for use For further information on Archives and backing up databases see the Archives section of this manual Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 14 Saving Restoring the Blackmagic Database and ICC Profiles using the File System An alternate method for backing up the existing database and ICC profiles is to copy the relevant file folders from Blackmagic to another location before upgrading to version 5 4 The database items are held in a folder called defaultss dbd in the following locations Mac OS X Applications Serendipity Blackmagic lib defaultss dbd Windows C Program Files Serendipity Blackmagic lib defaultss dbd For versions 3 5 09 and below C Serendipity Serendipity Blackmagic lib defaultss dbd For versions 4 0 and above Linux Sun SGI bmagic lib defaultss dbd The ICC Profiles are stored a folder called ICC in the following locations Mac OS X Applications Serendipity Blackmagic lib ICC Wi
102. to poll for planning files The Poll Interval should be set according to your specific requirements Setting the Poll Interval too short can flood the network with polling requests packets causing it to slow down Setting it too long can take a long time to show stable files ready for submission Fast Polling This will automatically poll two 2 more times as soon as one 1 automatic poll has completed It will not wait for the next scheduled Poll Interval before it polls again Log Statistics Log the polling statistics in the Server log The log message reports Started automatic poll on lt date gt when polling starts and Completed automatic poll on lt date gt when finished Show Books Newer Than When activated this option sets the Bookfilter to display only polled publication planning files with time signatures newer than the specified days hours min time in the BookMonitor Note Older planning files are hidden from view not deleted Job Genie Select a Job Genie to apply if required A Job Genie may be used optionally to remap the Publication and or Jobnames in the polled planning file Connection Specify the method used for polling The options are o Agent The Serendipity Agent is installed on the RIP where the files are located This is used for polling and submission of the files into Blackmagic o Hostname IP Enter the hostname or IP address of the computer where the files are located and where the Agent is running
103. to submit files directly as an imposition rather than from a RIP queue This will submit an imposed job in its original form but attaches a Signature Group via popup chooser to allow the job to be de imposed on the fly using the Deimposed Pages button in the Veripress SoftProof Touch Console see Touch Console for more information Available for Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On only Submit Files as Asset Select files to send to the Studio application Asset queue Submitted Assets appear in the QueueManager queue as thumbnails but are not processed until submitted for printing from the Studio application see Applications Studio for more information Submit ICC Target After selecting one or more ICC target files a chooser allows you to select a Pagesetup and Media to submit the ICC target file to Note This option is used as part of creating an ICC calibrated Pagesetup Media After creating and assigning a Paper Profile and Linearisation curve to a Media this option is used to submit an ICC target file to the printer with all ICC options disabled The target is then read by third party ICC profiling software and used to generate the printer s output ICC profile which is then assigned to the Media Submit ICC Target Without Colour Correction After selecting one or more ICC target files a chooser allows you to select a Pagesetup and Media to submit the ICC target file to Note This option works in a similar way to Submit ICC
104. v 0909009900000009009090009000009000000299 i 332321827272952727 G d a Creating Templates Templates can be created from existing asset files or by using the Step and Repeat function within Studio Both methods are outlined below Templates saved when in Tiling Mode do not save the tiling setup only the frame placement for the asset To create a template from submitted asset files 1 Zi Select Submit menu gt Files as Assets Navigate and select any files to use in Studio Once the assets appear in the Asset queue Asset panel they may be used Drag and drop an asset into the Layout area Adjust the size and properties for the frame The frame may be copied and pasted into the Layout area for quick duplication of properties or the Step and Repeat function Frame menu gt Step and Repeat can be used Save the template when complete This will not save the images within the frames only the frames and their placement in the Layout area The saved template will appear in the Template Library list with the name Untitled Click the text to rename as required To load the template double click the name An empty frame set of the nest will appear ready to accept any asset files dropped into the frames Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 120 7 Submit the nest to print when done If a new set of images using the template is required double click the template name again to reload
105. versions of Blackmagic were installed To upgrade 1 Zi 3 4 9 6 Insert the Blackmagic installation DVD and navigate to the windows folder Run the blackmagic32 msi 32 bit or the blackmagic64 msi 64 bit file If necessary change the installation directory to the root directory of the hard drive e g C Serendipity and click Next Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the upgrade Plug the Blackmagic dongle into an available USB port Start the Blackmagic v5 4 Server and the Serendipity Client If the installation location did not require changing the existing database should appear once the Server and Client have restarted reformatted and intact in the Workbench The Client should open with the previous versions configuration If the installation location was or needed to be changed or in the event the existing database is not complete the database backup needs to be imported using the Archives application To import an existing database backup p 6 Open the Archives application from the Serendipity Client Application menu In Archives select File menu Open Archive Navigate to and select the saved backup archive sdb file Click Open The archive will open in the Archives window and display all database items from the previously backed up configuration Once the archive has loaded select Edit menu Add to Database Whole Archive This will import the entire database Alternative
106. want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original author s reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 153 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered b
107. which parts should be grouped together to complete a job and which part identifies the plates of the job You can specify how the plates are described and control specific mapping Job Grouping e Only group files in the same directory as job Check this box to group filenames together in a directory Files in different directories will not be grouped mee Ape 4 T This is used when job directories are created containing all the plates Sometimes the filenames vary for the name of the job but because they are all placed in one directory per job they can be grouped together nen we GA M nevi hos e Group files with parts This displays the parts created in Tab 2 Filename Break Down Select the part or parts that make up the job name by clicking the tiles onscreen In most cases the file part defined as the plate should not be chosen as this would group files with the same plate together rather than combining the different plate files into one job Plate Identification This tab is where you define which part created in Tab 2 Filename Break Down is the plate part and how it is written in the filename e Plate Part Select the part of the filename that describes the plate colour from the dropdown list The list contains the part created in Tab 2 Plates are e Defined by words The plate names are complete names for example cyan pantone 252 e Defined by numbers The plates are defined by numbers for
108. will auto select if 1 8 is chosen via the Custom field slider option o 2 2 Select this to set the gamma correction value to 2 2 This button will auto select if 2 2 is chosen via the Custom field slider option Options o Use Hardware Calibration When supported this option uses the monitor s own internal hardware for calibration allowing the screen brightness to be adjusted automatically o Use Self Calibration Available on some high end graphics monitors Uses the monitor s own internal hardware and calibration routines for calibration o Use Software Calibration Calibration is performed using the Displays application software Instrument offline online Instrument Name Displays the currently activated instrument o Instrument Select from the list of supported eunt tt Spectrophotometers to use for display calibration A ee 3 omo o Display Type Select the type of display being calibrated from LCD CRT or RAW Monitor Identification Number Click to popup an identification number in the centre of the screen for the display to be calibrated Calibrate Click this button to start calibrating the selected display to the chosen settings and create the display ICC profile Follow any onscreen instructions for your instrument When calibration is complete a file chooser will popup to name and save the ICC profile The profile will be saved as the operating system native ICC profile for the display and will appear as the Native Profi
109. 142 Configuring a Pagesetup for Publishing as a Bonjour Printer esee nennen tenete tnter ttn tnnt nt totins tete ni 143 Creating a Bonjour System Printer for Mac QS X cinerea catt iu rk iiid en cxi cbr uin nidia baein aani aai habida dainai RO cn ihv Pea vae dad 143 Publishing a Pagesetup on Windows 7 5 oucenisei n iE D a sir esupe eU Od IUe UID Ia E Qc nA EELNB DII U Qu OE cue SEN D C ND E RS VNDE CENA NR E NUM CNN CNN 144 Meo AT io edu au REENE NO Tn 144 Configuring the Pagesetup for Publishing as a System Printer esses nenne tenente tentent ttn tete entren 144 Creaumnped TCP IP Windows Systemi Printer aes d vist alee anh uid cud d Ee ORC QA EX ERI ELE Due EO cd 144 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 3 Printing to a Published Pagesetup Printer across a NECWOTk cssscsssccseesseesesesseesseeseneeeseeseeeseesesnessneseneeseeeseeseenessnesnneeeenens 146 Printing from Mac OS X gt Mac OS X or Windows WindoOwWs sssssssessssessesseseeseseeseseeseeseseeeseeaeseeseesesessesueaneaeeseaeenesneaeateaseeaneeaeass 146 Printing from Mac OS X gt Windows or Windows Mac OS X e esses nennen nte ten tettnten tete n tetto tetto ten tonto te toten tonio tonis 146 Prin ng to d Pa2Besetup on WIIDITUOWS eeissuoatuetce Dico a Pesto irc Cebu aa uncia vt fois Ui iuns a fu ena vei VENERE rv ERE Ed tU 148 GIOSSa NY etn 150 COP deris NOCES riia a a dies EEEE a a R
110. 25 Server e Server Settings Access the System Settings or Preferences for the Blackmagic Server e Connect to Server Select a Blackmagic Server to connect to on the available network e Resume Pause Processing Allows users to pause or resume all job processing and print queues Queues pause after completion of the current task e Accounts Admin Allows an authorised administrator to create modify and manage user accounts and groups e Chatterbox Chat to other users connected to the same Server with this option The Chatterbox window will display the Clients connected to the Server A nickname may be entered in the Client Settings otherwise the machine name is used If the users name cannot be selected the user has selected the Away option and is not available e Broadcast Message This allows messages to be sent to all users connected with a Client to the same Server Selecting the Broadcast option displays a message window to type into and send The message is displayed on the users window for a short time and will automatically dismiss if it is not acknowledged by clicking OK e Download PPD Download the Megarip PPD from the Server to the desired location This saves having to get the PPD from the disk Use the PPD when installing a local printer When installed the Megarip PPD Postscript Printer Description is selected as the printer driver when setting up a Blackmagic Published Pagesetup as a print destination for third party ap
111. 39 Colour Correction 40 ColourspaCce accanto rni od 38 EM Sereenlibp us siete utestiieteqer 41 Halftone Screening 41 ICC Profil Siniset 40 OWEDUE inier tun nete 38 Output Screening sss 41 Paper PEODl eucctnraneipetidben pesi 40 Printer Marglts toe dihidio e 38 Screen Printing eoe eet tentes 40 MS ccc odas aa iie eaii 39 MediaStatus 3 55 casi t aiu ei aimer 75 Calcheck Status cei inis 75 Usage Meters etn me eet eren 75 Minimum Plate Count 62 Module Siinse uten totius ies cd 71 BookMonitot 5 nean utentes 71 CHENTLOS seme EURO 71 GIUSPerS AUS op sep NS URN Mt 71 DropZDBe sso ao tte 71 Me didStat Ss s td mis Up pr RA 71 Queue Manage aceites 71 OleueSLatuss ei hn oid 71 RIPMORBICOFE sin nihii ride nive 71 SERVE TOG Sueco orte iso tisted n ed tt 71 SLATS pan A en Deed 71 Th mbpnpdll socs etait de eios 71 VIECUSIPEOSS uuo iN eaten 71 MODnLIEOE icon saiititn cn eia etuden nme 20 103 Add Modules idcacii ho ien 103 Edit MOGEe s cssodi im TER ORO EIE 103 Imaging Thumbnail 82 Layout Options sess 103 Load a saved layout 103 Rendering Thumbnail 82 AOS Anba a lates 103 USE MO Ces opa Ua Mn uiii 103 Monitoring Jobs sss 19 N Nest ODS nidi cie Ht te 77 Ne
112. 64 bit mode is optimal for normal usage however not all Spectrophotometer and printer manufacturers have converted their drivers to support 64 bit and will be unavailable for use in 64 bit mode New installations of the Server and Client are always in 64 bit mode by default Before starting the Server and Client To switch the Server and Client between 32 bit and 64 bit mode 1 Open a Finder window 2 Navigate to the Applications Serendipity Serendipity Blackmagic folder 3 Highlight the Serendipity Client application and select CMD I or right click and select Get Info from the menu 4 Tick the checkbox to enable Open in 32 bit mode 5 Repeat the above steps for the Serendipity Blackmagic and the C5 application if necessary If the Open in 32 bit mode checkbox does not appear in the Get Info window it will be Version 5 3 necessary to reset the Mac OS X Finder Copyright Copyright Serendipity Software Pty Ltd 1994 2011 Labelix U GUGU 1 Open a Terminal window F Open in 32 bit mode 2 Type or copy the following command into the screen and press Enter with no line breaks System Library Frameworks CoreServices framework Versions A Frameworks LaunchServices framework Versio ns A Support lsregister domain local domain user domain system kill r 3 The above command will make the Open in 32 bit mode option appear in the Get Info window 4 Go to the Finder window right click Get Info and enable this option for the Cl
113. 86 Font configuration and customisation library e glib2 i686 A library of handy utility functions e libpng i686 A library of functions for manipulating PNG image format files e libSM i686 X Org X11 Sm runtime library If the Package Installer can not locate the libraries open a terminal window go to the root directory and install each library using the following command yum install name of library To install Blackmagic Navigate to the linux folder on the installation DVD Double click the install sh file and select Run in Terminal A terminal window will pop up and the installer will display the default installation directory Press Enter to install or type an alternative path then press Enter e ok le Note If using an alternate install path ensure the folder exists and that the current user has read write execute permissions for the folder 5 When the installation is complete the terminal window will close Once the installation has finished proceed to the Running the Software section of this manual Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 10 Upgrading to Version 5 4 This section details upgrading an existing Blackmagic installation to version 5 4 The Installer automatically upgrades the existing database to the current 5 4 format As a precaution before upgrading it is recommended that the Blackmagic database and ICC profiles are backed up using the Archives application see
114. Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 64 Sheet Enter the dimensions of the press sheet in this panel The options are Grid Width Height AutoFit Changes the press sheet size so the pages fit This panel is where the grid of pages that make up the imposition signature is defined or edited The options are X and Y Position This sets the top left position of the selected group or page in respect to the top left of the press sheet Page Size Select the size of the single page selected from one of the pre set page sizes or choose Custom o Manage Custom Page Sizes This option allows users to create and manage custom page sizes for use Any page sizes created here will also appear in the Media Cut Sheet page size options in the Workbench and in Studio Page Width Enter the width of the single page selected The pre set page sizes automatically complete this field Page Height Enter the height of the single page selected The pre set page sizes automatically complete this field Orientation Select the orientation of the selected page between cw Portrait or Landscape X 0 0 mn Columns Enter the number of columns for the signature Me Rows Enter the number of rows for the signature mace Haight 285 Gutter X and Y Enter the size of the gutter for the signature If a gap is OS a selected first the value is applied to the selected gutter only To apply a ge value to All Even or Odd select it
115. CC 29 Import Patches contes potens 29 Pateh Det Tito aea ORARE 29 Patche Sannn aaa an 30 Patches Per SUPIDicas sonis necis 30 Reorder Patches vroiai 29 Spectrophotometer 30 Target Standards sisoosceias in eai 30 TOC AN COS abso aa aeuum 29 Calcheck Managed 136 137 Calibration Reminder 136 Camera adnot md Geeta 31 Canvas WESD usendiuiedteadadbt iiim bte bud eaa uu 118 Centrine asisas iei Us ded cuit irit u d Uns 50 Change Mediano ete tede iu pic ir 42 Change White POIHLE socer tet feet 32 CIE acetate deuda i D 78 GITGDE s aera tton ttstaetiated innen 24 Inte ols h el cheek rene peer abeunt dn dg 24 WOK DENCE sonent Rp Redi 24 Glient Seg Seite i titan stint 136 Additional Monitors 137 Application Shortcuts 137 Colour Management 136 GENET Al osea itai rasa 136 GHENT OP ao oidesdeo ata did pa 73 Display ODUODSuewttesinnhg uide tiq egit 73 EXPOYt ETOD a one du 73 Fetch Back LOB usce eiie 73 Filtering Option Sicinius 73 CVS LOI oa odoce nin ipd nA peri a resti 87 Cl ster Nodes eec fedis iere 87 Master Paneles vtto daten tu 87 Menu OPO icasiccalwdanari nasi eats 88 GIUSLCUS EQUUS cnini otc AED Pn E 74 CMS DICherlng ocn geb orn 136 139 CMYK Simulation from PDF 49 Colour Management Default ICC Profiles
116. ClientLog Displays a log of Client messages that may be generated during normal Client operations ClusterStatus Monitors the progress of Imaging and Rendering tasks on the Server and any active Cluster Nodes DropZone A place to drag and drop files for processing MediaStatus A window showing the current calibration status of a Media data type and a progress bar showing the amount of media e g Paper used QueueManager View and manage jobs after they have been submitted for processing QueueStatus A progress meter showing the current status of active jobs on the selected queue RIPMonitor Displays the files polled using RIPs configured under the RIP data type within the Workbench ServerLog Displays any system error and polling messages from the Server Status Shows the disk status usage of the Server processing areas Thumbnail Displays a thumbnail of jobs as they image or render VirtualPress Available within the RIPMonitor module Allows for the assignment alteration and management of plates to polled RIP jobs Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 71 BookMonitor The BookMonitor module available for Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add on displays the publications polled from planning files using the BookFilter data type The publications can be expanded to show a list of pages and filenames associated with each page The module allows for quick viewing of large multi s
117. Cluster Node called pomelo is currently offline In this Nodes case you would check the node server is up the machine is still EIU EB e p eR Speed T ed Pin connected to the network and can see the Master If there is a Bi imaging i WES problem with the node check the error log One the problem is Rendering resolved click the Refresh button or close and reopen the Clustering viv Bud SA Renee ee application pee e The Node and Master are different versions The node should always be upgraded when the Master is to maintain the same versions in a Cluster Cluster Nodes Errors Log The Cluster Nodes create an error log which logs all the messages from the node This is located in the Blackmagic installation directory on the node s own machine and is called errors log This can be viewed with a normal text editor and can help to track a problem or it can be sent to support for assistance in tracing a problem A Node Cannot Be Found Once you have started your node successfully you should be able to see it in the Clustering application If not you need to add the node manually If this fails there are a few things to check e Verify the node is still running and the clock is still counting up e Check the error log for any messages e Check that the Master machine can ping the node machine If not there may be a network issue and you will need to contact your network administrator for assistance e Check the port
118. Control settings are determined automatically if the Ink Start Control values are set to 0 NColour Ink Configuration The Ncolour Ink Configuration interface is used to customise a printer ink set change ink names define ink colours light inks and device spot inks Used in conjunction with the Reorder Inks function this option allows mom TA ws ve the user to profile printers loaded with non standard replacement ink an sets The interface contains two 2 panels the Ink List Panel and the Ink SSS Configuration Panel cae Soe em Ink List Panel The Ink List panel displays a list of the inks available for customisation in the N Colour Paper Profile Each of the printer s inks is defined in 7778 three 3 columns e Name The user defined name for the ink channel This defaults to the original name Click in the text field to rename the ink e Original The name of the standard ink channel for that ink slot e Type The process light or custom n colour ink channel type the ink occupies for the purpose of creating an ICC Output Profile for the printer Contextual Menu Right Click Options e Revert All Revert all ink channels to the printer defaults e Revert Channel Revert the currently selected ink channel to the printer default Ink Configuration Panel The Ink Configuration panel is used to display and edit the properties of each of the printer ink channels for the N colour Paper Profile Click on ea
119. If the ICC profile is located somewhere other than the default ICC folders use this function to upload it to the Server ICC folders in order for it to be used As this is a Client side option use this function for moving ICC profiles from the machine they were created on to the Server This can be either on the LAN or WAN as a remote machine e Print Calcheck Select this to attach a calibration strip to every job passing through this Pagesetup The Calcheck results green pass or red fail will change the colour of the job information shown in the QueueManager when the job is processed see image below o Device Choose the device used to measure the strip with This creates the chart for the correct device o Chart Choose the chart for use from the popup window of Calcheck Charts Note The Calcheck Chart is a Data Type in the Workbench This is where the chart is created Use the Calcheck application to measure it and produce a report Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 47 ColourKeys This module allows for the merging of some plates and separation of others from a single job submission For example merge the CMYK plates together and print the 3 specials as separate jobs or create progressive proofs with C CM CMY CMYK CMYKS1 etc e Enable ColourKeys Select this to turn the module on e Plates Shows a list of available plates e Add Adds the selected plates to the Plate Combinations l
120. Keys Widget The Ink Keys icon will display the Ink Key Viewer containing the loaded image in the SoftProof window At the bottom of the window will be a series of ink keys Colour bars give a graphical display of the proportion of each ink contained within the job across the keys For each key selected the relative percentage of ink for each of the plates is shown An information panel runs down the right side of the window The top of the panel shows information about the currently loaded Press Settings Job view and placement can be changed and ink weight can be calculated for any job Colour checkboxes Positioned above the image these show the inks or plates used in the job Clicking on one will turn the others off and leave the ticked colour on SHIFT Click allows for multi selection of colours Double click to show all Ink Keys The keys at the bottom of the window show the inks selected to be viewed on a graph The scale of the graph varies depending on the amount of ink in the job Hovering over or clicking on an ink key will display the key number and its ink values at the bottom of the information panel Press Settings Shows the values for the currently loaded press Click the box to show or hide the details Press settings used are selected in the Default Press panel of the SoftProof Settings Show Excess Ink Weight Area Display areas exceeding the Maximum Ink Weight setting as defined in the Press configuration S
121. Mob244 1538 Dongle created Wee Oct 22 15 55 32 2008 Licensed modules Available Printers Canon BJC 8500 Rev 3 04 Canon mage PROGRAF W6400 W6400 Rev 1 07 Canon iF5000 PF8000 PF93000 Rev 1 07 Support To access the Serendipity Support site select this option from the menu This is the same as if you accessed the Serendipity Software website directly Serendipity Support o B From here you can download databases release notes manuals zl updates tutorials FAQs and other helpful information You will need to have an active Internet connection for access to the support website function Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 141 Publishing a Pagesetup on Mac OS X 10 6 x Blackmagic Pagesetup s can be set up as a Mac OS X system printer destination to allow jobs to be easily submitted via the Print option of third party software or design packages Jobs printed to a Published Pagesetup will be automatically sent for processing and colour management in Blackmagic eliminating the need for dropfolders or manual file submission Note Jobs printed via Blackmagic in this way must be in a file input format available to your Blackmagic version Installing the Serendipity Printer Drivers The first step when Publishing a Pagesetup for the first time is to install the Serendipity Printer Drivers for Mac OS X The installation package is located on the Blackmagic 5 4 Installati
122. N 151 jr aa a cng aN Sone uns aE S a e a ee 158 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 4 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Copyright Serendipity Software Pty Ltd Reproduction of any part of this user manual is strictly forbidden without prior written permission from Serendipity Software Pty Ltd All company names product names and trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of the respective company Important Notice Every effort is made to ensure the information contained within this user manual is correct Serendipity Software Pty Ltd cannot be held responsible for any errors contained within this user manual and will not enter into any negotiations for claims of compensation relating to actions taken resulting from the information provided in this user manual for any reason whatsoever Serendipity Software Pty Ltd is constantly making improvements to the software and as such this user manual may not contain the latest information Every effort is made to maintain the user manual and for the latest version please check the website http www serendipity software com au If there are any errors within this user manual please detail them in an email to support serendipity software com au Tutorials and HowTo documents are available on our website in the Serendipity Software Knowledge Base http skb serendipity software com au Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03
123. Nozzle Check Pattern and F W version Execute Primer Maintenance V Print Nozzle Check Pattern and F W version gt Execute Auto Nozzle Check without Metallic Ink Auto Nozzle Check with Metallic Ink Bidirectional Adjustment Unidirectional Adjustment Paper Feed Adjustment Head Alignment Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 44 Pagesetup A Pagesetup consists of many configurable modules to manipulate a job for the desired output This is where the Input Screening and ICC Profiles Render Effects Colour Keys and other Colour Management options are setup Output e Change Output Selects the Output method and assigns its configured properties to the Pagesetup e Change Media Select the default Media settings and assign its properties to the Pagesetup If a job is submitted to the Pagesetup without a specific Media the job will output using these default Media settings e Output Settings O Output Antialiasing Choose from 2x2 3x3 4x4 or None Antialiasing is designed to smooth jagged edges and is used when the Output does not have sufficient resolution to G Chango Modia 2001101 0 000 000 display edges smoothly The values increase the amount of een pixels used for Antialiasing The default setting is None ee Priority Assign a priority to a Pagesetup The lower the Auto Publication Name number the higher the priority Numbers can be negative lii adi for a higher p
124. P IP Port Enter the computer s network name in the Host ID field When Windows requests additional info for the port select Custom Settings Rename the Port Name if desired Set the Protocol to Raw and the Port Number to the one set in the Pagesetup Pool to be published 6 Select Serendipity Megarip as the driver If the driver is not already installed choose Have Disk and get the driver megarip inf from the Serendipity Installation DVD found in the drivers win OS Version directory pre e ups Flow Control Select whether to hold the submitted file after Imaging or Rendering in order to prioritise jobs or make rendering attribute changes before releasing Options include O Hold After Imaging Hold jobs submitted to the Published Pagesetup Pool after imaging has completed Held jobs can be released to continue processing via the QueueManager toolbar or contextual right click menu Hold After Rendering Hold jobs submitted to the Published Pagesetup Pool after rendering has completed Held jobs can be released to continue processing via the QueueManager toolbar or contextual right click menu Nest When enabled this option will nest jobs submitted to the Published Pagesetup Pool according to the criteria defined in the Output used by the Pagesetup Media Note The Nest function only requires that the Output used has nesting parameters defined The Output itself can have nesting disabled for normal use This makes it
125. PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 155 AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Appendix How to Apply These Terms to Your new Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attached the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is fou
126. Pk CINIS ocho e PR op enu 56 Measure Patches itt eie 53 Preview Grap DS esanean 53 Prnt Ghat osne nena 53 Separation Control 54 DIC ANC SOLL sini a e 54 Upgr d e anas nua Had dE 53 Perceptual Rendering Intent 47 Perform Full Backup 84 Poll code on aan dd i hd 61 Creating a RIP to poll jobs 61 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 159 Ignore Mod Time 61 Initiate a Manual Poll 80 Logging Statistics sss 61 Method to use ee 28 61 Patisserie ie tte NESSUN 62 Testing Configuration 62 PPD What s on the DVD sss 7 PRESS iis cher cec ies oh ee ML GU ME 57 Colour Management 57 DIMENSIONS sinas ee torba cipes 57 Ink atii Paper iais 57 Press Apent seers aie aa 104 bo 104 Press CG Prone cas sctacensssiicntesaapsvacestinavein rotis 47 Press TOES st eiot a petente nibii 47 Press Sheet Settings uua venerdi 65 Print Calcneck iiie eer cto os 47 Print Inklimit Chart 53 Printing Troubleshooting 148 Printing to a Published Pagesetup across a NetWOTR sem 146 Progressive PEOO Suaiesnivtetiptus tii pe niis 48
127. Profile where only one dot for each colour is turned on Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 40 Output Screening Apply screening to the output file if desired This is only available if the output driver selected supports screening There are two 2 methods available FM Screening or Halftone Output Screening FM Screening Variations Method FM Screening Stochastic Standard Stochastic Screening Stochastic 2 and 3 Stochastic Screening with progressively increasing amounts of ETEN noise mixed in This is done to overcome some artifacts caused by Inkjet printers O Stochastic 2 e Stochastic Fast A fast version of the Stochastic Screening mode Slightly lower Q zA T quality than Stochastic C Error Diffusion e Error Diffusion Error Diffusion Screening May enhance edges within images LJ Orden Ditties e Ordered Dither Ordered Dithering Screening Applies a threshold map on the pixels displayed causing some of the pixels to be rendered at a different colour Halftone Options Traditional Rosette Dot mont t 9 e Dotshape Choose the dot shape to suit your requirements from Round CR Inverted Round Elliptical Inverted Elliptical Diamond Euclidean or Line SuperCell Select this to choose SuperCell screening instead of standard halftone Produces a much better quality output than standard halftone This is the default option for Halftone Screening when enabled Angle D
128. Screen button allowing the user to click a colour anywhere on the display to define the ink colour ROBT AEE OMS G ae Note Device Spot Colours and Spot Colour Mapping Some printers or custom ink sets feature inks such as metallic and white intended for signage and display to replicate a press process or substrate to act as a primer or for printing on transparent media These device spot inks are handled outside the normal colour management process and are not included in the output ICC colourspace for printing These colours are printed in one of two ways 1 Automatically according to the Spot Generation method assigned to them in the dropdown menu or 2 As a spot colour mapped to a plate in an incoming job see Media Spotcolour Mapping Mapped plates will always override the automatic spot generation method when printing i e a job with a spot colour configured in Media to be remapped as white will only print white in the areas defined by the spot plate N colour mode allows any ink in the printer to be assigned and printed as a Device Spot Colour Ink Limits The Ink Limits tab has controls for limiting the ink mix of the channels applied in the Paper Profile The number of ink channels varies depending on whether the printer has light inks and whether they are being treated as separate or combined channels The window to the right displays a summary of the driver configuration from the selected Media Options SS e Yul
129. Software website for tutorials on creating your own customised Job Genies A 8 Choose the method the RIP setup will use to connect to the RIP output folder from the dropdown menu in the Polling panel for example Localhost Enter any Hostname IP details if required Enter the file path to the RIP folder in the Paths panel To enter a path click the New button below the panel Click Browse on the popup window and navigate to the RIP folder to be polled Click OK to save the path If required setup Stripe Paths Click the Test button at the bottom of the Testing panel to Save and Test the RIP setup The Testing panel will show a Polling OK result to confirm the RIP path is valid Alternate messages will notify you if the RIP path is invalid or if no RIPped files currently exist in the selected folder This completes the basic configuration of Blackmagic For information on how to see polled RIP jobs and submit them for proofing see the Modules RIP Monitor and Serendipity Client Menu Items Submit Menu sections of this manual Monitoring Jobs Configuration Once the base configuration is complete for the Media Output Pagesetup and RIP a monitoring application needs to be configured so jobs can be managed throughout the system There are two 2 types available the Jobs default or the Monitor application Jobs This is the default application launched when the Client is started for the first time The Jobs applic
130. Target however all Linearisation data will be disabled at the time of submission unlike Submit ICC Target which enables colour correction curves The job info will display Calibration Target ICC Disabled in the Properties field Test Prints Send a Blackmagic Test Print to one or more Pagesetups Medias Select which test print s to submit by ticking the checkboxes beside each file name in the Submission area of the Submit window Note You can add your own files to the lib testprints directory for use as test prints Any files you have permission to use that are placed in this directory will appear for selection in the Test Prints chooser window Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 131 Server Menu Server Settings Select this menu option to open the System Settings Preferences for the Serendipity Server The Systems Settings section contains default values and preferences configured for the Server See the Server Settings section below for further information on each panel Connect to Server This allows the Serendipity Client to connect to a Blackmagic Server running on the network The Refresh button will search for and display any active Servers Alternatively you can enter the name or IP address of the Server in the Server Address field under the Manual tab If there are multiple Servers Masters running on the network the list is cached on the first Connect to Server selection A dropdow
131. UOD AS AEE E EEE E ENESA E eirca indole tu ved Drs E Elis Uca E DEM REDE IE LOC ctu EDU Dp E E D Entire ATT 80 ra tacts 81 OE GE E CN MAREM HC rg ROPE E AAE T E E ee ee ee oe 82 CO a2 Bereta te trees at ei Man on Po een ee E eM PS 82 MA M aeie UN SARUM A ANE E A tes deilcavansuawe cease A E E R A E EE E EE E E 82 huie mec 83 PRTC NR 84 leuiter castes ccs cut to PCR EE 85 NUTS Te ES coca a eos c Mecha a QU Mt QE Mui atic abuts ecu cect nace Ounce n Cdp ada ecd AC RD 87 ICTS UOT CUCL NRI TT 89 Display Ss CT H 91 d pieisTero dtc c I 95 JOD P 98 L Ile NS BP AN EE E E E E etii Nn patas idu sm uu cM EDU A E ce Lees E E LO 99 MOMO Ue cautus thon etu E E un EM S DI uu E RM 103 acrior e E 104 SOTEPEOO I scindit eisdat rt On NC NER M NA EMIT ERI M NM EM MM EM ELT 105 BF egeo M a a E S n 113 wiRIIcILON MO TrPT IU 114 d Hai redo CONSOLE PENES 124 Serendipity Chent Menu ternis aoo tere eet er rei a E II ir EO Een Irc E Tic Eee cd IUUD USES 130 Ap
132. Windows Upgrade or Mac OS X Upgrade sections for details or by copying the database directories see Copying the Database and ICC Folders section for details Important Note Pagesetups imported from Version 3 archives will automatically be split into Media and Pagesetup data types but remain functionally linked Version 5 4 archives cannot be opened or imported into previous versions of Blackmagic Windows Upgrading to Version 5 4 Archiving Current Installations To Archive a Database 1 Run the existing Blackmagic Server and Serendipity Client a meme ol ot Sn o Damna 2 Go to the Serendipity Client Application menu gt Archives Eo peepee Ed This application is called Archiver in earlier versions aa lee cx 3 Select File menu Perform Full Backup June Sp 4 Alternatively select Edit menu gt Add to Archive all and Sa add all database items to the archive file or right click in M the Archives window and select Add to Archive all gt 7 777 SSL cm J Everything from the contextual menu WI ee e 5 Once all database items have appeared in the Archives 5 e window select File menu gt Save Archive to save the sdb z 7 m archive file to a chosen location DON 6 Closethe Archives application when finished Installing the Dongle Driver Update Version 5 dongles new or upgraded require an up to date Safenet dongle driver in order to function
133. a aaaea ia daara slatted eet aai apaa Ge tem suas teh dpt eens ave 10 Upgrading to Version 5 4 o ioong oit ipe Uv sas eva Coen Ue eT E eFREDUR ta ar co E eaea SINE CERE TR ER FUR RE FNTETASS VN ERERAR DAT OR USB eenaa edana e aUR ATO dE RE NINE ES 0s 11 Wandows dpegradilp to Version 9f 22439 0 0 rep cp ir Rb a Ds o Lc tob e LR ra VOR E ARCA LAE HR NEAR 11 MacOS X vw UDSradIDE to Vers Ono Abc addon ot aa dt Beta D DO Np PD Re e t Rt oca evo DAT A CM RC 13 Linux Up radne tO Ve SLO TA 5 Eedi eea dnte eigen niri vae otn porn Vr Re daba V di 14 Saving Restoring the Blackmagic Database and ICC Profiles using the File System eene 15 To restore the database and ICC profiles to an upgraded Blackmagic eere neret tnn 15 R nning the SoftWare sssini aei cup Sasa Saco nic cvs tU RE san cca wins wut webs CURE NA ss cata wma Oa aS 16 Important Note Tor Mac OS X USBES nundinas aan ans edad dandi odis Epid RE aak et ed een 16 Betore starting the Server and 6LHIeTiUasodintndbia ete nivei ttu qn doeet od duci boa UR UR EN Exi bec andare ta sd blat dkaes ci ledE exuta 16 Starting the Servebqdanomvdosnep ntu opa deir ta a LO UR Rd LS dE EE dk N Co EROR OQ ERE PR RR OA A 16 Starine Tne GUIS Ta oda pn a ivo A Bea bps e dli ve ctu VA Be eri von a Co Deui RUMOR MUN CI ARS 17 Manudgl Gen GoHt eua lOPIGosdischddanr repetita eflc tacet tur Ud etra dosi dec Ver tueri dva dice titm bue 17 Monitoring Jobs Configurati
134. ach will be explained in detail The data types are e Bookfilter Allows for the polling and mapping of planning files for softproofing large multi section or multi edition jobs This is a standard feature for Veripress and available as a Softproofing Add on for Blackmagic e Calcheck Chart Used to provide a validation check for a hardcopy proof or a monitor e Camera Setup a camera ICC profile for use with the SoftProof application when viewing RGB images e DotGain Curve Used to compensate for or represent dot gain on the final output e Gradation Curve Used to adjust colour in a job by applying a curve to the individual process colours e ICC Tweak Set Build up a library of colours that need tweaking for accurate output e Job Genie A programmable file search filter used by some RIP input filters for polling and stitching together jobs and publications e Media Used to control configuration settings for Output Colour Correction ICC profiles Screen Printing amp Output Screening e Output Determines where processed jobs are to be output as files to a printer or a remote location e Pagesetup Controls the input screening resampling ICC matching rendering intents rendering effects fitting or scaling to be applied to incoming jobs e Ppagesetup Pool Print to one or more Pagesetups e Paper Profile Used to define the paper and ink characteristics of the Media being used by the output driver device e
135. age is an odd or even number Maximum Wait Time Set the time to wait before duplexing begins If the MWT is reached and the back side of the pages has not yet been processed the queue will begin to duplex any available pages This will result in single pages where the back are not yet completed Maximum Jobs Set the maximum number of jobs for duplexing If this value is reached duplexing will begin Nest multiple jobs together for a single output to save media and time Enable Automatic Nesting Set the queue to nest jobs automatically when the configured conditions such as Maximum Wait Time are met Auto Rotate When Nesting Enable auto rotation when nesting occurs If this is enabled make sure the Perm N tM n guum option in the Pagesetup is set to None There is no need to spend processing time rotating a job if it is woe J rotated at nesting time Minimise Cuts When automatic nesting is active this eon none TET MERI s option will align the nested jobs in a way that Cap tenen tn 00 mn Mani Total ght 0 minimises the number of horizontal and vertical cuts required to separate the individual jobs after printing Note This option may use more media paper when nesting Copies Specify the number of copies for nesting For example if there are 7 jobs making up a nest and enter 5 in the copies field 5 copies of the same 7 jobs will be nested and printed Maximum Wait Time Specify how long to wait before nesting begi
136. agic Server application and or the Help menu of the standalone values The result was extremely large AE values when measuring the Calcheck chart due to L a b reference values registering as 0 0 0 in the Serendipity Client Calcheck application IMPORTANT INSTALLATION NOTE To apply the fix to existing CMYK Calcheck Charts Update Options Configure a time for Blackmagic to periodically l he chart s in the Workbench 2 check for software up dates Slick the Prass ICE Profile eran choose a ICC profile different to o Never The software will not check for updates Not Now o When Time Day Configure a time and day to automatically check for any software updates Notify when updates are available A message will appear onscreen when updates are available to install Check for Updates Choose this to immediately check for any software updates When configuring a time day for checking for updates via the standalone Client Help menu a restart of the Server is required for any changes to take effect Note The Serendipity Client installed on the Blackmagic Server machine is updated as part of Server updates and does not gain access to the Check for Updates Help menu option If Secure Mode is active users can be configured to receive an email when software updates are available See the Accounts Admin section of this manual for further information on email configuration AA Software Update ANAO Software Update Check fo
137. agic colour management system CMS for proofing Settings configured here are those directly related to the Output device Colour Correction ICC Profiles Screen Printing and Output Screening A Media can be one of several assigned to a Pagesetup which controls the input screening resampling rendering effects and intents of incoming jobs All jobs are submitted to a combination of Pagesetup and Media destinations When submitting the user selects the Pagesetup to be used at which point a list of compatible user created output Media types in the database become available for selection A default Media is assigned to a Pagesetup so if a job is submitted without a specific chosen Media the job will output to the default Media settings An Output data type can optionally have a Media type assigned to it in which case only jobs submitted to the Output using the assigned Media will be printed All other jobs are held in the QueueManager until the assigned Media is removed from the Output or the held jobs Media type is assigned to the Output Important Note Version 3 Pagesetups when opened in version 5 are automatically split into Pagesetup and Media types Version 5 archives cannot be exported back into version 3 Output e Output Driver Select the desired output driver from the available list Those available will depend upon the options enabled on the dongle The selected driver affects the options made available for Resolution and Colour
138. ak Down as a Publication and a Page This can help with autoproofing as a job can be automatically filtered and gain all the attributes available to publications such as grouping in the QueueManager and the Pages pane in SoftProof C e Pukes arm c Pao Page numbers are O Defined by words Attempts to assign page numbers from words letters in the selected page number part Defined by numbers Assign page numbers from the selected numerical page number part Defined by sequence 1A 1B 2A 2B Use the standard press imposition numbering system to assign page numbers from the select page number part E g 1A 1 1B 2 2A 3 2B 4 and so on Defined by sequence 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B Use this multi web press imposition numbering system to assign both section and page numbers from the selected page number part The numerical component is assigned as the section and the letter is assigned as the page where A 1 B 2 C 3 and so on Alternatively this page sequence definition will recognise a page number part comprised of a single letter assigning pages A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 and so on Page number part Select the part that identifies the Page number from Jobname Colour Extensions or None Case Sensitive Mapping Select this if the Publication Section or Edition mapping should check for case Publication Tab O O Publication Part dropdown Select the filename part defined as the Publication When files are submitted for
139. akes longer to process the larger the job the longer the process time Rotation takes place at the beginning of the Rendering phase and will affect cropping margins and so on If auto rotating when nesting See Nesting in the Output section it is advisable to have Sheet Auto Rotation turned off otherwise the job rotation will be calculated twice again increasing the process time Increasing system memory can also improve processing times e Centring Choose between Vertically or Horizontally Use this to centre a job at any time In particular use it when printing to a double sided printer to help match the front and back sides e Accuracy Correction Compensate for media stretch or paper feed errors by specifying a correction amount for width and height e Cropping Crop the job in all directions Take into account any rotation that has been applied as cropping takes place after rotation e Auto Crop Enables auto cropping to remove blank area around an image The crop stops at the first coloured pixel encountered in the file image e Margins Specify a margin to shift a job over or compensate for a printer s set margin As with cropping take rotation into account e Effects Mirror or Negative a job by enabling either option Note The Mirror and Negative effects in the Sheet panel differ to those in the Effects panel in that they apply the effect at the Imaging stage of processing Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version
140. alid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time
141. alue when mapped through a selected ICC profile mnn fell atmane pecewe eender scltmare Co aa OI OQ Dem tome ented 19 Cage le i Lj gt sss e 73272323228 j l 2 4 3 4 9 S Ez d i Sj M 81 s X gt RIRIRIIIII 5 935538888 SS agaaa gt i i a i z 22235 4 f 3 ee eee s ees 1 i The window is split into two sections The right side allows for the import and viewing of a Special Set which is used as the comparison base The left side displays the measured values Selecting a particular measured value matches the closest colour of the emer duas imported set giving it relative deltaE values These can also be filtered am Maatin i amen a to only show the closest matches for better viewing 3 Options e Load Set Select a Special Colour Set to load This is the set used to compare measured values with Choose from any of the Special Colour Sets created e Match ICC Select a Match ICC profile e Rendering Intent Select the rendering intent for the Match profile e Spectrophotometer Select your device from the list of supported Spectrophotometers e Activate Connect to your selected device Once connected the pull down device list will change to display any status messages from the device and the values measured e Turn Off Disconnects the connected Spectrophotometer Alternates with the Activate button e Add Select this to append to the list
142. am on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation
143. ame language Jobs must be in the print queue to be displayed i e they must have completed rendering It will not show any jobs Waiting to Render or in a Held status Once a mode has been selected the screen will change to display the appropriate list of jobs with the available sorting and viewing options Sort Name Sort Name Sort Time Sort Time View Ascending Descending Ascending Descending CE Rendered View Flipbook Actions available include e Select Touch your finger on a job in the list and it becomes selected The mode options change to display View Imaged View Rendered and View Flipbook e Scroll Touch your finger on the list and drag it up or down the screen Lift your finger off and position it again to scroll further e Fast Scroll Touch your finger on the list and drag it fast up or down and let go in a throwing action To stop the list at any point touch a job on the screen e Scrollbar optional If enabled drag your finger down the overlaid scrollbar to move up and down the list Moving your finger left right will change the position of the scrollbar itself Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 124 When the required job has been located and a viewing mode selected the Touch Console will open the Main Navigate or Pages control panel mn Press Config Show Pages Show Tabs Calibrate Close Actions and modes of the Touch Console will adjust to give the options norma
144. an output If the queue is set to Spooling Auto Detect Imaging or Rendering you can only make a new output Thumbnail Turns on off a mini thumbnail on the printer queues only which gives an indication as to how much of the current job has printed e Font Options Allows you to change the size of the text e Queue Order Select which queues you wish to view Selecting this presents you with a chooser window showing two lists The Available queues on the left and the Showing queues on the right To move queues between lists select one or more and drag from one list to another Alternatively double click to move between lists The order of the queues in the Showing list determines the order of display Queue Order can be used to show multiple Queues in a single QueueStatus window e ncrease Decrease Indent Increases or decreases the size of the QueueStatus in view Double clicking the QueueStatus window displays a floating QueueManager window showing that queue This has the full functionality of the standard QueueManager Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 79 RIPMonitor The RIPMonitor displays the RIPs that have been configured under the RIP section of the Workbench Jobs that have been successfully polled are displayed and can be expanded to show any associated plates These jobs can then be submitted to a Pagesetup Media for processing View n iin esc Moon trib C587 na ls
145. anced Options Spectrophotometer or Densitometer information and Curves display Toolbar The Toolbar has the following options also available via the Lineariser Menu e Customise Patches Allows for the selection of patches to be used in the Linearisation Chart Choose which Patch Percentages using the numbered buttons Total number of T patches selected is displayed ae aana o Restore Defaults Restore the patch selection to the default 23 patches per ayetarstayays channel a Ta To Tes or or er Ter es BB e Use Lab Toggles between Density and Lab measurement modes Lab mode for TOO OOO linearisation is required for printers with built in Spectrophotometers e Measure Patches Initialises the connected Spectrophotometer Follow any instructions in the status bar to measure the chart e Submit Linearisation Save the data in the Measurement panel to the Media being linearised A popup will request a name for the curve e Reset Linearisation Regenerates the linearisation chart to match the loaded Media s colourspace and paper profile Normally only used in the event of a channels mismatch popup warning when printing a linearisation chart Note The Customise Patches and Use Lab options are new to Blackmagic Versions 4 amp 5 If viewing curves loaded from a Version 3 x or earlier database the options will be unavailable until the Update Legacy Curves option is selected from the Measurement panel contextual menu see below
146. and Keys with ease The following control buttons are available o Excess Ink Area Displays areas exceeding the Maximum Ink Weight setting as defined in the currently selected Press configuration o Sheet Placement Toggles the Sheet Placement view in the Ink Key Viewer placing the page on the press plate and displaying the Ink Keys as defined in the Press Config o Print Run Opens a virtual number pad to enter the size of the print run Used with Ink Weight to calculate the total ink weight for the entire run of the page o Ink Weight Opens a virtual number pad to enter the average weight of the process inks used in grams per square metre g m Used with Print Run to calculate the total ink weight for the entire print run of the page o Calculate Ink Weights Calculates and displays the total ink weight used for each process ink channel for a complete print run of the loaded page Totals are based on the entered Ink Weight and Print Run values e Find Note If any Notes are attached to the currently viewed job page spread this button will open a list of the Notes in the Touch Console Select a Note to navigate to its location on the proof Finding a Note will toggle the Notes button to show all notes e Show All Show the whole job within the SoftProof window e Print Size Show the job in the SoftProof window at print size e Actual Pixels Show the job in a one screen pixel to one job pixel ratio i e 10096 zoom This view m
147. and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 154 If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 10 11 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their Licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying
148. and the main monitor with instructions to select which monitor is the touch screen Simply touch whichever screen is to be the Touch Console to begin The Interface The interface occupies the whole of the touch screen a At the top is a banner advising which section the user is in at the time The title banner will change to reflect the different modes in use The bottom of the screen displays the various modes to use with SoftProof Return to the starting point at any time by pressing the Home button Using the Touch Console When first starting Home is the default position View the jobs in the system by selecting one of the mode buttons along the bottom of the screen e Publications View a list of jobs that are part of a publication only e Books View a list of jobs that make up a Book as defined by the Bookfilter and BookMonitor application This is available for Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add on Only e Jobs View a list of jobs that are not part of a publication only e All View a list of all jobs in the system e Search Open a virtual keyboard on the touch screen allowing a character based search of all available jobs publications or books See TouchConsole Menu Search Order for details on setting which job types are available to search Note The Search virtual keyboard can be configured to other input languages see Touch Console Settings The default input language of the operating system must be set to the s
149. ans 123 Settings sccundum de bn 114 Shadi INLET FACE rasnita 114 Studio MO HUE siu rre e one 114 Template Pane liisis dus cioe 120 TNn 117 122 Usine Sdi sep ctr p tecta bts 121 Vie W MCT ics seiersdans 116 Submit A job for processing 80 For De Imposition 80 Submit as ASSeLb undue vetostric i deter 80 SUD TATE OS noi D DR aeree ettet 130 Submit Mena cds 130 Subinit ODUOLDSc ecteti og tiit pde tieni 130 SuperCell Screening sss ae p ern 41 Support Web Server ance oefaosis 140 141 System Info Web Serv etn edi d ect 141 System Settings eec iet teniente 132 136 Chen terisi ia dades 136 Server sene a tene a reson re 138 T Tabs ReorderlHg zacoitocasi deitas 103 The Blackmagic Dongle Updater 23 The Serendipity Blackmagic Client 24 The Serendipity Blackmagic Server 21 The Serendipity Updater 22 TRUM Daal oscar totas 82 PEGVIO Wooten piedi dritte usann 77 UGC S LACUS endete cese 79 Show Mag ihg us sche er RU negat 82 SHOW Rendering aussi die qtto teti 82 Tiff Multichannel EXDOELL tes espera at iani 78 TA ea a ED E 50 Touch COnSOle o actress 124 Fast Scrolls sese tdtsvtir toO d 124 nterface enanar 124 Mod EsSu niaan aa 125 LOUDE ate pipes raaa Ara 127 NEQUIT uot iiic ca is tet den 125 Navigate siu cxt dita des 126 SOELUDES entes edato ca bani do 128 Trimming The GHentLOE a eu eductus 73 The Ser
150. arator and the Truncate option If any of these are used and Case Sensitive Matches is selected only those characters matching the specific case entered are matched e Read Direction The direction in which the filename is read Click the arrow to change read directions e Parts This is a block diagram showing the breakdown of the job Each part is given a name and identifies a section of the filename Clicking the Read Direction arrow changes the order of the parts to show which part is going to be read first If creating a new Job Genie parts will not appear in the diagram until they are created e Add Add parts to the list e Apply Update the selected part with changes e Delete Delete the selected part from the list e Part Name Specify a name for the part you are about to describe Meaningful names are useful when choosing the groups later e Part Contains Specify from the list what the part will contain Choose from o Any Character The part can contain any valid character o Numbers Only The part may only contain numbers o Hexadecimals Only The part must only contain hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F o Specific Words Specify a word or characters in the text box that the part must contain e Match Choose what point in the filename you are going to match to This may be a specific separator or end of string for example read along the filename until this point looking for valid part matching specified above C
151. ard to navigate forwards and backwards through the publication e Arrow Keys Use down or right arrow keys to move forward through the publication and left or up to move backwards e Scroll Bar Moving the scroll bar below the image moves forwards or backwards through the publication Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 95 Page View Contextual Menu There are various options available from the context right click menu e Open Publication Opens a QueueManager showing all jobs processed in the system Select a job or publication job to load and click OK e Reload Publication Reloads the current publication with files from the queue This is used if additional files have been processed as part of the publication or changes have been made and the publication needs to be updated e Choose Press Select a Press configuration to apply to the job currently and subsequently loaded into the FlipBook see Workbench Press for details e Job Info displays the Job Info information about the currently selected page see Workbench QueueManager for details e Swap Page with This allows you to swap the page currently selected with another page from the same currently loaded publication e View Original opens and views the imaged file of the selected page in the SoftProof application e View Printed opens and views the rendered file of the selected page in the SoftProof application e View
152. ary Apply a Replace Colour Set Select a Replace Colour Set to apply to the job Any plates matching the set will be replaced Revert All Plates to Press Settings Changes all plates back to the press configuration currently selected Apply Blueline Set Replaces all colours with varying shades of blue to see any traps or bleed issues Publications Widget When softproofing a job that forms part of a publication additional controls and c view options are available 2 gens um cc V Bere Page e Single Page Display just the single page selected Disabling this option Reda Am enables the following o Show Back Page Display the reverse side of a page through the page currently loaded as if the final print was being held up to the light The Back Page Opacity setting in the Press Settings controls the amount of show through o Show Page Spread View the spread of the selected page for example pages 2 and 3 as a spread Edit Imposition When an imposition flat is loaded changes can be made to the Signature Group here without closing SoftProof Any alterations can be viewed using Signature Overlay o Show Signature Overlays the signature used to de impose onto the image This is only available if the job has been de imposed o Show Deimposed Pages When an imposition flat is being viewed SoftProof will show all available pages when this is enabled Each page from within the imposition may be previewed via the Page Index tab Ink
153. asis The ICC profiles are not edited in any way and the tweak set can be selected as desired Each colour requiring alteration is selected and adjusted by adding to or subtracting process colours from it or making it lighter or darker An accurate visual representation is shown on the screen and the point in the colourspace can also be viewed Colours can be created manually or by entering the CMYK or Lab values or input automatically using an online Spectrophotometer The interface is split into two parts the left side shows the input values and the right side shows where any adjustments tweaks have been made Options e Colourspace Choose between Input Profile or Lab input If the profile selected is RGB the sliders will change to RGB If CMYK the sliders will change accordingly e Influence Choose the area around the specified colours to be affected This is determined as a scale of 1 to 5 with 1 being the least influence and 5 the greatest e Tweak Value Use the CMY sliders to add or subtract from the colour being adjusted e Rendering Intent Choose the rendering intent that the colour is to be altered in from either Perceptual Colourimetric or Saturation This must match the rendering intent of the Pagesetup for the mapping to work e New Tweak Create a new tweak in the rendering intent selected e Copy Available via the right click menu Used to copy the selected tweaks e Paste Available via the right click menu
154. ate view for the selected job e Submit Submits the selected jobs for processing This pops up a chooser to select which Pagesetup Pagesetup Pool and Medias to send the job to e Submit As Asset Select files to send to the Studio application Asset queue e Submit for De Imposition Submits the jobs for de imposition This pops up a choose to select which Signature Group will be used to de impose the job and which Pagesetup Media combination will be used e Submit As Imposition Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add on Only Submits the job in it s original form but attaches a Signature Group via a popup chooser to allow the job to be deimposed on the fly using the De Imposed Pages button in the Veripress SoftProof Touch Console See the Touch Console section for more information e VPress Adds the selected jobs to the VirtualPress For further information see the VirtualPress section Note The text in the Submit Submit for De Imposition Submit as Imposition and VPress buttons will show in italics if the job selected has unrecognised or unassigned plates The plates will need to be assigned using VirtualPress e Group By Job Keeps the plates in their respective job group when they are copied into the VirtualPress see below note Important Note If you have multiple jobs selected for copying into VirtualPress when this option is ticked they are kept as their respective jobs If this is un ticked all the jobs and plates select
155. ation has a pre configured set of tabs available for monitoring various processes throughout the entire workflow The default tab layout includes the QueueManager Thumbnail and QueueStatus modules See the Jobs application section within this manual for further information Any Outputs created in the earlier configuration will automatically appear in the QueueManager module Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 19 The RIP Monitor will need to be added as a tab in order to poll jobs prs ope poa 6 In the Jobs application select the Tabs menu Add Tabs option A window will appear with various factory default layouts available for use in the Jobs application Select the RIP Monitor tab layout from the list An example screen will appear to the right Click Add The RIP Monitor tab will appear in the Jobs window Available RIP queues can be polled by selecting them from the dropdown list and clicking the Poll button three 3 times consecutively Jobs appearing may now be submitted for processing Additional pre configured Tabs may be added to the Jobs application as required See the Jobs application section of this manual for further information Monitor The Monitor performs the same workflow monitoring functions as the Jobs application and was the default application for this purpose in previous versions of Blackmagic before the Jobs application was introduced Monitor allows
156. b as an Photoshop psd file at the resolution entered with an option of Packbits or no compression o Postscript separated Exports the current job as a separated PS file o Tiff Multichannel Exports the current file as a multichannel Tiff e Calcheck Job Launches the Calcheck application to check a job s calibration status The jobname is stored and the results can be exported or printed Measurement results from the Calcheck are stored in the Job Info The Job information shown in the Queue will change _ colour to match with the result of the Calcheck once completed green pass red fail e Calculate Ink Weight Displays the Ink Weights window with the selected job s ink weights and coverage shown e Pause Resume Printing Processing Pause or Resume the output queue of the selected job at their current stage of processing or printing Imaging Rendering Nesting or Printing Incomplete jobs in paused queues will display in red e Change Output Media Change the Media assigned to the output queue for the selected job Once re assigned all jobs held awaiting the new Media will begin processing e Auto Queue Order When this option is enabled the QueueManager displays jobs for all existing process and output queues Any new queues created will be shown automatically 351 PM sti mh R5 amp M Spt Configuration Options The following options are available from the right click contextual menu within the QueueManager window
157. b server Accessed via a web browser the Web Server provides status information about the Server and jobs currently in the system It cannot be used for submitting or managing files in the system Accessing the Web Server To connect to the Web Server 1 Enter the IP address or machine name if using DNS of the computer running the Server in the browser window followed by a colon and the port number 8080 For e g 192 168 3 43 8080 4 192 168 3 43 8080 2 Press Enter once the address has been typed in When it connects the browser address bar will look like this BY http 192 168 3 43 8080 3 Ifyou have a DNS Server you can use the machine name instead AN E nttp papaya 8080 4 Once you are connected the front page will appear with an options menu on the left Welcome to Serendipity Blackmagic Select an option from the fist on the le to continue Sarendioty Biackmagic Queues Log Fis Synem nto Support e Queues Shows all the queues configured on the Server you are connected to e Log file Allows you to view the log file e System info Displays information about the system e Support Shows various support options amp information Available queues Serendipity Blackmagic e Spool e Autodetect Queves o image e Render e Printer queues System into e Show all queues Log Fie Queues Click on any of the queues to get information about jobs in that queue Information a
158. be created in Lab and a CMYK or N Colour colourspace read directly into the system using an online Spectrophotometer or imported from a CGATS file Each colour can have its ink Paint Mode or Press Ink Weight set and have an individual DotGain Curve assigned to it The interface includes a Toolbar with general creation and import options a panel showing the list of colours in the Special Set and j MR I M Amame comer sevens Fontes another to adjust the properties of a selected colour Toolbar Options psi arte P e New Colour Creates a new untitled colour in the list fer one Gea 9 tcn o Click on the name to change it x Ed 2 r EA A e Delete Colours Deletes the selected colours i E eS e Duplicate Colours Makes a copy of the selected colours Tera merge ny T e Rename Colours Rename one or more colours using a aeria popup Find and Replace tool ly op ET E e Add Colours From Library Select one or more colours E TEL gt from any other Special Colour Set created within ziemen mn Mende in Blackmagic MG i an e Import Colours From Files Import colours from kcu cot 094 002 00 k compatible third party applications CGATS ISO 12642 col ar 380240 o files or previously exported colour sets N Colour cc paroan na po __________ _ swatches will not import unless an N colour ICC profile with matching process colour channels is first assigned Saee a G to t
159. be printed a quick and easy method of duplicating a finished canvas is to use the Step and Repeat function 1 Configure the asset with the appropriate Canvas Wrap settings as defined above 2 With the canvas wrap image selected in the Layout area select Frame menu gt Step and Repeat 3 Configure the amounts for horizontal and vertical repeat and click OK The canvas will repeat across the layout area as the values increase 4 Autoarrange if needed and print when ready Marker The Marker option allows for the placement of a frame containing a style of marker in the Layout area Options include e Crosshair SHIFT 1 Create a frame containing a configurable crosshair in the wem sj Layout area MEE e Horizontal Line SHIFT 2 Create a frame containing a configurable horizontal ERE line in the Layout area cum tote G3 T5I e Vertical Line SHIFT 3 Create a frame containing a configurable vertical line in if aes the Layout area G e Colour Box SHIFT 4 Create a frame containing a configurable colour in the Layout area Click on the box within the Property panel to view further options for each Marker m style If a frame is selected in the Layout area and Marker is chosen from the dropdown menu the frame and image in the Layout area will be replaced with the selected marker Note For all Create options a 1x1inch frame will appear at the current mouse pointer position if using the shortcut k
160. black areas are removed from an image on rendering This is useful when printing an image containing black onto a black surface Media Effects pns e Fitting Method wanes ppa o None Fitting method is turned off pn o Fit Width Fit Height Fit Width amp Height Shrinks jobs to fit within the set dimensions proportions are maintained o Scale Factor Scales jobs by the amount specified o Tiles Tiles a job that is larger than the width amp height specified If required an overlap can also be entered Useful B for large posters or billboards tene o Best Fit Width Best Fit Height Best Fit Width amp Height As Fit but will shrink or enlarge jobs to fit fill dimensions entered while maintaining proportions o De Imposition Can be used to take an imposed file like an 8UP de impose it into 2UPs or singles and print it on a smaller printer or produce a single page PDF file If this option is selected a further Signature Group button becomes available for selection Note If the Fit or Best Fit options are chosen and the width amp height fields are left at 0 the Fit will default to the media width and height as defined in the Media assigned to the Pagesetup when printing see Media for details e Rotation Choose from None 90 180 or 270 degrees Automatic rotation may also be selected to best fit the job using the media width and height specified Note Auto Rotation is very useful for saving media but if a job is rotated it t
161. bottom right corner of the SoftProof window Its status depends on the expiration time of the monitor calibration as set below and the Calcheck status Use Native Profile Enable this to use the operating system defined ICC profile for colour management The Client will use the monitor profile as setup for the operating system i e Mac OS will use what is in the Display Preferences Colour tab Windows will use the Display Adapter Settings Choose Monitor ICC Profile Select a monitor ICC profile for the display the Client is running on The profiles are used so any colour element viewed on the display is shown as accurately as possible This includes SoftProof and any colour swatch It is recommended the monitor be calibrated and set to the same match profile as is used for the softproofing Pagesetup Resolution Choose the default resolution to use for the ANO Client Settings General Colour Management Application Shortcuts Match Choose Default Match ICC Profile Resource d v2 eci icc V CMS dithering Monitor 1 Calcheck Managed M Use Native Profile E3 Monitor ICC Profile home mandy 040711 3 icc Resolution Calibration expires 9 Use system setting 93x95 DPI DPI Never ey Custom resolution 72 Monitor 2 Calcheck Managed M Use Native Profile g home mandy D 040711 icc Resolution Calibration expires Never 4 9 Use system setting 99 x 98 DPI Custom res
162. bout the job including name and current status will be shown Support Available printers Doublesided Printing e Epson 7900 e Epson 4000 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 140 a Log File To view the log file select the option from the list on the left n lt Seovty T t is A Valid Key For _ GeckMage Muckragc Vernon 4 ic 1996 1097 1998 299 Serendipity t2 9 x0 Software Pty Lt nm From here you can select a particular time period to fetch from the Server m Once viewed you can print the file or save it to disk The log can be printed E llo saved or exported from the browser Disk usage Disk Used Total Path Soc 46 3308 S95 85G8 Applicatons Serendipty omagiC spoct Print 44 3388 295 9588 Applicatons Serendipty omagic raster ProdTemp e 48 33GB S98 ASGB Application Serendipityhmagictmp i OSTemp w 46 3368 595 8568 Applicatons Serendipty bmagic mp System info Choose this to display information about the system C aD 46 3368 595 05GB Applicatons Serendiptylbmagici rco Product Info Licensed Modules available printers and input filters 7 ProductName Serendipity Blackmagic version 4 0 Build 21029 EL EL Product Created Jul 22 2009 13 11 48 and Available Destinations are shown ProductType NFR not for resale Hostname golem swivel serendipity softwar onm au Operating system Darwin 9 7 0 388 Dongle serial no 4
163. by using the 10 ens contextual right click menu on the column header bar Column SMS order can be changed by dragging and dropping the columns or by using the Configure Header option from the contextual menu e Press The Press console that generated the event message command e Date The date and time of the event message command e Message The event message command generated by the press console Log Options e Fetch Back Log Displays the log for the time specified For example it retrieves and displays the last 4 hours of messages Choose the time from the dropdown list e Trim Older Lines Trims the log based on the time selected in Fetch Back Log If this is set to 60 minutes the log file is trimmed back so only the last 60 minutes remain e Export Allows you to export the log to a HTML or tab delimited text file Interface Options e Press Agent Driver Select the required Press Agent Driver from the dropdown list of supported press consoles e Configure Opens a Configuration pop up for the selected Press Agent Driver Available options vary dependent upon the press console driver e Configure is not available while the Press Agent is running Hit Stop if settings need to be changed e Start Stop Button Starts or stops the Press Agent Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 104 SoftProof The Softproof application is used to proof a job on the screen There are many tools available to c
164. ch ink to view or edit The upper part of the panel has two 2 dropdown menus allowing the user to select what channel the ink occupies for ICC profiling the printer the lower half is a colour picker panel allowing the ink s display colour to be defined e Colour is a This is a dropdown menu to select the ink type from Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Custom N colour Light Light Light and Device Spot Colour e Light Ink This dropdown menu activates when a Light ink option is selected in Colour is a Select an ink from the list e Spot Generation This dropdown menu activates when Device Spot Colour is selected in Colour is a Select a generation mode for the printer device spot channel from Fill Auto Opaque Media Auto Transparent Media None Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 55 Colour Picker Panel This section is used to change the colour of the ink channel as it is displayed in the Serendipity Client interface Altering the ink colour to one closer resembling the custom ink in the printer aids in identifying the ink when measuring patches for the paper profile when linearising or when examining ink channels in the SoftProof window Select from Lab CMYK or RGB colourspaces Use the sliders or type in the number fields to define the ink colour Double click in the colour swatch to select a colour from a Special Colour Set RGB has the option of using the Pick from
165. constantly updated measurements Light Booth By clicking on the Light Booth header when available any currently connected light booths will be shown l Display Just Normlicht Each connected light booth shows information on PEN QUESTO TON Pixels Resolution e Name Model ICC Profile e Driver Status e Driver Version Last Calibrated Calibration Expires Clicking on a light booth name under the header will make calibration options Driver Fue PA ee ore ee i ion 1 02 available for the booth These include Driver Version Hardware Calibration e Brightness Choose to set the brightness level in either o Candela Brightness in cd m rae o Set the level from 0 100 a Si e Instrument offline online Instrument Name Displays the meme currently activated instrument maa estes Ere 2ne E o Instrument Select which supported Spectrophotometer is to be used for the light booth 5 mms calibration o Adjust Click this button to calibrate the brightness of the selected booth Follow any onscreen instructions Note For some Spectrophotometers after initial instrument calibration an ambient light filter will need to be attached before placing it in the booth and commencing the booth adjustment Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 94 FlipBook The FlipBook application allows you to view a publication as a virtual book In Blackmagic a publication is defined as a group of
166. d colour of the panel for easy identification Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 21 Bookfilter The Bookfilter Available for Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On is used to setup an appropriate driver to read planning files in order to put finished publications together greatly improving the speed efficiency and automation of softproofing in publishing press environments Bookfilter works similarly to a Job Genie based RIP queue in Blackmagic but rather than polling for RIP jobs it polls for publication planning files Publications in the planning files are then displayed in the displayed in the BookMonitor can be expanded to show a list of pages and BookMonitor and may be selected for softproofing Publications H filenames associated with each page as defined by the planning file The Bookfilter maps the page filenames to processed jobs in the QueueManager When the publication is selected for softproofing the Bookfilter searches the QueueManager for matching jobnames and collects them into a single publication Any missing pages will appear as red in the page navigator eee Driver Polling Paths Book Driver Select the appropriate driver for the planning file format used Enable polling Enable or disable the polling of planning files Language Encoding Set the encoding to match your system to display filenames correctly Poll Interval Configure how frequently
167. d in the QueueManager yet the FlipBook will open but will not show any pages The FlipBook window comprises of four 4 main panels Publication Pagination Page View and Page Index Publication Panel This panel contains the name of the Publication being viewed Pagination Panel e Start Enter the page number for the starting page or use the arrows to select the first page number of the FlipBook If the first page loaded is page 1 you cannot alter the start page number If the first page loaded is greater than 1 you can enter a lower value as the start page number This can be used if you are viewing a part publication where the first pages have not been processed e Top Page Choose whether the top page of the FlipBook is Even or Odd Page View Panel This panel is where the FlipBook pages can be viewed When a FlipBook is opened the pages of the publication are loaded and displayed in 2D two dimensional view There are various ways to navigate through the publication e Clicking on the page of the image If you click on the right page you move forward through the publication Clicking on the left page moves backwards e Clicking on the pages in the Page Navigator Panel displayed below the Page View panel The view jumps to the page pair you select e Space Bar The space bar moves forward to the next pair of pages Hold the shift key and press the space bar to move backwards e PageUp PageDown Use these buttons on the keybo
168. d measured 3 Measure the values using a connected instrument and save the chart 4 The linearisation curve will be automatically assigned to the selected Media Check this by viewing the Media in the Workbench to make sure the curve is assigned to the configuration See Applications gt Lineariser for more information Method 2 Manually Creating a Linearisation Curve 1 Select the Gradation Curve data type in the Workbench Create a new Gradation Curve selecting the screen printing Media to be used 3 Edit the Gradation Curve by selecting the Black curve Click on the curve and drag it to the desired shape adding more curve points if required 4 Save the Gradation Curve 5 Select the screen printing Media in the Workbench and assign the Gradation Curve using the Linearisation LUT button in the Colour Correction panel Summary The above is a guide to configure a setup to print film separations for use in the Screen Printing industry Run some test jobs to choose the most suitable patches ink combination and resolution for the device and media being used If a different resolution or colourspace is selected or the light inks are used a new Paper Profile will need to be created Trying different dot sizes will mean adjustment of the Paper Profile changing which patch is turned on in each channel During the testing period many combinations of ink colours dot sizes and resolution were tried Different output devices and media w
169. d proof the SoftProof Press Setting and the current calibration status of the monitor in relation to the Press Setting see Applications gt Displays for more SoftProof Nested job 19078 Printed preview 50 Auto Softproof Camera information on screen calibration The left of the bar displays e Jobname Original Printed Preview and current zoom level The right of the bar displays e Current Press or Camera settings along with the Embedded ICC Profile for the image if applicable Use the tick box to override the currently selected Press or Camera profile and enable the embedded ICC Profile Auto Softproof Camera V Embedded ICC Profile Adobe RGB 1998 Clicking on the Press or Camera profile button will popup a menu with the option to choose another Press Camera setting if available Auto Softproof Camera v Auto Softproof Camera When Calcheck Managed is enabled Client Preferences Colour Management a small tick amp sRGB V4 ICC or cross representing the Calcheck status will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right of the SoftProof window Choose Camera Hovering the mouse pointer over the cross or tick shows a tooltip when Tooltips are enabled displaying information including e The ICC Profile used by the monitor normally created using the Displays ER Created 7 09 11 1 09 PM application Calibrate option Expires Never e The Calcheck Chart assigned to the Press Camera Setti
170. d shown within the frame proportions o To Fill The asset expands to fill the frame scaling to show as much of the image possible given the proportions and centring options of the frame o Custom The dimensions and frame offset of the asset are independent of the frame This scaling is selected automatically when Crop Mode is activated Centring When enabled any selected frames will have their asset centred within the frame This is useful to revert to the original placement when undoing any cropping Orientation The rotation angle applied to both the frame and the asset If custom scaling is used and the asset has different dimensions to the frame rotation is only applied to the asset Template Panel Templates are a useful tool for anyone needing to make repeat prints using a specific layout for the available media Studio gives users the opportunity to create and store a library of templates set to specific sizes and orientations Loading Stored Templates Templates nesting layouts can be loaded from the Template library by double clicking the name of the saved template Assets dragged into an empty frame are resized to fit or fill rotated and cropped according to the frame s settings A singular asset dragged into a selected frame grouping will be duplicated and placed into every frame in the group Cards iex potter temolate something Template with Tiling Umitied Untitied 002 Untitled 053 Untitied 004 nity A4
171. d type the following on the command line lp P printer lt jobname gt For the example of a HP printer we can type the following lpr Php t1100 via tanglefoot Quickcal 230166 rtl This should submit the rtl file created by the Server to the printer spooler You must be in the raster folder when the command is typed or if not enter the full path to the file for e g Applications Serendipity Serendipity Blackmagic raster Quickcal 230166 rtl Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 148 The Mac Spooler Reports NT ACCESS DENIED This means that the print system cannot access the printer It may be that there are insufficient privileges for the user trying to connect the username and or password could be incorrect or the username and password part of the string have been forgotten Client Error When testing with lpr or from Serendipity Blackmagic and the error client error not found is seen it means it is unable to find the printer the file is being sent to Check to make sure the name of the printer is correct Unable to Print to Remote Windows Printer This can happen from Mac or Windows If you are on a Windows machine and are creating a new printer to connect to the remote printer but it fails to find the path make sure the remote printer is shared and the name is correct Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 149 Glossary Client GUI that monitors job
172. dated 16 July 2014 20 The Serendipity Blackmagic Server The Blackmagic Server runs on the machine where the dongle is installed The Server handles the processing of all jobs through the system and must be started before the Client is launched As the Server starts it checks to ensure a valid dongle is installed on the machine and which modules are enabled licensed The Server calculates the speed of the machine it is running on and checks the integrity of the database before loading it Once the Server is up and running a clock keeps track of the duration the Server is operational Server Options Serengipity Blackmagic The window displays the Server information and various options once Serendipity Blackmagic version 5 4 02 Build 28156 64 bit itis running Copyright Serendipity Software Pty Ltd 1994 2014 All rights reserved Built Dec 10 2013 14 54 21 Demo time limited dongle detected 55 days left Dongle serial no 5175f90c Ocee Listening for client connections on port 9100 Serendipity Blackmagic Menu Options About Shows information about the Server Clicking More Less info shows or hides valid dongle options including RNC AAR Tatts ROR EOING Ene SSUERSE cmn the versions of the current drivers Quit Quit the Server application File Menu Stop Server Stops the Server from running without quitting Serendipity Blackmagic Start Server Starts the Server if itis in a stopped state Restart Server Re
173. density standards This table is not a complete list Consult your instrument user guide for more information Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 90 Displays The Displays application uses a supported Spectrophotometer to calibrate and create an ICC profile for a selected monitor or light booth Suitable graphics monitors can be calibrated to match a chosen print gamut allowing colour accurate softproofing of print material and can be verified at any time to ensure correct colour output Creation of a profile is very simple requiring a supported instrument and a few minutes of time The Spectrophotometer is placed on the screen to be calibrated A series of adjustments are made to the screen gamma white point and brightness if available Measurements are taken from which an ICC profile is created and saved in Blackmagic and the operating system as the native display ICC profile Note The Displays application creates a profile for use with the Match ICC profile assigned to the monitor in Server Settings Ensure the correct match profile is set before creating the monitor profile see the Server Settings Colour Management section for details The Displays interface comprises of a function list left and a multi purpose display area right that will change depending on the function selected The function list is made up of the following selectable items e Calibration Lists each connected
174. dering of some fonts e Disable PDF Autoseparation Turns off autoseparation for PDF files e Render in RGB Allows Postscript file data to be processed in an RGB rendering mode with a wide gamut suitable for digital photographic proofs prints Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 48 e Use CMYK simulation from PDF for unknown colours Allow the CMYK simulations from PDF files to be substituted for unknown spot colours This is the default option for any new Pagesetups created Note An Unknown Specials colour set can now be assigned in the Server Settings This allows unknown special spot colours included in PDF or Postscript jobs to be automatically added to the set Resampling Configure the method for sampling incoming data and changing the resolution from the input to that of the output The options are e Nearest Neighbour The fastest method but less accurate Choices are made as the closest pixels from input to output and can result in jagged edges or stepping effects e Bilinear A medium quality sampling method and can take longer than Nearest Neighbour Bilinear takes the weighted average of 4 pixels from input to output Best for use with screened data e Bicubic High quality sampling method which takes longer to calculate than Bilinear Bicubic uses the weighted average of 16 pixels from input to output This is the default option for any new Pagesetups created e Filtered Serendipity
175. dia guide sheet will automatically lengthen to fit the job As more assets are placed the sheet will extend to display the total nesting area Note It is not necessary to have dimensions entered for the Media when creating a manual nest with Studio When submitted the nest will print to your selected media from the top left origin point printing as much of the width or length of the nest as the paper in the printer will permit The remainder will be cropped Creating a Nest Studio allows for single or multiple assets to be dropped into the Layout area 1 Selectthe assets jobs from the Asset panel 2 Drag and drop the assets into the Layout area Assets will appear at their native size unless placed into an empty frame with specific properties configured from a template or step and repeat frame 3 Resize and adjust the frame properties as required This can be done via the Property panel when the frame is selected or by using the following mouse options o Leftclick on a frame Selects the frame for editing movement locking or deletion Selected frames will appear with a magenta border o Leftclick on empty Layout area Deselects all frames o Left click hold Drag on empty Layout area Creates a temporary framing square for selecting multiple frames Any boxes wholly or partially within the square when the mouse button is released will be selected o Left click hold Drag on a frame Moves the selected frames aro
176. dividual Ink Channels of the job to be viewed within the Loupe acting as the Show Channels function The buttons cycle through each individual channel then show all channels default view Toggle HUD Toggles the Heads Up Display in the Loupe window showing the CMYK dot percentages at the centered cross hair or within the average 96 box Screened Pixel Readout Toggles the HUD between cross hair point measurement of ink percentages and a square for measuring area average dot percentages The square resizes depending on the zoom 96 to always cover an area equal to a full halftone cell at the LPI defined in SoftProof Settings Calibrate The Calibration control screen allows operators to initiate Monitor Calibration and Calchecks for the main SoftProof display Calibrate Opens the Displays application and begins the calibration process for the main SoftProof display Once calibrated the monitor ICC profile is automatically saved as the operating system default replacing the previous ICC profile Note When calibrating or calchecking the Spectrophotometer assigned in the Displays application for either task should be connected and ready for use If the instrument is different to the assigned one an error will occur ceasing the operation It is recommended to check the appropriate Spectrophotometers have been assigned before using the Calibrate or Calcheck functions see Applications Displays Calcheck This option will open the Displays
177. e The name of the Group uve Fipbook e Group ID This is assigned automatically but may be o changed by the administrator uie Queveltanage e Comment Allows you to enter a note on the particular user group if necessary e Group Privileges This is a list of available privileges relating to functions within Blackmagic e Members A list of Usernames and IDs belonging to the Group To create a Group 1 Click the icon in the bottom left of the window To delete a group click the icon 2 Enteraname in the Name field 3 To add privileges click the icon in the Group Privileges panel A list will appear to the left with all available items To add highlight the privilege and click the icon at the top right of the window 4 Once you have finished adding privileges click the X in the middle of the right edge of the panel to close the window 5 Click Apply to save any changes to the group or Revert to cancel Assigning Users to a Group i Users i Groups Users are assigned to the groups via the Users panel 1 Once you have created the user group click on the Users panel 2 Selectthe User Name from the list of users 3 Selectthe Group to assign the user to from the Groups dropdown menu 4 Click Apply to save any changes or Revert to cancel Important Note A user can only be assigned to one User Group at a time If extra privileges are required these must be assigned against the user via the Users panel Serendipit
178. e Nielsen Number Set the YN number for the MESSA paper being profiled if known The default is 2 aun uino inmates e Ink Limits Set the ink limits for the Paper Profile Caines nace Set see w These are determined after printing a chart and OOo Sew for uver Gated paga vims co00 observing the percentage of coverage at which the miim 100 mixture of inks causes problems Enter the value for cQ mr m each ink combination w om E O a roto maca e Algorithm Choose the type of ink limiting There aana perepere are three 3 options o Standard Simple ink limiting based on ink percentages o Enhanced Like Standard but optimised for variable dot printers It uses intelligence to calculate the ink limits based on dots used o Linear 3 0 This setting adds the ink coverage for any area then proportionally limits according to the ink limit range it falls within For example with 3 ink set to 300 and 4 ink set to 400 if a 6 ink area of an image has a coverage of 320 it will limit the area according to the 3 4 ink range o Linear 4 0 Default This method limits inks based on the number of inks being used for an area For example if 5 ink is set to 390 any time 5 inks are laid down their coverage will be limited to 390 o Linear favour Black As more ink is laid down and a colour area approaches Black this method limits CMY proportionally more than Black preventing wetness and inversion in shadowed areas
179. e RIPMonitor Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 6 Installation The installation section describes the process for each platform in turn The software is supplied on one DVD for Mac OS X Linux and Windows versions All versions come with a dongle and require a dongle driver be installed Existing installations of the software are given the opportunity to upgrade preserving any existing configurations What s on the DVD The DVD contains all elements required to run Serendipity Blackmagic and associated programs They are divided into directories detailed below Agent Contains the Agent software for all supported platforms Choose the subdirectory that matches the required operating system Docs Contains all documentation Dongle Contains the dongle drivers for Linux MacOSX and Windows Drivers Contains the Megarip PPDs for all supported platforms Extras Contains additional components and print drivers loaded as part of the install process HTML Contains the information required for the web browser install This automatically launches the default browser for installation to begin Linux Contains the Serendipity Blackmagic and AppleTalk installation packages for Linux MacOSX Contains the Serendipity Blackmagic installation package for MacOSX Serendipity Client Contains the Serendipity Client for all supported platforms Testprn Contains Serendipity internal test print
180. e Screen Area buttons These buttons enable the user to look at results from one of the nine 9 defined areas of the monitor xl acl Ld Rd Cd Ga Ga Lad Lua screen The buttons are grayed out cannot be selected if a screen area has not been calchecked Areas that have been checked will enable the button and show whether the area passed green or failed red a Calcheck e Instrument offline online Instrument Name Displays the currently activated instrument o Instrument Select which supported Spectrophotometer is to be used for the Calcheck o Measurement Type Select which area of the screen to Calcheck or Calcheck the whole 3x3 grid screen The middle centre of the screen if the default option for standard Calchecks History By clicking on the History header users can see at a glance the Calcheck summaries for all attached monitors This is useful for keeping track of any changes in your monitor s performance i e drifting Information includes OO co tees mM e Process Colour Gray Paper delta values 7o o 0 88 e Average maximum standard deviation delta values ee e Display name top left Cummmuems ARM DARAN i e Timestamp of the last Calcheck top right a e Chart and Instrument used bottom left E ee e Overall Calcheck score bottom left EEG anon an LM 42 3 au LJA 188 rar M 3 E UJ 78 08 0072 1200 38 47 90 76 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 J
181. e all have a common path of RIPJobs but are striped across 3 drives therefore specify the drives E F and G in the Stripe Paths and the path RIPJobs in Paths Note This is important for RIPs sharing plates from single jobs across multiple drives for e g Cyan amp Magenta on E drive and Yellow amp Black of the same job on F drive If this is not setup as a stripe the plates will not be stitched together AutoProofing Jobs can be submitted manually from the RIPMonitor as desired Alternatively configure the RIP to have jobs submitted automatically via the AutoProof facility This way any new job that appears if stable and meets the specified criteria will be submitted for processing The options available are listed below e Enable AutoProofing Turns AutoProofing on or off e Printing Specifies how the jobs are to be printed Options are o Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed Default is 0 o Use Pagesetup Print to the selected Pagesetup o Use Pagesetup Pool Print to the selected Pagesetup Pool o Choose Select an existing Pagesetup or Pagesetup Pool The chooser allows you to create a new one if necessary Criteria Select certain conditions that must exist before a job is automatically submitted The options are e Delay seconds The length of time to wait to see if a job changes prior to submitting A job may change as other plates are RIPped and added to the job A suitable amount of time need
182. e and press Enter Select the item Assign the Output created previously to the Pagesetup via the z eS 5 Change Output button in the Output panel A popup window will omm Seite Cie appear to select the Output Click OK when done em Assign the Media created earlier to the Pagesetup via the Change _ Media button Select the Media in the popup window that appears 2 and click OK Jobs will be printed using this Media unless another is selected when submitting a job to print Apply any Colour Correction curves if required by selecting the appropriate curve button in the Colour Correction panel See the Workbench Pagesetup section of this manual for further details GE LT Select the input ICC profiles for RGB and Press CMYK Multicolour respectively by clicking the RGB ICC Profile and Choose ICC Profile buttons in the ICC Profiles panel Use the dropdown menus below each ICC profile to select the Rendering Intent to be used for each assigned ICC profile Note Blackmagic s colour management system will match the proofer output to these assigned profiles once the Media has been correctly calibrated press correction curves have been assigned and the Always Use ICC option in the ICC Profiles panel has been ticked At this stage however the assigned ICC profiles serve to inform the colour management system which colourspace to use when processing jobs 9 Configure any other sheet effects ma
183. e imported template or templates if multiple layouts exist in the file will appear in the library list when loaded Print Print Tiles Displays a chooser window to select a Media and Pagesetup combination to send the job to for processing Studio Settings Access the preferences for Studio These include o Cloak Submitted Frames Locks images and frames after they have been submitted for processing preventing changes Cloaked images will appear shadowed o Auto place Allows for the automatic placement of assets onto the Layout area when dragging and dropping them The default position is Cloak Submitted Frames top left If a job has already been placed in the area the auto position will murium align with the left side of the frame Minimise Cuts for Auto arrange o Frame Spacing The distance gap between jobs being auto placed in Snap To Crid the Layout area zie BUE o Minimise Cuts for Auto arrange Aligns auto arranged frames in a way Peper seving Cropmarks E that minimises the number of horizontal and vertical cuts required to aioa Biete separate the individual jobs after printing Note This option may use gt Cancel Ok more media paper when nesting o Snap to Grid Allows for assets to snap to a user defined grid spacing measured from the left ruler The asset frame will snap to the closest defined grid position taking into account any auto place spacing settings Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version
184. e of the colour e Tint The tint value of the colour e DotGain The dotgain curve assigned to the colour if any Export Menu The Export menu allows for the measured values to be exported to a space or tab delimited file Save all or only selected entries and select the format for export e Lab Export just the Lab values e XYZ Export just the XYZ values e Lab XYZ Export the Lab values followed by the XYZ values on the same line e XYZ Lab Export the XYZ values followed by the Lab values on the same line e Separate Values With Choose if the values are to be separated with spaces or tabs A contextual right click menu in the Measured Loaded Set panels has the option to Delete a selected colour Delete All measured colours Print the measured loaded set to a system device and Font Options Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 113 Studio The Studio application is designed for the manual nesting or tiling of jobs being processed and output by Blackmagic Jobs to be nested or tiled are submitted to an Asset queue before they can be used in Studio This can be done in a variety of ways Submit Files as Asset option via the Submit Menu Submit As Asset button via the RIPMonitor module Drag and drop files into the Asset area within Studio Drag and drop files into the Layout area within Studio Drag and drop files into an Asset dropspot within a DropZone
185. e snae icit 65 Deleting Signatures 64 Duplicating a Page ou 65 Duplicating Signatures 64 Editing Page Numbers 63 Grid AUIBUS mniunans rren nmi 65 Gripper SI ZO sssssssessssresssrsssrsssrnsssnersrnenernnnnnn 64 Grouping Pages dedii 63 Import Signatures eects 63 Language Encoding 64 Multi selecting Signatures 64 Offset Page Numbers 63 Page AUTIDUEteS eroon nai UE 65 Page head direction 65 Page Orientation 65 Pait Pas BSucsteseeubutensiesisdeieti site es 63 Plate OpUODnS issiduuseo n oda edenda 64 Press Sheet Settings censeo 65 Rename Signatures 63 Rotate Selected Signatures 63 Rotating Signatures 63 Selecting Import uu eee 63 Setting Page Size 65 Setting Page Width 65 Suppress Pages sss 63 TO OLD AR e enorm acne vested dq 63 S It B IHE ioo coe etes ic e ve dotate un 50 SONP TOOD ia aE ate EAM IBIN 105 Menu OptonS uenttcaoes cette cvi 109 NOTES S docencia hota Does itte 111 Pape TOO X eraran 112 SG BELT psi M 109 TOOLS icio c uotidivnipisis uera Ade Pr ot 106 View Menu iescinsen icti iie i netus 110 WOR CUS odd nme out eit aeta 106 Software Updates ueteres 22 DOUNG EX a amata ota RE NEN ANB 136 Special Golour Set edid es 66 Add Col
186. ected and submitted for processing by the Server as desired or can be configured to process automatically At the processing point jobs are copied spooled over from the RIP to the Server leaving the original untouched Once the whole job is spooled the Server begins to work on the files Imaging is the first process to take place Imaging interprets the file format completes any imposition assembling required for supported imposition RIPs or any merging of CT LW files preserves any screening on the files and samples the jobs resolution to change it to that of the output format configured An intermediate file format is created at this point called the Imaged File The Imaged File can be viewed using the SoftProof utility The file format maintains all the plates associated with the job and is viewed at the full output resolution The Imaged File can also be re submitted at any time for processing to the same or a different output There is no need to spool and interpret the job again After the imaging process has completed the job is passed to the rendering engine This takes the Imaged File and creates the file ready for output The process includes applying any output characteristics such as orientation cropping colour management ICC Profiles and creation of the configured format whether for an Inkjet printer or a file format such as PDF The Imaged File can be rendered as many times as desired Each time any of the output characte
187. ection or multi edition publications such as newspapers When View Original Rendered or FlipBook are selected for a publication in the BookMonitor it searches the chosen queues in the QueueManager for filenames matching those in the page list and assembles them on the fly for proofing in the SoftProof or FlipBook applications The Page Navigator in both applications SoftProof amp FlipBook will show any pages missing from the publication those that have not yet arrived from the RIP Toolbar Options i O EE SSE e Expand Collapse Books Expand or Collapse the selected Books inr publications to list individual pages Double clicking a publication in the display panel will also expand collapse the page list e Poll Poll the selected BookFilter for any planning files Once polled a list of the available planning file publications will be displayed e Toggle Bookfilter Polling Enable Disable e Show BookFilter Menu Enable Disable a dropdown menu e Show Bookfilter List Enable Disable a e View Original Opens the Imaged Preview of the selected publication in SoftProof e View Printed Opens the Rendered Preview of the selected publication in SoftProof e View FlipBook Opens the selected publication in FlipBook e Queue Order Select this to choose the Output queue in the QueueManager the Bookfilter will search for matching Imaged or Rendered job pages e Calculate Ink Weight Open the Ink Weights calculator window for
188. ed are copied in as one job This is useful if you are polling a RIP and the plates are shown as separate jobs with one plate each e Poll Initiates a manual poll of the selected RIP e Toggle RIP Polling Turns the polling on or off for the selected RIP When the RIP is in the off state the name in the RIP list turns red Note The RIP jobs list is cached and may require clearing To do this turn the RIP off and on again and click on the Poll button three 3 times consecutively e Show RIP Menu Shows or hides the RIP pull down list at the top of the window Show RIP List Shows or hides the RIP list on the left Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 80 Contextual Menu Options The following are available via the contextual menu right click from within the job Display panel Edit RIP This enables the user to edit the RIP selected Choose to edit a single section or all sections of the configuration Alternatively you can create a new RIP Colour Scheme Choose a colour for the module Font Options Choose the preferred font size Language Encoding Choose the language encoding for the operating system This allows jobs to display correctly in the RIPMonitor in the native language Display Panel View Options The display panel columns can be configured to show specific information by right clicking on the header titlebar The following are available for display Name Job Name and p
189. ed on the Mac will appear menpa patens an San nay nee a m 3 Scroll down the list to locate the printer A detailed description of sso sss mon conan TEENS Lue quem us the printer is available here nem reas SEO 2 a 4 Print a test page to the Windows printer This will determine if the connection from the Mac to the Windows device is valid The test job should appear in Co EPSON Perfection 4990 Idle Accepting Jobs Not Shared the Windows print spooler on 4950 Print Test Page Clean Print Heads As mentioned earlier if a name is created with Print Self Test Page Pause Printer spaces or hyphens these are transposed to Reject Jobs Move All Jobs underscores for the actual printing device Through Corel Ail Kiss CUPs the actual device name is shown Search ia EPSON Perfection 4990 The description still contains the spaces but the actual device being printed to has underscores Another way to check the status is to use the terminal 1 Openaterminal from the Applications Utilities folder In the terminal type Ipstat p This will report on all printers configured on the Mac 2 Search for your printer in the list and verify the name The format will be like printer my printer with spaces is idle Enabled since Jan 01 00 00 3 Tryand print from the terminal Locate a print file run a test job with the correct driver and find the file in the raster folder in the installation directory an
190. efault Camera The default camera tab allows for the selection of a Camera configuration from the database to be applied to any loaded jobs using an RGB colourspace If Honour Embedded ICC Profiles in the SoftProof Settings is unchecked and the RGB image contains an ICC profile the default camera configuration will be used in its place An information window shows the settings of the currently loaded Camera setup Camera configurations are managed in the Workbench and contain information such as the ICC profile to be used rendering intents black point compensation and Calcheck Chart reference View Menu pose Select menu items are also available as icons within the SoftProof window see image eei e Tabs Control the tabbed viewing of images in SoftProof TF o Newtab Opens a new empty tab ready for a job Use the Open Job option 0 le or drag and drop a job from the QueueManager to view it Ris OT wi Close Tab Close the currently selected tab t e es Next Tab Loads the next available tab Previous Tab Loads the previous tab o Show Tab Show hide the tabs listed at the top of the screen Get Info Display information about the softproofed job and how it was processed Show Page Boundary Display a red line around the page area of the job O O 0 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 110 Show Notes Display any notes attached to the job e Screened Pixel Readout Veripres
191. efault background colour e Remove Tab Deletes the currently selected tab e Remove All Tabs Deletes all tabs e Next Previous Tab Switches to the next or previous Monitor tab right or left Reordering Tabs Tabs can be moved to a new position by clicking on and dragging the tab to the desired place in the order A red pointer appears showing the drop point between two tabs Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 103 Press Agent The Press Agent application allows Blackmagic available via the Blackmagic Softproofing Add On to be connected to a Press console through a network port After selecting the appropriate Press Agent Driver a press operator can load or turn softproofing jobs pages using press console buttons Other options include interfacing with a press desk camera The press operator turns a hardcopy page on the press desk Press Agent will use the page recognition data from the camera console to automatically load the correct left and right pages or page spreads AN n Press Agent adm nggolem cw evel serendity softwane com au 9100 NFR not for resale H Log The Press Agent window has a central Log panel to show siss events messages commands received from the press console Cons omniPape while the Agent is active tcm amp amp lt zo 7 a o ne 2 ua XX opgoooocooos M PM Stop mw PM mw The following sort columns can be selected
192. eft click and holding to drag it The Loupe can be resized by clicking on the button with 3 lines see image and dragging outwards The mouse scroll wheel w ill also increase decrease the Loupe size when the mouse is positioned over the window A number of display and control options are available via the buttons at the bottom of the Loupe window button Click to increase the zoom factor of the Loupe The zoom factor is displayed at the bottom centre of the Loupe Note 100 the resolution at which the proof was originally imaged i e 1 screen pixel is 1 job pixel button Click to decrease the zoom factor of the Loupe Spanner Opens the Loupe Options window Eye Displays the HUD Heads Up Display showing the CMYK dot percentages at the centered crosshair or within the average percentage box If the image is RGB the relevant R G and B values will be displayed Show Hide Channel HUD Toggle Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On only Show or hide the SoftProof Channels Widget Only visible when a job contains too many plates to fit in the Channel panel of the HUD SoftProof Menu Options File Menu Open Files Load an image file directly into SoftProof Supported file types are Canon RAW format CRW JPEG PNG PPM Serendipity Blackmagic Image TIFF and Adobe Photoshop PSD Open Jobs Load completed jobs into SoftProof The Imaged Original or Rendered Printed file may be viewed Save Save the preview
193. egrees Enter the desired angle for each plate Screen LPI Enter the desired screen ruling for each plate Defaults Use this to select the default values based on the output resolution Output Screening Override Screen one or more colour plates for any incoming jobs using different methods or with different characteristics than the defaults configured in the Output Screening panel Plates List Output Screening Override Cyan Cyan SuperCell 105 13 3LPi Inverted Elliptical The list on the left of the panel displays the process colour plates Yeon naa and special plates S1 S8 available for screening override ws lg ie Override List Orange 3 Override Remove Edit e Plates Column Lists the plates that have been selected SOR i for screening override e Type Lists the selected screening type for the listed plate along with LACA Output Screening Override details such as screening angle LPI and dot shape Method Haltone 18 Remove Button Removes the selected plates from the override list reverting them back to the default output screening option Dotshape inverted Elliptical 1 F SuperCell Edit Button Edit screening options for the selected plate Options are ER detailed in the Output Screening section above Double clicking on the plate in the Override List will also open the edit options window Cancel ox Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 41
194. en the message popped up The order of the columns can be changed by clicking and dragging them to the desired position or by using the Configure Headers option under the contextual right click menu The columns can be manually resized by dragging the header divider bar to the desired width or resized to fit content by double clicking the divider bar Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 73 ClusterStatus The ClusterStatus is a monitor allowing you to see the current Imaging and Rendering status of jobs on any active Master Servers or Cluster Nodes ene ClusterStatus admin golem swdevel serendipity software com au 9100 De e Clustering Open the Clustering application to manage the Node Imaging 4 Rendering Cluster l doppelganger swd software com au Off Oo e Refresh Update the status p E on e Increase Inset Increases the gap between the list items e Decrease Inset Decreases the gap between the list items e Font Options Allows you to change the size of the text DropZone A DropZone is a place where you can drag and drop files for processing The user selects Pagesetups Pagesetup Pools or the Studio application Asset queue to add to the DropZone as a DropSpot These DropSpots accept the same file formats as the DropFolder Postscript PDF JPEG TIFF Image Serendipity Blackmagic Image EPS PNG PSD The available contextual menu options are
195. er details Colour Management n e Camera ICC Profile Select the ICC profile to assign RUM e Rendering Intent Select the rendering intent to be used We Rd Commerce e Black Point Compensation Enable Disable Black Point Do wen Compensation e Calcheck Chart Assign a Calcheck Chart for Camera colour verification checks using the Displays application DotGain Curve A DotGain Curve can be used to compensate for or represent dot gain on the final output In this section curves can be created for application to a Pagesetup in order to change the output The curve may be applied for two 2 reasons e After the initial calibration you may find that the resultant output is either slightly too dark or slightly too light A DotGain Curve can be applied to the process or specials or both to make the print lighter or darker or e To represent a press or printing process dot gain on the proof Toolbar Options e Trace Saved Curve A green line appears showing where the curve was last saved and where the curve has been edited e Invert Curve Invert the selected curve An inverted curve can be used to compensate for the colour characterisation or platesetter dotgain curves output by a platesetter RIP returning jobs to a linear state for proofing e Dotgain Table Enter values manually to adjust or create a curve e Import from CSV Import values from a CSV file The file must contain exactly 23 values for each colour as
196. er information on the automatic software update functions see the Serendipity Updater section of this manual Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 21 The Serendipity Updater The Serendipity Updater provides a simple and convenient way of updating Serendipity Blackmagic and standalone Serendipity Clients ANA Software Update The Updater tracks your current software installation status and g There are software updates available for Serendipity automatically checks for available software updates bug fixes Blackmagic version 5 2 maintenance patches and new drivers A Configured to update product installed in 23 I Applications Serendipity bmagic Select the items you want then click install New updates are listed along with release notes previously installed updates are logged in the Updater and notes can be viewed at any time EERE instaled Updates install MA version Date Posted Size lt Gage en ee eo ae i M Calcheck update 1 0 25 01 11 8 15MB Note The Serendipity Updater requires access to the internet to function Updates are not downloaded or installed until initiated by the user as the Server and or Client are shutdown as part of the update process The following update functions are available in the Help menu of the Fixes a problem that can occur with CMYK calcheck charts caused by CMYK chart patch values not being converted and saved with corresponding Lab Blackm
197. erendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 107 e Max Ink Key Value Set the size of the ink keys to match your press Ink values are calculated based on the size entered If the size is 100 percentages are displayed e Sheet Placement Show the job as positioned on the press sheet defined in the configuration The job can be centered selecting the Centre checkbox or offset from the left X and bottom Y De selecting this displays the whole job in the viewer and changes the ink keys to show total ink amounts for the job e Ink Weight Calculator Calculate the amount of ink required to print x number of copies o Print Run Size How many to print o Ink Weight g m Enter the weight of the ink used in grams per square metre o Calculate Based on the values entered for ink weight and print run size the total weight of ink for each colour will be calculated for the loaded job and displayed in the ink value area Contextual right click menu options include e Show Ink Key Table Shows a separate window listing the ink key values of all keys for each plate These can be printed using a local printer or exported to PDF e Export Tab Delimited Exports the values for the keys and ink values to a tab delimited text file Get Info Widget Pas The Get Info icon will display job information about the currently viewed image in SoftProof how it was processed what Pagesetup and Media were used and
198. ermost box in the group Align Bottom Align grouped frames along the bottom edge of the lowest box in the group Align Horizontal Centre Align grouped frames along the averaged horizontal centre line of the frames in the group Align Vertical Centre Align grouped frames along the averaged vertical centre line of the frames in the group Orient Up Down Alters the frame orientation to either upright or upside down 180 degree rotation Orient Right Left Alters the frame orientation to either right or left by 90 degrees from the upright position Lock Lock the selected frames Locked frames appear transparent and cannot be edited until unlocked Unlock All Unlock all currently locked frames Decloak All Decloaks all frames Allows for movement deletion or editing of frames that were locked cloaked after submission only available when Cloaking mode is active Select All Selects all frames in the nest layout area for grouping ungrouping movement locking or deletion Frame properties may be adjusted and will affect all selected frames and their positions within the layout area Select Inverse Deselects current frames while selecting all previously unselected frames Step and Repeat Allows users to create a set of size specific frames for image placement or copy the dimensions of existing frames and repeat them across and down the Layout area Auto arrange Automatically arranges nests the images placed in the Layout area to
199. est density reading regardless of colour Export Values f Name Export Measurments e Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Density The density reading of the chosen Cy ibarDedsly TICcourMecenbuy colour For e g if Cyan is selected the Cyan density for each reading is M Cyan Density Cyan Percentage taken This is the value displayed in the Cd column ofthe list M Magenta Density Magenta Percentage e Colour Percentage The percentage reading of the highest density read as 77 Yellow Density 7 Yellow Percentage displayed in the Dot96 column C Black Density Black Percentage e Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Percentage The percentage reading of the order values cx 18 chosen colour For e g if Cyan is selected the percentage of Cyan for each cot Values with Tabs TA reading is taken This is the value displayed in the C column of the list Come D The percentage values must be present for the values to be exported If they are not the exported file will show a 1 value in place of the reading e Order Values Choose whether to export the file in CMYK or KCMY order e Separate Values With Choose to separate the values with either a tab character or a space e Cancel Cancels the Export action e Export Displays a file chooser allowing you to enter a name and select a location to save the file to Table 1 Supported Density Standards el AA el Not all instruments support all
200. ete the setup Output Configuration The Output for the printer is set up normally An Output Driver is assigned Destination Driver selected and Collating options are enabled if required Once the Output is created the Media configured for screenprinting see below should be assigned so only screen print separations will print to the film Media Configuration e Output Driver Select the driver as set up in the Output created for the screen printing configuration e Resolution Choose an appropriate resolution A higher density can be achieved with a higher resolution however it is slower to process and print A lower density may produce sufficient density depending on the printer and media used e Colourspace Select CMYK If using the Black Ink Combination only choose Gray as the Colourspace as this may result in slightly faster processing However in this mode inks cannot be mixed to produce a denser output Selecting CMYK and configuring a Paper Profile will allow the choice to use Black only of a mix of colours at a later stage without having to recreate a Paper Profile e Custom Settings Select the appropriate media choose Uni directional or Bi directional and turn the Use Light Inks option off Bi directional is faster but may produce slight banding or may not be as dense as printing Uni directionally Using Light Inks will affect the patches in the Paper Profile In Screen Printing mode only one patch can be on per colour e
201. ever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 156 Copyright The XFree86 Project Inc Copyright 1994 1995 The XFree86 Project Inc All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or s
202. example 0 is cyan 1 is Magenta etc If this is selected two other options are available o Starting Plate Number Enter the number the plates start at This is usually 0 or 1 o Plate Order Choose the plate order between KCMY specials or CMYK specials e Map Letters C M Y K to Process Names If the plates are named with just letters for example cyan is represented as c selected Defined by words and choose this option Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 35 Plate Mapping Strip leading zeros from colour names Sometimes colour names have multiple zeros before the plate number This option can be used to remove these You can map plate names so they appear correctly in the RIPMonitor and are able to be matched to colours in the System Specials colour set see Server Settings Colour Management A list of plates requiring mapping can be created Case Sensitive Mapping Select this if the mapping should check for case Add Add the mapping to the list Apply Apply changes to the currently selected mapping Delete Delete the currently selected mapping from the list Prefix number literals with user text Add a prefix to numbers you are polling For example if the colour is called 254 you can prefix the word pantone in front of the number making the special plate become pantone 254 Tabs 4 Publication Pages This tab is where parts can be identified from the Filename Bre
203. eys If selected from the menu the frame will appear in the centre of the current Layout view Marker Options include e Marker Type Select from Crosshair Horizontal Line Vertical Line or Colour Box e Line Thickness Set the thickness of the line for Crosshair Horizontal and Vertical Line options This does not apply when Colour Box is selected Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 119 Line Colour Select a colour for the line or box as selected above Double click the colour display box to select a colour from a Special Colour Set Blackmagic Only or create a colour using the Lab CMYK or RGB sliders Note If the colour selected does not match the colourspace of the image a preview will not be available for viewing using the SoftProof application Content The Content section within Frame Canvas Wrap allows for the editing of the asset held within the frame This is available in both Frame and Canvas Wrap modes but not in Marker mode Left The offset distance of the asset image from the left edge of the frame Top The offset distance of the asset image from the top edge of the frame Width The width of the asset within the frame Height The height of the asset within the frame Lock Button Locks the current proportions of the asset if resized along one dimension Scaling The method of scaling used for any asset placed within the frame o To Fit The entire asset image is rescaled an
204. figurable to poll the chosen directories for the defined filenames Tasks A Job Genie is made up of one or more user defined tasks Each task specifies how the job filenames are collected how they are defined and grouped how the job names will be displayed in the RIPMonitor and if the jobs will be proofed as a publication when submitted for processing Important Note More than one task may be required to collect all the files in a given path if the naming varies Jobs are constructed in the order of the tasks Once a Jobname is matched by a given task it is removed from subsequent searches so the order of the tasks is very important To change the order of a task select it with the mouse and drag it to the desired position in the list Interface Options e Log Enable or disable to display the matching process in the ServerLog for the task selected This can be useful to debug problems where configurations are not matching files properly It is best to turn logging off for a Job Genie that is functioning correctly to avoid the ServerLog becoming too large or cluttered e Add Add another task to the list e Duplicate Copy the selected task to a new one e Delete Delete the currently selected task Tabs 1 Collect Files This tab specifies how the files are sorted and collected by the input filter One or more search parameters can be entered with each one comprising of an Action type a Match criteria and a search String M I
205. files to send to a Media and Pagesetup for processing One or more files may be selected for processing Selecting Open will present a chooser showing the Pagesetups or Pagesetup Pools and Medias available Choose the combination to submit the files to and click the Submit button This will copy the files into the system for processing The flow control can be enabled to hold the job after imaging or rendering the number of copies can beset m or jobs can be placed as pages in a publication Swtrrat Aes Submit Window The Submit window is comprised of four 4 sections a Pagesetup Pagesetup Pools selection list a Media selection list an Information panel displaying details of the currently selected Pagesetup or Media and a Submission control panel 1 T i m 5 313333111 77132322123 a gt x FR 1 13333313 Es g od T LDigerrfecdzg TE j POCO 3 4 4 3 ceo Y r LE i s53 zt E TIFE EB gc gt E E i 2 PLZE 5 gt P 3 r a s 2 amp t gt 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 99 9 9 22 979 Pagesetup Selection List na Tom This list has two 2 buttons above it Only one can be active at any time e Pagesetup When selected this button displays a list of Pagesetups available to submit jobs to e Pagesetup Pool When selected this button displays a list of Pagesetup Pools available to submit jobs to An active selected Pagesetup is highlighted in blue
206. for Publishing as a Bonjour Printer To configure the Pagesetup for Publishing 1 Publish Publish Drop older In the Workbench select the Pagesetup to be Published from the list of available items Go to the Publish panel and enable the printer Mac checkbox This lists the Pagesetup in the Mac OS X system Bonjour destinations as Pagesetup name computer name Save the Pagesetup configuration when done Default Printer lt A Mac Wi TCP Port ndows Activate port number Flow Control Hold After Imaging Hold After Rendering Nest Creating a Bonjour System Printer for Mac OS X A system printer needs to be created and configured on the Mac OS X computer running the Blackmagic Server Do Dese A Open the System Preferences for Mac OS X Choose Print amp Fax Select the Default icon at the top of the Add Printer window _ ee MIX Choose the Pagesetup from the Printer Name list The Pagesetup Pe memes imer cent Amps will be listed as Kind Bonjour and named Pagesetup name 2 computer name Print Using If you have installed the Serendipity Printer Drivers the Print Using field should auto fill to show Serendipity Blackmagic a If the Serendipity Printer Drivers have not been installed cancel the printer setup and install the drivers as per the above instructions A O Add Printer A V a Default Fax 1 Wedows Search asset drop rambutan swevel serendipity so tware
207. g to print to Blackmagic This is done by following the appropriate steps outlined previously for the relevant operating system The only alteration is when entering the TCP IP address and the TCP port number 1 Enter the network TCP IP address of the computer on which the Blackmagic Server is running i e the machine you wish to print to 2 Enter the TCP Port Number assigned to the Published Pagesetup you wish to print to Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 146 Troubleshooting Here are some suggestions of where to look if you run into trouble and experience problems when using a Cluster Jobs Not Processing Through a Cluster Node The possible reasons for this are e The Cluster Node is not configured to image render or both Check the ClusterStatus to see if either of the processing tasks have been disabled To enable them open the Clustering application and enable the appropriate task e The Cluster Node has a Processing Pool attached and the Pagesetup you are submitting jobs to is not contained within the Pool You can either unselect the Pool or add the Pagesetup to the Pagesetup Pool e The Cluster Node has gone offline To check open the Clustering application and check the node If the Clustering application is already open click the Refresh button This will check for node status If the node appears grayed out or disabled this indicates the node is not currently online Here the
208. ge panel o Manage Custom Page Sizes Create and manage custom page dimensions for use Any page sizes created here will also appear in the Studio application Media Panel Page Size section e Printer Margins Optionally set the Top Left Bottom Right margins for the selected printer These values should be the hardware margins of the printer defining the maximum limit of printable area The margins are utilised by Blackmagic when functions such as image placement and centring are used e Custom Settings These options will vary depending on which output driver has been selected For example if JPEG is chosen the quality may be specified in the customise section If an Epson device is selected items such as paper types ink types and cut methods become available i x n 3 3 amp J f C C Note Borderless Printing If available to the printer model users can choose Borderless Printing in the custom settings If selected Media width and the image Fit setting needs to be set to 6mm wider than the actual paper width When using Borderless Printing up to 3mm of the image will be lost from the left and right sides of the image and 1mm lost from the top and bottom of the image Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 38 Spotcolour Mapping Some printers feature inks such as metallic and white intended for signage and display to replicate a press process or substrate to act as a prime
209. ger toolbar or contextual right click menu Hold After Rendering Hold jobs submitted to the Published Pagesetup after rendering has completed Held jobs can be released to continue processing via the QueueManager toolbar or contextual right click menu Nest When enabled this option will nest jobs submitted to the Published Pagesetup according to the criteria defined in the Output used by the Pagesetup Media Note The Nest function only requires that the Output used has nesting parameters defined The Output itself can have nesting disabled for normal use This makes it possible to create multiple nesting or non nesting Published Pagesetup s to print via the same Output Asset Queue as a Published Pagesetup The Asset Queue automatically publishes itself on the network in multiple ways Drop Folder Files placed in the Asset Drop Folder are automatically placed in the Asset Queue The drop folder location is Serendipity Blackmagic drop asset drop Printer The Asset Queue is published as a Bonjour Zeroconf network destination address asset dropQ computer name Jobs printed to this Bonjour destination see above are placed in the Asset Queue TCP Port The Asset Queue publishes itself to TCP port number 9104 Jobs printed to this TCP port see above are placed in the Asset Queue Colour Correction Replace Colour Set Select a Replace Colour Set from the list of available sets colour correction the curve edit it or create
210. ges the colour of the Status window Dropfolders amp Font options Allows you to change the size of the text Thumbnail This module displays a thumbnail of jobs as they are imaging and rendering Thumbnail progress is updated at the same time as the Imaging or Rendering QueueStatus is updated The following options are available from the contextual menu right click Show Imaging Show the Imaging thumbnail denoted by gears in each inset Show Rendering Show the Rendering thumbnail denoted by a paintbrush in each inset Normal Thumbnail Displays the default size thumbnail Large Thumbnail Displays a large thumbnail Small Thumbnail Displays a small thumbnail Each active Thumbnail module may only show either Imaging or Rendering not both The module window displays as many Thumbnail insets as there are simultaneous Imaging Rendering tasks configured in the Server Settings VirtualPress VirtualPress gives users the ability to manage the plates of the job You can drop plates change plate colours and merge plates from other jobs If a job contains an un allocated plate i e no colour use VirtualPress to allocate a colour unless a Replace Colour Set is selected containing the plate The History keeps jobs that have been imported into Unn VirtualPress Any changes or additions are kept so the dccus D SSH jobs can be resubmitted at any time without having to mM recreate the changes The history is held while t
211. gesetup the default Media assigned to the Pagesetup is used If you wish to publish to different media on the same printer each Media required needs to be assigned to its own Pagesetup with its own unique port number Creating a TCP IP Windows System Printer A system printer needs to be created and configured on the Windows computer that is running the Blackmagic Server Select Windows Start Menu Devices and Printers Click on Add Printer The Add Printer wizard will appear Select Add a Local Printer and click Next Select Create a New Port and Standard TCP IP Port from the Type of Port dropdown menu Choose printer port Click Next A peter poris a type el connection that allows your computer to enchonge indormation with a print 6 Typea Printer or Hostname Address es a Device Type TCP IP Device B Crue a new port b Hostname or IP address Enter the Network IP address ister ponent TCU Poa of the Windows computer running the Blackmagic Server e g 192 168 3 59 c Port Name Enter a name for the Windows port this is X NOT the printer name DON MegeipPPD i d Uncheck the option to Query the Printer and Query the printer and automaticaly select the driver to use Automatically Select the Driver to Use 7 Click Next 8 Additional Port Information Required Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 144 ps Dew S a Device Type Custom b Click the Settings button A confi
212. get The Channels Viewer shows the channels or plates of the job currently being viewed in SoftProof Plates can be turned on or off by clicking the relevant M BC L378 coloured checkbox to the left of the plate name and can be reordered by clicking a gamin syra and dragging to a new position The plate colour and associated attributes can be S Bm oon changed by double clicking and choosing another Special Colour Set from the tel 197 65 library or edited for that SoftProof instance only e Name The plate name The checkbox indicates whether or not the plate is displayed e Value The percentage of colour at the point of the cursor in the window Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 106 Total ink displays the total amount of ink at the point of the colour selector i e the sum of all plate percentages For RGB it will show the relative RGB values only The contextual menu right click reveals additional options for non RGB jobs only Choose Plate Colour Select a plate colour from a Special Colour Set for the selected channel Double clicking will display the same Special Colour Set window Choose Paper Colour Select a colour from the Special Colour Set to use to simulate the paper colour Once set the option to revert becomes available Edit Plate Colour Displays a colour editing window to edit the selected colour for the current SoftProof instance only The edits are not stored in a libr
213. guration window will appear Additional port information required 9 Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor fedodcalonet found on fle nami Posonii a Protocol Select Raw The eei i Raw Settings lt The bdsais on na jeeehoen epic uud 1 Port Number Enter the unique TCP sitet ae parton acta ech on the network you ee the ae i coe let he Port number assigned to the Pagesetup Device Type to be published e g 10201 s Custom tings 2 Click OK The window will close and return to the Additional Port Information window 3 Click Next 10 Install the Printer Driver Negeri BO 152 168 3 59 a Ifthis is the first time installing a Blackmagic system printer insert the Blackmagic Installation DVD and select Have Disk Navigate to the drivers win win xp vista 7 directory c Select the Megarip inf file and click Open The Serendipity Megarip driver should now be displayed d Click Next Note The above step can be skipped for any subsequent installs of Blackmagic system printers The driver can be chosen from the Windows printer driver list 11 Which Version of the Driver do you want to use a Select Use the driver that is currently installed recommended unless you are replacing an older installed version of the Serendipity Megarip driver b Click Next 12 Type a Printer Name c Enter a name for the printer This is the name that will appear in the Windows Printers list and be available as a printer option
214. h Plate or Original name to change it e Delete Colours Deletes the selected colour s e Duplicate Colours Makes a copy of the selected colour s e Rename Match Rename one or more Match Plates using a popup Find and Replace tool e Rename Original Rename one or more Original replacement colour names using a popup Find and Replace tool e Add Colours From Library Select one or more colours from a Special Colour Set within Blackmagic to be added to the Replace Colour Set i i i i Alternatively this window may be opened by double clicking on an empty area of the list panel or double click on a selected colour in the list to open the Add Colours window and replace it with the chosen colour e Import Colours From Files Import colours from compatible third party applications CGATS ISO 12642 files or previously exported colour sets N Colour swatches will not import unless an N colour ICC profile with matching process colour channels is first assigned to the Special Colour Set If CMYK swatches are imported to an N Colour set extra colour channels with 096 values will be added to match the colour space e Export Colours To File Export the colour swatches to a CGATS ISO 12642 file If the set contains a mix of CMYK N colour and Lab colours you will be prompted to export either CMYK N colour or Lab colours The file standard limits exported colours to one colourspace e Export Colour Set To File Export the entire Replace Co
215. h can be inverted with CMD SHIFT I Mac or CTRL SHIFT I Win to Q hide the matching items The search box will turn black to indicate inverse searching Pressing ESC will dismiss the search There are two 2 main sections to the Client The Workbench and the Jobs application e The Workbench is used to configure the various parts of the Server This is used to create queues setup input paths and various calibration functions e Jobs an application is used for managing and viewing jobs as they pass through the system The Applications and Modules add functionality and provide tools for managing the Server and the jobs passing through it There are also various menu options containing system utilities and preferences Workbench The Workbench is where the main software configuration takes place RIPs Medias Pagesetups Output paths Colour Sets and Colour Correction Curves can all be setup here When items are created or changed in the Workbench they are saved to a database read by the Server each time at startup The database can be backed up and copied to other emp Version 5 4 Blackmagic Servers Bm ee e The Workbench is a split window The Data Types list the database n dme es E a item categories that can be selected for creation or editing The i55 mu E items list show the available database items within each Data Type s i55 oe The gray area shows the settings and options for each item i NE
216. has nesting parameters defined Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 130 The Output itself can have nesting disabled for normal use This allows selected jobs to be nested when submitted while leaving the Output non nesting for normal use e Rotate 90 Rotates the job 90 degrees This will override any rotation settings in a Pagesetup Copies e No of copies field Enter the number of copies of the job to be printed e Copy Lock button Locks the number of copies to be printed for any files submitted until unlocked and changed Publication e Publication Name field Optionally type a publication name to which the submitted file will be assigned The job will be viewable in the Publication View of the QueueManager e First Page field Enter the page number for the submitted file in the publication If submitting multiple files the page numbering will start at the defined page number and increase sequentially for each job Submit Files For De Imposition Also available via the RIPMonitor this option allows you to submit files directly for de imposition rather than from a RIP queue After selecting one or more files a chooser will appear to enable selection of a Pagesetup and Media or Pagesetup Pool A Signature Group can also be assigned to de impose the files see Workbench Signature Groups for more information Submit Files As Imposition Also available via the RIPMonitor this option allows you
217. he 2 3 Client is running Once the Client has quit any history z is purged A Submit button to the bottom left of the ma fee Virtual Press allows multiple VPress History items to T be selected and printed simultaneously Quick Submit shows a pull down list of the configured Pagesetups Clicking this button submits the selected job to the Pagesetup shown The option to Hold After Imaging or Rendering is also available Edit Plate Colour displays a colour editor allowing you to change the colour attributes for this plate only The edit is not stored anywhere and does not affect the Special Colour Set This option is also available when right clicking on a plate Choose allows you to select a colour from the colour libraries This is only available for special plates You can also double click the plate in the list to choose a colour from the libraries Reorder Plates allows you to change the order of the process plates Plate position is used for Overprint Knockout Opacity and Transparency simulation The order of the list dictates the order the plates are merged and can affect the job where plates have attributes such as Opacity The button will appear in italics when the order has been changed from the original Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 82 Applications The applications available within Serendipity Blackmagic add functionality to the Client and provide additional tools for managi
218. he Special Colour Set If CMYK swatches are imported to an N Colour set extra colour channels with 0 values will be added to match the colour space e Export Colours To File Export the colour swatches to a CGATS ISO 12642 file If the set contains a mix of CMYK N colour and Lab colours you will be prompted to export either CMYK N colour or Lab colours The file standard limits exported colours to one colourspace e Reorder swatches Change the order of the colour swatches as they appear in the list Note Swatch order can be important as a Pantone plate being matched from a number will be assigned the first colour when matching the number in the set list e N Colour Profile Assign a multicolour ICC profile to the Special Colour Set Note If an N Colour multicolour ICC profile is assigned to the set users will have the option to adjust colours in an Lab or N Colour colourspace as defined by the ICC profile e g Lab or CMYKOG Colours for each Special Colour Set can only be defined in Lab and or a single other colourspace If no N Colour profile is assigned colours are adjusted using either Lab or CMYK values All Toolbar options can be accessed via the contextual right click menu available in the colour list panel as well as m n pien Comoe e Print Prints the colour list of the Special Colour Set with colour swatches and details for each colour see below e Print and Match Colour Make adjustments to a selected specia
219. heck every aspect of the job at any stage of production or processing SoftProof can be used in conjunction with or instead of a hardcopy proof Using a calibrated monitor and configured press settings proofs can be viewed and verified onscreen with precise colour accuracy All job plates are shown and can be turned on or off or changed as desired Colour attributes and plate characteristics can be changed to see the effects of different printing processes including paper types and the effects of show through from the reverse side The data can be exported to various file formats including CIP3 and PDF An Ink Key Viewer can display a job as it would be on the press with the values for each key shown The ink weight can also be calculated and over ink areas identified The proof can also be verified using the Displays application to give a pass or fail status in accordance with chosen colour standards Layout The SoftProof application consists of a large central viewing window for jobs a visual Tools menu on the left and a View panel to the right a Navigation Thumbnail at the top right and a status bar along the bottom of the window Navigation Thumbnail This thumbnail shows the entire image loaded for softproofing The area currently shown in the main viewing area is represented by a rectangle on the thumbnail Mouse over and left click to view a new area Of the proof Status Bar This bar shows the information about the currently loade
220. hen viewing a publication When enabled a thumbnail of the page appears when the mouse pointer hovers over the page number box Enable Pager Sections When enabled a Section label button is displayed above the pages in the SoftProof Page Index panel This allows for loaded multi section publications to be viewed one section at a time displaying the page range within BE each section Clicking the section label bar will open a menu to choose which or section to view or to view all sections ent N All Sections Image ve e Resampling Algorithm Set the resampling algorithm for jobs as they are viewed in SoftProof e Screening LPI Enter the desired value for screen ruling in lines per inch LPI The default is 150 e Centre Select to align any images opened in SoftProof either Horizontally or Vertically or both Default Press The default press tab allows the selection of a Press configuration from the database to be applied to the loaded jobs and for all subsequent jobs loaded in SoftProof 7 Press 1 The default press used for softproofing jobs Press 2 Assign an alternate press configuration for publications that include pages printed on a different stock e g glossy magazine covers Water Dagan Cre Nene An information window shows the settings of the currently loaded Press setup Configurations are managed in the Workbench and contain information such as size number of keys and colour information Prec regt D
221. hoose from o To Separator Enter a character in the text box to specify as a separator i e continue reading the part until you reach this separator o To End of String Match everything from this point to the end of the filename string To Numeric Separator Match everything from this point until you find a number To Non Numeric Separator Match everything from this point until you find anything that is not a number To full stop Separator Match everything from this point until you find a full stop To hyphen Separator Match everything from this point until you find a hyphen To _ underscore Separator Match everything from this point until you find an underscore To dollar Separator Match everything from this point until you find a dollar sign symbol To space Separator Match everything from this point until you find a space Number of Characters Match the number of characters specified in the text box A further option is available if this is selected Truncate from Character Choose a character to identify in the filename and remove all characters from the point onwards For example if you have a large number of 0 s in a group you can choose to remove those 0 s from the group so they are not displayed O O O O O OO O0 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 34 Note The To Separator and Truncate from Character options allow multiple en
222. hoose the Paint Mode for the colour The diagram shows the Paint Mode Opacity and Tint of the selected colour Choices are o Overprint Knockout Primer Opaque adds an opacity 96 slider Transparent e Tint Adjust the intensity of the colour by adjusting the slider entering a tint value or using the up down arrows e DotGain Curve Choose a DotGain Curve to apply to the colour O O O Note A DotGain Curve applied to a replacement colour takes precedence over global Process or Specials DotGain Curves assigned to a Pagesetup The Pagesetup curves are ignored for the colour e Weight Optionally assign an Ink Weight in g m to the selected colour This weight is used in the InkKeyViewer SoftProof and in Calculate Ink Weights QueueManager e Spectrophotometer Choose a supported Spectrophotometer to read colour values directly into the Special Colour Set Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 60 RIP Different RIPs store their files in different formats and in different locations The RIP data type is used to configure how and where Blackmagic polls for these RIPped jobs Driver Driver x This panel is where the driver used to poll and interpret the incoming file format is tees i selected The driver must match the type of RIPped file to be polled Options available in other sections of the RIP configuration may change depending on the RIP input filter selected
223. hown or hidden using the Touch Console settings e DO DSA I e lt Navigator Overlaying objects amp Boundary viewing publications e Text Tab Toggles the text job name tabs for multiple loaded images in the SoftProof screen e Image Tab Toggles the job thumbnails in the SoftProof screen e Tools Toggles the Tool Palette in the SoftProof screen The Palette must be enabled in the SoftProof application for this to function e Status Toggles the status bar in the SoftProof window Note If the monitor is Calcheck Managed and the current Press has a Calcheck fail red cross status the Status Bar cannot be hidden e Full Screen View the SoftProof window in full screen view or the user defined view e 90 CW 180 90 CCW Rotate the currently viewed proof in the desired direction Invert Invert the image displayed Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 125 e Mirror Mirror the image displayed e Auto Crop Remove white space from around a job There must be a completely clear area on any one side of the job e Blueline Replace all colours with varying shades of blue to see any traps e Revert Channels Revert to the original channel values e Previous Next Page Move to the previous or next page when viewing a publication e Notes Show or hide any notes embedded in the job see SoftProof Notes for more information e Previous Next Tab Move
224. hows the colourspace values of the replacement colour e Original Name The original name of the replacement colour in the Match Plate swatch Click on the name to change it e Space The colourspace of the replacement colour plate e Mode The Paint Mode of the colour Overprint Knockout Primer Opaque or Transparent e Tint The tint or intensity of the colour e DotGain Curve The name of the DotGain Curve applied to the plate if any e Weight g m The Press Ink Weight of the colour in g m if assigned Tab 5 Remaining Allocate one colour to replace Special Plates that are not matched by anything else This only replaces special colours and not CMYK process colours This panel has a similar interface to the Process panel Colour Adjustment Panel View and adjust the colourspace values and plate properties of a selected colour The name of the colour selected is shown at the top A window displays the Original colour and Modified colour as adjustments are being made A correctly calibrated monitor with an assigned Match ICC profile will display an accurate representation of the colour s Available adjustment options are e Colourspace Choose between Lab or CMYK or multicolour if an N Colour ICC profile has been assigned to the Replace Colour Set The sliders change accordingly for making adjustments to the Lab or CMYK N Colour values These can be entered directly or fine tuned using the up down arrows e Paint Mode C
225. ht Notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution Compression Library Copyright Copyright 1995 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler gzipQprep ai miteedu madler alumni caltech edu Independent JPEG Group s Copyright The authors make no warranty or representation either express or implied with respect to this software its quality accuracy merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose This software is provided as is and you its user assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy This software is copyright 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 Thomas G Lane All Righ
226. idebar containing the Asset Property and Template panels e Section Headers Toggles the headers of each section within the sidebar under each panel on or off As an added option holding down the spacebar will allow you to pan around the Layout area when moving the mouse similar to a navigator used in graphics applications The mouse cursor will change to a hand when enabled Guides Guides are a useful tool when placing asset images into the Layout area for printing Enabled by default guides are created by clicking in either the horizontal or vertical rules of the Studio Layout interface and dragging a guide in to the desired location Guides are saved with a template design in the Template Library e To move or reposition an existing guide CTRL win or CMD mac Click on the guide and drag to a new location e To snap guides to grid CTRL win or CMD mac SHIFT CLICK on the guide and drag to a new location The guide will snap to the grid point e To remove all guides Select View menu gt Clear Guides e To remove a single guide CTRL CMD Double click on a guide or CTRL CMD Click Drag the guide back into the ruler Note If Guides and Snap To Grid are both active the asset frame will snap to guide first if the frame edge is closest Otherwise it will snap to the grid point Guides are ignored if Autoarrange or Autoarrange with Rotation options are used Studio Layout Area The Layout area is where jobs assets are laid
227. ient Blackmagic and C5 applications Starting the Server 1 Plug the dongle into an available USB port 2 Launch the Server by double clicking the Serendipity Blackmagic file in the Q installation directory or the shortcut desktop dock icon gt The Server window will appear showing information about the Server software and the Serendipity Blackmagic initialisation process will begin Note The Server will not initialise if a recognised dongle is not present on the computer from which it is run If the dongle is removed at any point while the Server is running all job processing will cease and the Server will stop shortly afterwards Once the dongle is reconnected close and restart the Server Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 16 Starting the Client Once the Server has completed initialisation the Client can be opened 1 Launch the Client by double clicking the Serendipity Client file in the installation 5 directory or the shortcut desktop dock icon Serendipity Client The Client will connect to the active Server and display the default monitoring system Jobs on screen From this point configuration of the system or loading a pre configured setup can be done Select Server menu Server Settings Preferences Select the Colour Management tab Click on Change System Specials and select Reference Lab or your own specials and click OK Click OK to dismiss the Sys
228. ies the priority to be used for transferring files from the RIP to Blackmagic Adjust from Lowest to Highest or anywhere in between Sometimes a high priority can affect the RIP performance especially on older RIPs This can cause problems such as RIPs pausing If this happens reduce the priority level Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 61 Paths Specify the paths to the RIPped files residing on the RIP This may be a single path or multiple paths and can be made up of striped paths The path structure is dependent upon the RIP driver selected The options available are detailed below e New Adds a new path or stripe path to the Paths field Selecting this displays another window to type the path or browse to locate the folder containing the jobs Browse will only work if the connection method has been specified and is valid e Delete Deletes the selected paths e Delete All Deletes all paths from the list Most RIP drivers use recursive polling i e they will poll down the directory structure into sub directories from the top level directory specified in the path The more sub directories to be searched the longer it takes Specify the path as close as possible to the files for quicker results Stripe Paths Some RIPs place jobs on different drives but in the same location They can add more drives to a RIP giving it a new mount point for e g E RIPJobs F RIPJobs and G RIPJobs Thes
229. il This is faster but some detail may be lost in the PEE S thumbnail Output unknown files to printer e Compression Control the compression for the intermediate file A a format the Imaged file Choices are Faster or Better The default a ea is Faster Sender Email Address e Maximum Print Preview Resolution Set the maximum z a resolution for the rendered preview The default is 180dpi e Polling Service Refresh Set the interval between poll service checks i e how long between checks to see if any RIPs require polling The default is 50 seconds if the times are left at 0 e Server Back Log Number of days to keep the log Older days are trimmed when the Server starts Zero 0 means the log will not be trimmed e Processes Control the number of processes the machine will handle i e the number of Imaging and Rendering tasks simultaneously run on the Server The defaults are 1 1 Up to one imaging and rendering task can be set per CPU core the Server machine possesses In practice it is recommended the combined number of imaging and rendering tasks be set to no more than the number of cores For example 4 CPU cores 2 Image 2 Render e Minimum Broadcast Interval Set the interval between the Server sending out updates to connected Clients The default interval is 2sec High end systems with good networking are able to set the interval to Osec for slightly improved image render times when processing large numbers of jobs Sites usi
230. ile Select a press ICC This can be one created on t the press or a printing standard ICC which is used as the target or x n z z z Z o 3 S o 6 SG o 2 2 3 2 gt gt gt match profile Yellow DoiCuin Cure CMYK DotGain Curves Select individual C M Y or K DotGain Oak ordain Cores Curves to be applied SS Specials DotGain Curve Select a DotGain Curve to be applied to gt Cicuck Can None any special or spot colours Device Linearisation Curve Select a device platesetter DotGain Curve to be applied Calcheck Chart Select a chart to verify the SoftProof s calibration status Paper Colour Three 3 options are available o None Do not change the paper colour o ICC Profile Use the white point from the press ICC profile and apply as the paper colour or o Custom Enter your own value for the paper colour Use a Spectrophotometer to measure the paper white directly into the configuration Ink and Paper Configure the ink and paper properties of the press to simulate their effects on the screen in the SoftProof application Maximum Ink Weight Enter a value for the maximum ink weight This value is used by the InkKeyViewer to show excess ink Stretch Factor Enter a compensation factor to allow for stretch It can be used for distortion simulation or anamorphic scaling where one direction will distort more than the other Note The easiest way to calculate stretch is to draw a rectangle 1m x 1m and p
231. ill produce varying results so a combination of patches and ink mixing may work better The higher resolution 1440dpi produced the most dense output at around 4 18D but takes longer to RIP and print By running at a lower resolution 720dpi the jobs processed quicker but the density drops to just under 3 at around 2 8D This is often acceptable for many applications but will vary depending on the media and device used Testing will prove the most suitable setup The most commonly used settings were CMYK colourspace with an ink combination of Black and Magenta This used the large Black dot 4 and the small Magenta dot 2 in the Paper Profile and gave a slight reddish tinge to the Black which is desirable in the Screen Printing industry Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 70 Modules Modules are informational windows used for managing jobs as they pass through the system and to monitor Server and Client activity Modules are arranged and utilised in a pre configured format in the Jobs application are able to be added and configured to a tabbed window as part of a Monitor layout via the Layout menu or started up individually as standalone windows from the Module menu There are twelve 12 modules to choose from BookMonitor Similar to the RIPMonitor this module displays a list of Books compiled via the Bookfilter This module is only available in Veripress and the Blackmagic Softproofing Add on
232. ing used to proof jobs Alternatively the chart can be assigned to a Pagesetup to print with each proofing job The chart is EE then measured using a supported Spectrophotometer Pre char After measuring the chart the results are displayed in the Calcheck window A pass green tick or fail red cross is determined by whether A EM the measured patches fall inside the tolerances defined in the Calcheck air EE SEES enm moe her un is M un P Chart The results can be printed as a label or a complete report to a system ov EEEE 5 05 08 0059 ea printer If a Media or job was loaded into Calcheck before measuring the ar 88 aei m EDEN m results will be saved to the Media Calcheck Info or stored in the job s Job mmmmmmemmm os o s em amon Info see below A M The Calcheck application is made up of a Summary Panel Measurements Panel and a Device Spectrophotometer dropdown menu Summary Panel This panel is viewed by selecting the left cross tick button at the top right of the Calcheck window It displays Summary information about the completed Calcheck This information is also available for view within the MediaStatus module the Calcheck Info section of a Media or the Job Info window of jobs that have been calchecked The following information is displayed e The panel title bar shows the Calcheck Chart used for the check e AAII Ae AH AC These buttons switch between summaries of the respective A standards
233. installer Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation Restart the computer when finished Installing the Blackmagic Version 5 4 Upgrade To upgrade 1 2 S 4 5 6 Insert the Blackmagic installation DVD and navigate to the macosx folder Run the Serendipity Blackmagic pkg tile Select the drive and location to install the software The installer will choose the current installation location by default which in most cases is Applications Serendipity Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the upgrade Plug the Blackmagic dongle into an available USB port Start the Blackmagic v5 4 Server and the Serendipity Client If the installation location was not changed the existing database should appear once the Server and Client have restarted reformatted and intact in the Workbench The Client should open with the previous versions configuration If the installation location was changed or in the event the existing database is not complete the database backup needs to be imported using the Archives application To import an existing database backup 1 Z S 6 Open the Archives application from the Serendipity Client Application menu In Archives select File menu Open Archive Navigate to and select the saved backup archive sdb file Click Open The archive will open in the Archives window and display all database items from the previously backed up configuration Once the archive has
234. ion of the Output is used for the nesting parameters Nest Now This is available when the selected job has a status of Waiting to Nest Only one job needs to be selected and all jobs with a Waiting to Nest status will be nested Duplex Now Duplexes any job that has a status of Waiting to Duplex Only one job needs to be selected and all jobs with a Waiting to Duplex status will be duplexed View FlipBook Opens the selected job or publication in FlipBook If the selected job is part of a publication all pages will be shown Select Publication Selects all the pages jobs in the QueueManager belonging to the same Publication as the selected job Refresh All Queues Updates the queues Export Allows you to export data from the selected job The available formats are Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 77 o CIP3 Exports job information to a file in CIP3 format at the selected resolution You can also select the orientation before exporting Further options are Version 2 1 Version 3 0 Rotations Surface Choose front or back Compress Preview Choose if the preview should be compressed Some presses are unable to handle files in compressed format o PDF Exports the selected job in PDF at the resolution entered Further options are Compressions JPEG ZIP or LZW For JPEG and ZIP you also have control on the level and quality of compression o Photoshop Exports the selected jo
235. ion with a name beginning with this text gt e Containing Text Any file or directory as specified in the action where a name contains this text gt e Named Any file or directory as specified in the action explicitly named this text gt e Add Add the action and definition specified to the list of files to collect e Apply Apply any changes to the currently selected action and definition in the list e Delete Delete the currently selected action and definition from the list e Filename Length Specify a minimum and maximum filename length when searching for any files for sorting Note The Add Apply and Delete buttons are only available if there is a change to an existing entry If actions are not added or applied to the list before a save the list is not updated Tabs 2 Filename Break Down Most job filenaming conventions contain common elements defining the job s name section page or publication and specific file markers or unique elements identifying things such as plate colour ff e em on This tab allows you to specify the construction of a filename This is done by psu ger breaking it down into parts and giving each part a user defined name Once all parts of the filename are identified they can be grouped together to make a complete job Options e Case Sensitive Matches Used to match case when the criteria for matching contains user specified input For example Part contains specific words Match to sep
236. is 0 7 wi or rendered SoftProof to make a note The note is attached to the job file and remains attached until it is either deleted or the job is removed from the system There is no limit to how many notes can be created and they can be shown or hidden as required 7 Notes cannot be attached to files opened in SoftProof via File Menu gt Open Files The file needs to be submitted as a job before any embedding of notes can take place S E When creating a note with the Note Editor a configurable arrowhead pointer option is available along with the existing area marker for a more precise commentary on the job The User and Group of the note creator are also displayed see Secure Mode Notes can be edited or the anchor adjusted by double clicking on the Note Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 111 The Note panel displays any notes attached to the job currently selected in the main viewing window There is also a Note column in the QueueManager showing the number of notes attached to a particular job The Notes icon on the left menu bar is used when adding Notes to the softproofed image The Notes icon in the right panel is used to display or hide any notes on the image e Show Notes Show or hide the notes on the preview Notes can also be toggled by clicking the icon on the right panel see image above e Text The text making up the note e User Group The User and Group responsible f
237. is equation is used An N Factor of 2 seems to work well with most media types As adjustments are made the curve preview on the graph will change showing the effects of the value entered Further information on the Yule Nielsen Number can be found below Maximum Densities Override Enter a value to limit the top end density for each of the process colours The default is 0 no override As adjustments are made the curve preview on the graph will change showing the effects of the value entered Further information on Maximum Densities Override can be found below Densitometer Spectrophotometer Curve Device Select the appropriate instrument from the pull down list of devices Note The Embedded Printer Spectro option is only available when in Lab measurement mode Use Lab enabled Instrument Standards Choose from the list which instrument standard is to be used for measurement This will only appear when Use Lab is not enabled Measure Connects to the selected instrument and prepares to read patches The patch window changes to a measuring window and the instrument list changes to a text field where instructions are displayed Print Chart Print the appropriate chart for the selected instrument to the Media selected You will be prompted with an options window with the following o Cancel Printing Cancels the action and returns to the previous window o Don t Apply Print to Linearise This will disable all colour management except f
238. is recommended Each page is submitted as a separate job and is able to be nested Multi page charts are grouped into publications in the QueueManager e Cancel Cancel the print swatch operation saving any settings entered e OK Send the swatch chart to the Submit Pagesetup Media popup window for printing based on the settings entered Note As all colour patches are processed as individual spot plates for large charts users can speed up imaging and rendering times by submitting charts as multiple pages jobs rather than a single large job Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 68 Screen Printing The Screen Printing functionality within the Media data type is designed for printing film separations on an Inkjet printer Files submitted for processing are separated into individual plates Each plate is printed as a black separation with a halftone dot applied at the colours respective screen angle Printing to film generally requires the output density to be higher than that for normal proofing Higher densities are achieved by increasing the print resolution or by assigning one or more inks to be laid over the black dots Configuration The configuration is very similar to a standard setup to print to a device The Output configuration is the same and the appropriate Media and Pagesetups are created to control the page parameters A very basic Paper Profile and Linearisation are also created to compl
239. ist e Progressive Used to make progressive proofs After adding the first plate to be used in the proof click the Progressive button one or more times to cumulatively add plates to the Plate Combinations list The progression will start with the first plate on the Plates list by default if a first plate is not selected e Deselect Deselects any plates currently selected in the Plates list e Remove Removes the selected Plate Combination from the list Remove All Clears the Plate Combination List Input Screening inpet Screaming Input Screening determines how the screening on the input data is handled neee Mine There are two 2 choices Preserve and Descreen O hasi Dat Techaso on RDT Smoceh e Preserve Preserves the dots from the incoming data so the same dots on the final job are shown on the proof Further choices are o Real Dot Technology Used to preserve the dot structure o Fast 2 Similar to RDT but a faster method o RDT Smooth 1 2 and 3 This is RDT with progressive levels of smoothing Note Fast 2 should be used where the dot structure is not very important It will preserve the dot but is a quick low quality method The sharpest dot structure will be achieved using RDT however you will sometimes get introduced moire caused by the head weaving of the printer the resolution and the screen ruling of the original file e Descreen Descreens the incoming data with either o D Dot Removes the dots or o
240. it An empty nesting set will appear in the Layout area ready for use To create a template using the Step and Repeat function AOA Step and Repeat 1 In Studio go to Frame menu gt Step and Repeat A popup window will appear see EE image Frame Height 5 0 in 2 Enter the dimensions for the frame s required for placement in the Layout area Hereaen arson E Vertical Repeat 1 3 Select how many are to appear both horizontally and vertically and specify any Spacing required between each frame As the horizontal and vertical values are increased frames will automatically appear in the Layout area Stop when the desired ot Gu level is reached and created 4 Select frames and adjust their properties as required 5 Save the template when done and rename it as desired Spacing 0 3537 in Note If the Step and Repeat function is used when there are multiple frames selected and they are of varying size all frames will be repeated in the Layout area The size dimensions for the frames in the Step and Repeat window will not be editable Using Studio Positioning Assets for Nesting A media guide sheet will appear to scale in light gray in the Layout area when dimensions have been entered into the Media panel fields This allows for clear and simple placement of assets for nesting When submitted to print everything on the media guide sheet is printed If only a width is entered once an asset is placed in the Layout area the me
241. it du Hbi nion 45 51 DropSDpOLaiusicnde pitt etuer 74 Setting the Colour uoi ri aite 74 Setting the number of copies 74 DrODZOEe totus mese irenka kaioa rues 74 Aud DrODSDOL inerat deiecti 74 Reordering DropSpots 74 E Edge Debe onse ocean p SD TUNE 49 Edit Media from QueueManager 78 Output from QueueManager 78 Output from QueueStatus 79 Pagesetup from DropZone 74 Pagesetup from QueueManager 78 Plate Colour in VirtualPress 82 RIP from QueueManager 78 RIP from RIPMonitor 81 Signature Group from QueueManager unde o M EA 78 BRC CUS ipsi tete ica m d aD RR C n 49 Entering a new polling path 62 Epson PIPE W INC orasini 42 Epson XI Q priini ani 42 Error Diffusion Screening 41 Export From ClientLog sss 73 From QueueManager 77 From ServerLog mes 81 From Special Colour Set 59 66 Export as 65 PACK susestousue uuo 25 Export as Movie coss qucitesicerodenenieti 96 F Fail on RGB Images soeasonit iic 48 Fast POIG nania eas 61 Fitting Methods tana 50 PIP BOOK ducenda eM RU al venta d Ned 95 Allow Multiple Windows 97 Borders around Pages 97 Navigation ecrire
242. ity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission This software is supplied as is without expressed or implied warranties of any kind This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 152 Code in sys linux is developed by Alan Cox You may redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version Research Systems Unix Group The University of Michigan C O Wesley Craig 535 W William Street Ann Arbor Michigan 1 313 764 2278 netatalk umich edu GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some othe
243. ject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 157 16 Bit Processing Absolute Colourimetric Rendering Intent Accounts Admin Accuracy Correction Always Use ICC Antialiased Subsampling Application Menu siisdunlecahedinepiesnusciens De nsitometer iseis agradans Add to Database Adding items to Automatic Backup Archiving Current Installations Back Page DotGain Curve Back Page Opacity Backing up the Database Saving the Database Black Point Compensation Product Overview Border around a Job Index Device Pane lsin 86 Measurements Panel 85 Menu Options es 86 Print al Cli ueneno teet 986 Print Report riiin 86 Summary Panelaren 85 Caleheck Cabos o ed dob T RO Dd 29 Add Colours From Library 29 Generate Patches from I
244. kbench Client application used to configure the Server YN Yule Nielsen Number Yule Nielsen Number A fudge factor used when calculating 96 tint dot area from density readings Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 150 Copyright Notices PNG Library Copyright Copyright 1995 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat Group 42 Inc Contributing Authors Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The contributing authors would like to thank all those who helped with testing bug fixes and patience You know who you are This wouldn t have been possible without all of you Thanks to Frank J T Wojcik for reviewing the documentation The PNG Reference Library is supplied as is The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc disclaim all warranties expressed or implied including without limitation the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc assume no liability for damages direct or consequential which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this source code or portions hereof for any purpose without fee subject to the following restrictions 1 Theorigin of this source code must not be misrepresented 2 Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source 3 This Copyrig
245. king the icon or remove any via the icon Notifications are available for Job Spooling failure Job Autodetection failure Job Imaging Rendering failure Job Printing failure Dongle removal Server Crash Media Remaining warnings and Software Updates available To create a User 1 Click the icon in the bottom left of the window To delete a user click the icon Enter a username in the Name field Enter a User ID number or leave the default value Create a password for the user and verify the details The password boxes will always display black dots irrespective of the length of your password Edit the permission level to the required access level Enter the user s email address if notifications are required Add a comment against the user if necessary Assign a Group for the user Add any extra privileges to the user if required This will only show privileges not included in the group selected for the user 10 Add any notifications to the user if required 11 Apply the changes or select Revert to cancel ee ee tS Groups Panel An admin User and Group are created by default with access to all permissions and privileges when the Accounts Admin option is selected for the first time The admin user and group cannot be deleted It is recommended this be the only group with access to the Accounts Admin application oe I Use Sentret Ase Seectnd rmtege To Covert ne The fields within the Groups panel are joo ME zada e Nam
246. l e Sift This is a legacy option available to older paper profiles create in previous versions of Blackmagic Sift uses one of several intelligent algorithms to select a suitable dot combination based on the density readings taken and the output device selected When used the popup DotSieve Algorithm Selector presents the available device ink Sift options The Sift selected patches can be switched off or changed if alternate patches are more appropriate e Maximum Ink This field sets an ink coverage limit for the ink channel by introducing white space into areas of coverage higher than the set limit The default setting is 100 i e no limiting Maximum Ink is a low level setting applied during screening e Sort Order This is a legacy option available to older paper profiles created in previous versions of Blackmagic o Patch Number Sort the patches in patch numbered order o Colour Density This is the density of the colour sometimes called Real Density It is the colour content of the patch o Visual Density This describes how dark the colour is i e how much light the colour is absorbing measured as Black This sort option is not available for Black where colour and visual density are the same Note Turning off an Ink Channel When Treat Light Inks as Separate Channels or N Colour options are enabled the user has the option to turn off one or more of the printer ink channels Some inks often Cyan and Magenta pr
247. l colour using printed swatch charts with variations of the colour e Present Colour Opens a resizable pop up window displaying the selected colour along with its set and colour names This option is useful for visually matching softproof special colours on screen e Print Swatch Print user configurable colour swatch charts of Special Colour Sets See below section for futher information Colour List Panel This panel has a Search box at the top right for locating colours in the set list The list has a series of sort columns detailing properties of each special colour The order of the columns can be changed by dragging them to the desired location and the headers are configurable via a context right click menu The available columns are Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 66 Colour Gives a visual representation of the colour Name The colour plate name used to match the colours Click on the colour name to change it Space The colourspace of the plate Values Shows the colourspace values of the colour Mode The Paint Mode of the colour Overprint Knockout Primer Opaque or Transparent Tint The tint or intensity of the colour DotGain Curve The name of the DotGain Curve applied to the plate if any Weight g m The press Ink Weight of the colour in g m if assigned Double clicking on an empty area of the list panel will open an Add Colours To Library window
248. l view Clear the search box to view all jobs Property Panel The Property panel displays information on defined elements used in the Layout area Configurable measurements can be entered using any supported unit for e g 60cm 32in and will be automatically converted to the chosen default measurement unit as defined in the Client Settings The panel has three 3 sections Document Media and Frame Each section can be shown or hidden by clicking the appropriate box icon see image right e Document Used to activate Tiling Mode and define the total area to be tiled e Media Set the media size for the printable area used when nesting or tiling Set sizes are available from a dropdown menu or custom dimensions may be entered in the width and height fields e Frame Edit parameters for the currently selected frame including fields for size orientation and scaling Document The Document section of the Property panel is used when tiling an image or nest of images that are larger than the available print media t n When activated a red box will appear in the Layout area defining the total area being used for tiling A media length height must be defined when using tiling mode If using roll sheet media the length of paper to be used for each tile can be entered into the Length field in the output settings of the Media itself see Workbench Data Types Alternatively the tile length can be entered using
249. late names if expanded Size The size of the job disk space used Date The data and time the newest plate belonging to the job was RIPped Path The directory path to the RIPped file for an assigned job plate This information is visible when the polled job is expanded Publication The publication to which the job file belongs as defined by the Job Genie Section The section to which the job file belongs as defined by the Job Genie Page The page number of the job as defined by the Job Genie Edition The edition to which the job file belongs as defined by the Job Genie ServerLog The ServerLog shows messages from the Server Fetch back log Displays the log for the time specified e g it retrieves and displays the last 4 hours of messages Choose the time period from the dropdown list Trim older lines Trims the log based on the time selected in Fetch back log If this is set to 60 minutes the log file is trimmed back so only the last 60 minutes remain Export Allows you to export the log to a file Selecting this displays a window with further options as detailed below o Destination File Choose the filename and location where the file is to be saved Use the m Browse button to navigate to your preferred I Mu pucr p location o Message Lines Choose to save all messages in the log window or only those that are highlighted This way you can save just a few lines if desired o Format Choose the format t
250. lcheck Chart e Name The name of the colour patch e Colour ref A colour swatch of the reference colour in the Calcheck Chart e Colour meas A colour swatch of the measured colour e Lab ref The reference Lab values of the colour patch in the Calcheck Chart e Lab meas The measured Lab values of the colour patch e Ae max The maximum Ae CIE76 CIE94 CIE2000 CMC 1 1 CMC 2 1 tolerance value for the patch as defined in the Calcheck Chart e Ae The measured Ae CIE76 of the colour patch e CIE94 The measured Ae CIE94 of the colour patch Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 85 CIE2000 The measured Ae CIE2000 of the colour patch CMC 1 1 The measured Ae CMC 1 1 of the colour patch CMC 2 1 The measured Ae CMC 2 1 of the colour patch AH max The maximum AH tolerance value for the patch as defined in the Calcheck Chart AH The measured AH of the colour patch AC max The maximum AC tolerance value for the patch as defined in the Calcheck Chart AC The measured AC of the colour patch Device Spectrophotometer Panel This panel allows you to choose which measuring instrument is to be used Spectrophotometer Select the Spectrophotometer to be used for measurement from a list of supported instruments Measure Initialises the chosen instrument and opens a popup window to select which Calcheck Chart is to be measured Measurement begins after the
251. lder where files can be dropped in for processing Valid File Types include Postscript PDF JPEG TIFF Image Serendipity Blackmagic Image EPS PNG PSD e Location Select a folder as a DropFolder The folder must exist and have read write permissions e Default Publish __ Publish DropFolder Reset the DropFolder location to the default one Locat Default Serendipity Blackmagic installation directory drop lt Pagesetup Name Printer e Printers Choose to publish the Pagesetup as a network print destination allowing third party applications to print directly to it O O Mac Windows TCP Port Activate port number Flow Control Hold After Imaging Hold After Rendering Mac Enable to publish the Pagesetup as a Bonjour Zeroconf network destination for Mac OS X and Linux This option also publishes the Pagesetup as an AppleTalk destination where the Pagesetup name is used as the printer name Note When adding a new printer through System Preferences on Mac OS X select the Bonjour address pagesetup name computer name as the printer and Serendipity Megarip PPD as the driver Windows Choose to publish the Pagesetup as a Windows local printer port destination See the Serendipity Software website for details on how to create the Windows printer e TCP Port Choose to publish the Pagesetup to a TCP Port allowing it to be setup as an IP printer destination or as a destination for other Serendipit
252. le in Serendipity Client Preferences Colour Management see System Settings for more information Save Profile Opens a file chooser as above to save or rename the ICC profile Information Panel Appears while the ICC profile is being generated showing the progress and final results of the calibration process O O O O Calcheck The Calcheck function displays Calcheck status summaries for all attached monitors as compared to the values defined in the Calcheck Chart assigned to the SoftProof Default Press and Camera setting Clicking on the Calcheck header allows users to quickly view whether a display is currently calibrated for softproofing a particular press profile See Applications gt SoftProof Workbench gt Press for details Note If a Calcheck summary is blank this means No Calcheck data exists for the monitor That the current Calcheck for the monitor was measured against a different Calcheck Chart than the one assigned to the SoftProof Default Press or No Calcheck Chart has been assigned to the default Press e Cote veh pu rui LEN SoftProof z Default Press Press E Auto SoftProof Press Calcheck Chart SOcoated v2_eciF39 The top section of the display area shows SoftProof The currently selected Default Press or Default Camera configuration Calcheck Chart The Calcheck Chart assigned to the above configuration Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014
253. llbar and set the default side it appears on Right or Left Thumbnails Enable or disable viewing thumbnails for Publications Jobs or All selection lists View Enable or disable View Imaged default View Rendered and or View Flipbook options for opening jobs or publications for softproofing Note If only one of the View Images or View Rendered is selected the 22 8 Button Size 1 0 in Virtual Keyboard German el Cancel C OK Touch Console button will simply be labelled View If all options are disabled View Imaged will be selected as the default option Button Size Set the size of the Touch Console buttons in mm inches Note The Touch Console application must be closed and restarted for TouchConsole Entry Screen On Load Main Navigate Option 4 Navigate Pages Duplicate Page Viewing Manual Select Publication Load Page First Available Page iM Show Sections settings to take effect Virtual Keyboard Select an input language keyboard layout for the Touch Console search keyboard SoftProof Entry Screen on Load Select the control screen the Touch Console will default to when loading a new job page o Main The console defaults to the Main screen on load o Navigate The console defaults to the Navigate screen on load o Pages The console defaults to the Show Pages screen on load Navigate Option Navigate Pages checkbox Show hide the Previous Next Page buttons in the Touch
254. lly associated with the SoftProof application Selecting View Flipbook will load the job into the standard Flipbook application with relevant actions and modes on the Touch Console Modes available include e Main The default main screen displayed when a job is first loaded This is a control screen for macro manipulation of jobs Includes functions such as image inversion and rotation back page show through image size On screen and so on e Navigate A control screen for closer examination of proofs features controls for the viewed image size fit width height original 100 printed size and zoom controls e Loupe Opens the Virtual Loupe on the main screen with controls for the Touch Console e Press Config Opens a list of available Press configurations to apply to the SoftProof This will switch to Camera Config when an RGB image is opened e Show Pages Opens a modified Page Navigator for instant page to page viewing e Show Tabs Displays a list of job currently loaded in SoftProof Tabs e Calibrate Opens a control screen with Calibration and Calcheck options for the main SoftProof display e Close Closes the current job publication or tab Main A job can be manipulated in various ways once loaded just as with the conventional controls for the SoftProof application Some actions will only apply if certain types of jobs are viewed The actions are colour coded to help group them into like actions Buttons can be s
255. lour Set to a file If the set contains a mix of CMYK and Lab colours you will be asked whether to export CMYK or Lab e Preview Set Opens a popup window listing all the Replace Colours in the set with colour properties and replacement method e N Colour Profile Assign a multi colour ICC profile to the Replace Colour Set Note If an N Colour multicolour ICC profile is assigned to the set users will have the option to adjust colours in an Lab or N Colour colourspace as defined by the ICC profile e g Lab or CMYKOG Colours for each Replace Colour Set can only be defined in Lab and or a single other colourspace If no N Colour profile is assigned colours are adjusted using either Lab or CMYK values All the Toolbar options can be accessed via the contextual right click menu available in the colour list panel Replacement Method Tabs There are five 5 tabbed panels where colours are created or imported when making a Replace Set Each tab performs a specific replacement function Tab 1 Process Specify any of the Process CMYK colours to be replaced Each of the process colours listed in the panel has e A swatchbox showing the replacement for the process colour left Double click this box to import a replacement colour e An editable naming field for the process colour and e A Reset button for the colour of the process plate lower right and a Cancel button to switch off replacement for that process colour upper right Pr
256. ly choose individual items to import from the list and select Edit Add to Database Selected Nodes The database items will be imported and appear in the Workbench for use For further information on Archives and backing up databases see the Archives section of this manual Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 12 Mac OS X Upgrading to Version 5 4 Archiving Current Installations To Archive a Database 1 Li Alternatively select Edit menu gt Add to Archive all and Run the existing Blackmagic Server and Serendipity Client MEE ee To a Mem nan Go to the Serendipity Client Application menu gt Archives Eoo per E This application is called Archiver in earlier versions I MEM ee Select File menu Perform Full Backup add all database items to the archive file or right click in i Bm i ES the Archives window and select Add to Archive all gt 55S mm IH Everything from the contextual menu o qa Once all database items have appeared in the Archives 5 A emt window select File menu gt Save Archive to save the sdb a archive file to a chosen location Close the Archives application when finished Installing the Dongle Driver The first step is to install the dongle driver To install oo ee Remove all SuperPro USB dongles On the DVD navigate to the dongle macosx folder Double click the Sentinel System Driver pkg file to launch the
257. m the SoftProof application any special spot colours included in the currently loaded job are measured and added as extra patches to the end of the Calcheck Chart e Pan H Navigate around the image by clicking and dragging the job around the screen e Zoom Z Zoom in or out of the job Clicking the mouse zooms twice the current percentage factor SHIFT Click will zoom out half the percentage factor Click and drag over an area to zoom it e Note N Create manage and delete notes e Measure I Take a measurement on the image Use the shift key to draw straight lines e Crop C Crop an image and resubmit it e Guide G Display guide lines on the image to check for alignment Change the orientation by pressing SHIFT ESC will remove the guides e Spectro X Take measurements of the job being viewed A popup window will appear displaying the Lab Lch XYZ Density values at the point the Spectro cursor is onscreen Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On only Additionally the Spectro Tool gives the user the option to choose an instrument which can be used to measure a hard proof The measurement taken is compared to the softproof and the deltaE displayed onscreen SoftProof Widgets There are four 4 sliding widgets available from the left panel of icons in the SoftProof viewing window These include e Channels Shift C e Publications Shift P e Ink Keys Shift I e Get Info CTRL I CMD I Channels Wid
258. mber of jobs Blackmagic will keep that number of most recent printed jobs in the Output queue automatically deleting any excess jobs Note If this option is enabled and the number of jobs is set to 0 jobs will be deleted from the queue immediately after printing o Job History Keep Jobs Newer Than When enabled Blackmagic looks at the time signature of printed jobs and deletes any jobs in the queue older than the specified days hours min time e AutoPause Select a time duration the queue should pause after processing a job Used for double sided plotters so there is a pause in sending the next job giving the plotter time to turn a sheet ready for the back side to be printed or time to load another sheet Note The Change Media option is used as both a safeguard against paper wastage and a workflow control method If a Media type is assigned to the Output only jobs submitted to the Output using the same Media will be printed All other jobs are held in the QueueManager until the Media they were submitted to is assigned to the Output If no Media is assigned all jobs sent to the Output are printed Destination The Destination determines the method of delivery of the output job to the final destination Depending on the destination driver selected there may be some additional options available Destination Drivers e Bonjour Zeroconf Select this to output to a Bonjour Zeroconf network destination The local network is polled for Bo
259. n enabled the following options become available o All Uses black ink only in all areas defined as Black o Text Uses black ink only in elements defined as Black text This can improve the clarity and sharpness of the text Note This option is not always suitable for use with printers using light black inks as many of these inks tend to have a non black hue e RGB ICC Profile Select an RGB Input profile This is used to convert data input from an RGB source to Lab for colour management e Press ICC Profile Select a Press profile This is a Match profile and is used to convert input data from CMYK to Lab This can be a multicolour profile or CMYK If a multicolour profile is selected an additional option will become available Press Inks o Press Inks This setting is used to define a press ink set for a multicolour press ICC profile if the selected profile does not contain process ink names Selecting this option displays a Special Colour Set chooser to select a pre defined press ink set or to create a new set Important Note For multicolour profiles to work you must create the same colour names used in the ICC and have them in the same order The order for the ICC is specified during ICC creation This is independent of the actual press order Change the order by dragging the colours around the set The order is specified as the Colour left column order descending e Upload ICC This is available on all of the ICC choosers
260. n list of available Servers is accessible via the Auto Detect tab If a new Server appears after this time the Refresh button must be pressed to find and add it to the list Likewise if a Server becomes unavailable the connection will fail and the list will require a refresh When the Serendipity Client is started it will attempt to connect to the last Blackmagic Server accessed by default Accounts Admin Accounts Admin allows an authorised administrator to create modify and manage User accounts and User Groups Users can be reassigned to groups dependent upon the operating privileges granted to each User Group See the Accounts Admin Secure Mode section below for further information Log Out Secure Mode only This menu item only appears while Blackmagic is in Secure Mode see Accounts Admin Secure mode for more information Selecting Log Out while using Blackmagic in Secure Mode simultaneously logs out the current user and generates the Login window At this point the options available are to enter a username and password Choose Server before login and to Quit the Blackmagic Client While the Login window is displayed the Blackmagic Client is effectively LOCKED to all users The Server will continue to operate as normal Chatterbox Chat to other users connected to the same Server The Chatterbox window will display the Clients connected to the Server If the user has entered a nickname in the System Settings this name is displayed o
261. n several editions with some or all Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 36 pages specifically printed for different locales or updated across the day This part allows editions ofa publication to be defined and grouped separately for Softproofing o IN OUT optionally re map edition abbreviations to full names e g CE IN becomes City Edition OUT Note Using Publication and Section Parts with Bookfilter In the case of a Job Genie being created for polling planning files using Bookfilter the Publication Section and Edition parts can be used to re map their respective filename parts to more coherent or user friendly names for display in the BookMonitor Section Page Offset is not utilised in this instance it is simply for renaming Edition parts defined for incoming RIP jobs can be matched to editions in particular planning file formats such as IFRA Track polled using the Bookfilter These are used if the planning file publication Book pages require a fallback to a master edition when an edition specific page has not been produced on press and so is not present in the QueueManager Tabs 5 Display The Display tab allows you to configure how the Jobnames are displayed in the RIPMonitor Click the Parts tiles to add the filename parts to the Jobname Publication Name and optional Section Name strings Parts can be entered in any order Any other text to be shown in the RIPMonitor can be entered as
262. nd lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what is does gt Copyright 19yy lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright 19yy name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items what
263. ndows C Program Files Serendipity Blackmagic lib icc For versions 3 5 09 and below C Serendipity Serendipity Blackmagic lib icc For versions 4 0 and above Linux Sun SGI bmagic lib ICC To restore the database and ICC profiles to an upgraded Blackmagic 1 First ensure the Blackmagic Server and Serendipity Client are shutdown 2 Copy and replace the backed up defaultss dbd and ICC folders into the relevant locations see above for your install 3 Start the Server and Client All previous database items should now appear in the Workbench Important Note Pagesetups imported from Version 3 archives will be automatically split into Media and Pagesetup data types but remain functionally linked Version 5 4 archives cannot be opened or imported into previous versions of Blackmagic Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 15 Running the Software Once the software has been installed launch the Server and Client to begin the configuration The Server should be started first and allowed to complete its initialisation process before the Client is launched If the Client is started first it will attempt to connect to an active Server If none are present a Connect to Server window will open waiting for an active Server to appear on the network Important Note for Mac OS X Users The Blackmagic Server and Serendipity Client for Mac OS X are able to run in either 32 bit or 64 bit modes Running both in
264. ng the Client remotely connected via the internet should set a longer polling interval of 10 20sec e Output Unknown Files to Printer Output any unknown files direct to a printer If this is unchecked any unknown files will result in errors and will not be output e Log Printed Jobs When enabled this option will log completed print jobs in the Server log The jobname and dimensions are noted e Web server Enabled by default Disable to remove access to the built in webserver A Server restart is required for any changes to take effect e Secure Mode Enable or disable Secure Mode e Mail Server Enter the details of the mail server for error notification emails when using Secure Mode e Sender Email Address Enter the details of the Sender From address for error notification emails A f Server Settings General Colour Management Working Paths Colour Management D EE UII SE BAN ACOMON Eae I e ICC Engine Accuracy Select Faster or Better depending on input RGB Profile moeitors AdobeRCB 998 icc preferences _ gt Input CMYK Profile LM fogra altona testrulte ISOcoated v2 eciF 39 icc e Default ICC Profiles Select the default ICC profiles used when Zonen RES OR fontior ja CI v JOC preferences i Output CMYK Profile fogra altona testsuite ISOcoated v2 eciF 39 icc first creating a new Pagesetup Input profiles and Media 1 Version 3 4 pot colour handlin Outp ut profiles Apply ICC ere to CMYK REOS e Ver
265. ng the Server and your jobs There are fifteen 15 Applications available including the Workbench and Monitor All are accessible via the Applications menu in the Client Some such as Calcheck can be launched via other Applications or Modules The available Applications are listed here with further details on each following Archives Make partial or complete backups of your Workbench configurations Calcheck Verify the calibration status of a printer Clustering Allocate and manage Imaging and Rendering tasks across multiple computers and networks Densitometer Measure and display density readings taken with a Densitometer or Spectrophotometer Displays Create ICC profiles for system monitors for accurate onscreen colour softproofing FlipBook Display a publication as a 2D or 3D virtual book Jobs Display jobs before after and during processing and allows users to manage jobs through the system to plot their progress with a pre configured user interface Lineariser Create a Linearisation curve for use with a Pagesetup or Media Monitor Display and manage jobs as they pass through Blackmagic see the Monitor section for more information Press Agent Interface with press console controls to load reload softproofs SoftProof Proof jobs onscreen Spectro Display compare and or save colours measured using a Spectrophotometer Studio Designed for the manual nesting or tiling of jobs Touch Console Use a touch
266. ngs currently used in e home mandy Library ColorSync Profiles iMac 070911 icc SoftProof and the current Calcheck Status of the monitor Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 105 Click on the Tick Cross to popup a menu with the following options e Calibrate Begin calibration of the monitor using the current settings and Spectrophotometer assigned in the Displays application Once calibrated the monitor ICC profile is automatically saved as the operating system default replacing the mem previous ICC profile Calcheck monitor MediaWedgeV3 ISOcoated_V2_eci Fogra39 Note When calibrating or calchecking the Spectrophotometer assigned in the Displays application for either tasks should be connected and ready for use If the instrument is different to the assigned one an error will occur ceasing the operation It is recommended to check the appropriate Spectrophotometer has been assigned before using the Calibrate or Calcheck Monitor functions see Applications Displays e Calcheck Monitor Chart Name This option will open the Displays application and begin a Calcheck of the softproofing monitor using the Calcheck Chart assigned to the current Press settings The chart is named in brackets The pass fail status may change as a result of the check Detailed results can be viewed in the History area of the Displays application Note on Spot Colours When performing a monitor calcheck fro
267. njour Zeroconf devices Choose Edit and select the appropriate destination from the dropdown list e Commandy Script Select a script or command to be run once a job has completed e Epson FireWire Only available on the Mac OSX version Windows users should use the Local Print Queue option and print to an installed printer configured to use FireWire e Epson XIO Print to an Epson connected via FireWire using Epson XIO interface on the Mac OSX This requires the Epson driver to be installed on the Mac first Use XIO if the FireWire driver does not work e FTP Senda completed job to remote machine using FTP e Local Device If a printer is connected as a serial or parallel printer send a file directly to the device with this option e Local Folder Choose a local folder to send the output file to Enter the path or select Choose to browse and select a folder The folder must exist and have write permissions e Local Print Queue Print to a local print queue Use this to print to a Windows printer on another machine In the path location enter machine printer where machine is the name of the Windows machine with the printer attached and printer is the exact name of the printer The printer must be shared e LPRPort Use LPR to print jobs to printers accepting it Enter the Hostname IP address of the printer and the path Not all devices require a path to be entered This is a good option for Epson printers with a network card This
268. ns Once reached nesting will begin and any job waiting to nest will be nested into a single job The start time is determined by the first job that appears waiting to nest Minimum Paper Coverage Specify the minimum paper coverage to be reached by jobs waiting to nest before nesting will begin Once reached any waiting jobs will be nested into a single job Maximum Jobs Specify the maximum number of jobs in a nest If there are more jobs in the queue than the number specified that number of jobs will nest and the remaining jobs will stay waiting to nest until the criteria is met again Media Width Specify the media width This is required for nesting to work Gap Between Jobs Enter the size of the gap between jobs in the nest Minimum Total Height Specify the minimum total height of a nest i e if the combined height of the jobs waiting to nest reaches this value nesting will begin Maximum Total Height Specify the maximum total height of a nest i e if the combined height of the jobs waiting to nest reaches this value nesting will begin Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 43 Note If a Maximum Height is set the Nesting algorithm will look at all the jobs waiting to nest and fit the most jobs between the minimum and maximum heights If the available jobs can not cover the defined Paper Coverage if set of paper without exceeding the maximum height jobs will not nest If no Paper Cove
269. ns The following options are available from a contextual right click menu within the Cluster Node panel Add Node Add a Cluster Node that cannot be seen Sometimes Nodes on subnets cannot be detected Selecting this allows you to enter the hostname or IP address of the Node and add it to the list manually The Node to be added must be running Add Processing Pool Select change or remove the current Pagesetup Pool for which the Node performs Image and Render tasks Remove All Offline Slaves Nodes Remove a Node from the list that has gone offline Remove Node Available for offline Nodes only This option removes the selected Node from the list Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 88 Densitometer The Densitometer application allows you to measure and display density readings with a supported Spectrophotometer When measuring a patch the densities of all four process CMYK colours making up the patch are read The Last Measured panel in the top half of the application window shows the density and dot percentage values for the dominant process colour of the measured patch with the values of the other three colours to the right The values can be recorded and saved to a file if desired Note The Densitometer application is a utility allowing you to use a Densitometer or Spectrophotometer that does not have a display to read values This can be as a one off reading to compare densities or you may
270. nverted Useful for printing to film using a white ink printer Watermark Available via the Pagesetup Allows for the placement of a watermark across the job This effect is not available when using the C5 Client ColourKeys and Screenprinting mode are also available when using Studio accessible via the Pagesetup used for processing the job files Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 123 Touch Console The Touch Console application offers enhanced control and usability of the SoftProof application through the use of a touch screen Ideal for press room environments the separate touch screen acts as the console controlling jobs that are loaded and softproofed on the main screen Individual jobs or entire publications can be quickly located for proofing A Touch Console Settings menu saves valuable time enabling the operator to choose default navigation options the queues the Touch Console will search for jobs and whether the console switches automatically to the Main control screen the SoftProof view navigator or the page navigator for publications once a job or jobs have loaded A Mode Bar allows instant switching between control interfaces from the main Image and Navigation control through to Ink Keys and Channels the Virtual Loupe Press Configurations Page Navigation Notes and Tabbed Views When the Touch Console is launched a blank screen will appear on both monitors the touch screen
271. o Desain dd ion ea oda n Year E D vct hA D Ren aliens 19 The Serendipity Blackmagic Server oet nec acras court ce ee R abe T saa cubi ae eri Coe xo Ene E raa cr NE as SLOT TUNE eL Rn UE aaa SCR RISE AAAA EEEN 21 Server OO INS seru naear rns Arcata eet ep A a iL eu DE d neal epe M D M 21 The S erendipity Up ater me 22 The Blackmagic Dongle UpdaleT caiie eaaa aaa Aaa Ea A 23 Ypdatine ME OTN IG RUM EE OD t 23 The Serendipity Chonl sre a a eerie 24 Lookand ee Prea M 24 WOVEDGUCH ERTE ETEN NIAE tauro o uM D E CE Liu e DADA I eI LEE IUIS 24 Menko pU ONS MT M 25 Workbench Data Dy DOS unione d iiti E ED ep iiti eni Iiis io rios dic M P D EHE 27 BOOK TO ee DT D 28 AUG IG CNN NT c 29 ric M M 31 DDotGaln OUV Oae coser mte rtrd mre Acro ED rd ove o D DM T LCD PARLATO TELE IL ICM M eee 31 Gradation CUIV e E 31 TG TS dm P T C 32 JOD DEO ut etri OREHE TE sy rH MEUS fosudatestan A ed EN E ines IR LU eU IUD A FOR DU Fe tede E Seda Kira AERE E mU 33 uc
272. o increases the file size This is also true for the keyframes The more keyframes the better the quality but the larger the file size Trial and error will provide you with the desired result e Render Queue Thumbnails View the Rendered thumbnails in rather than the default Imaged thumbnails Page Index Panel The Page Index displays a numbered box for each page making up the loaded Publication It allows for direct navigation to any page by clicking on it The page boxes are colour coded Eg green when selected Purple indicates there are duplicate pages ie they have the same publication name and page numbers Dark purple indicates the pages are selected vy 47 Light Green indicates the pages are loaded into the FlipBook and can be viewed These show as dark Clicking on these pages allows you to select and view the alternative page rm r nu I l m a an d m L 19532 GOLF TEXT job IMPOSITION Page 7 19532 GOLF TEXT job Page 007 IMPOSITION 07 iy 6 E 22 4 38 3 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 96 Light Red indicates the page is not in the FlipBook This occurs when there are other pages greater than the numbers displayed This could be due to the imposition signature not yet being rendered As they render you can simply reload the publication to update the pages The status colours are updated whenever Reload Publication is selected A bar
273. o save the file in either html or plain text The plain text file is saved with tab characters between the columns o Cancel Revert to the Server window without saving any changes o Save Save the file based on the settings selected Configure Filter You can filter messages in the log Choose between the following options o Completed Jobs Shows messages about completed jobs o Polled Jobs Shows messages about polled jobs o Errors Shows errors from the Server Search You can search the log for messages Enter the text of characters you want to search for and the ServerLog will only display the lines matching the search Display Options Module The Server function that generated the message Routine The operation within the Server function Date The time the Server called the module Message The message resulting from the routine Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 81 Status Status shows the current disk status usage of the Server processing areas such as spooling temporary directories and DropFolders Editing the ss conf file in the installation directory under the etc folder can change disk locations The available options are Spool I Update Checks the disks and updates the view Print E Preferences Sets the Status window preferences A further option available is OSTemp I o Update Interval Sets the time between updates Colour Scheme Chan
274. obs through the system to plot their progress The Monitor provides feedback from the Server and Client via logs Modules canbe lt LEEA e RRELA added and configured to suit specific requirements See the Modules gt ll i a EcL section for further information E Pi rd ERE E cia ui ot 3 ccs The Monitor consists of one or more user defined tabs Modules are added positioned and sized according to individual preferences Settings are saved at the Client level enabling Serendipity Clients on 5 F different systems or in different departments to display information 4 appropriate to their location CDS uH us SE IG The Monitor can be in one of two modes Edit or Use seen Weld 1l or Edit This mode allows the user to move and resize modules on a tab The mouse pointer changes to a cross when in Edit mode Resize a module by grabbing the corners or sides and dragging to the preferred size Click anywhere in the modules and drag it to the desired position Modules close together will snap to each other While in Edit mode all Modules have a contextual menu available right click with the following options e Remove Module Removes the module from the Monitor tab e Set Size For Module Allow the user to enter a width and height in pixels for the selected module via a resize popup Duplicate Module Duplicates the selected module The duplicate has all the size layo
275. ocess colour replacement is set to Off for all 4 colours by default Tab 2 Exact When using the Exact replacement method only incoming colours precisely matching the Match Plate name will be replaced with the new colour Matching is not case sensitive Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 59 Tab 3 Partial When using the Partial replacement method any incoming colours are replaced with the new colour if any part of the name matches the Match Plate name Matching is not case sensitive Tab 4 Position The Position method replaces any incoming Special colour in a particular plate position with the new colour The Exact Partial and Position panels have a Search box at the top right used for locating colours in the replacement list The list itself has a series of sort columns detailing properties of each replacement colour Colours can be selected and dragged to another position within the list This is useful in Position replacement where the plate position is important The order of the columns can be changed by dragging them to the desired location and the headers are configurable via a context menu The available columns are e Match Plate Shows the replacement colour swatch The Exact or Partial name in this field is the one to be matched to the incoming colour being replaced In the case of Position replacement the name shows the plate position Click on the name to change it e Values S
276. ode has the quickest load time as no resampling for scaling is required e Fit Width Height Fit the job to the width or height of the SoftProof window Navigate In Navigate mode it is possible to pan around the image and change the zoom or fitting method A thumbnail of the image is loaded into the centre action area of the console Touch the thumbnail to jump to that location on the image in the SoftProof or touch drag around the thumbnail to pan around the proof ES E On either side of the thumbnail are Touch Console buttons controlling the scaling of the softproof on the main display including Full screen 100 Optional Previous Page Next Page buttons are also available if selected in a B Touch Console Settings Navigate option E A mn Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 126 actual pixels Fit Width Fit Height Zoom Out Zoom In Show All Print Size Loupe The Loupe mode positions a loupe on the SoftProof window The Touch Console action pane acts like a drawing tablet Touch and drag your finger on the touch screen to move the loupe over your image Buttons around the edges of the console control the Loupe s features Smaller Bigger Decrease or increase the size of the loupe Zoom In Out Increase or decrease the magnification of the loupe For Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On users only Solo Previous Next Channel These controls allow in
277. oduce patches with a high colour un prd density while not being very dense visually During the process of calibrating 9 cv L 94 94 xao 3s a printer if you find that even the small dot patch 2 of an ink has a colour Gander gt C IX density too high to enable that colour to pass a particular calibration L 95 15 S10s 40 89 standard you can turn off that ink channel by de selecting all the Density patches for that ink This should only be done where multiple inks of a particular colour are available For example if patch 2 of the Cyan is still colour dense you can switch Cyan off and use only Light Cyan Switching off an ink channel will have effects through the calibration process in particular when configuring Ink Limits When configuring the ink limit chart the number of available inks will need to be reduced and the disabled ink channel should not be used in any of the combinations on the Ink Limit Chart Paper Profile Graph The graph shows the dots selected for each colour The position on the graph gives a mno Paper Profie Graph proportional representation showing where the dot starts to turn on or off and their n relative proximity to other dots Turn the individual colour graph plots on or off by checking the tick boxes under the graph Hovering the mouse over a point on the graph AA displays a tool tip giving information about the dot mo n ssd If a colour is not shown on the graph but the check box is
278. oined no gaps If there is a gap the manual pair option must be used After pairing use the Close Page Number Gaps option if needed See below for further information Pair Pages Horizontally Pairs pages in the horizontal direction Pair Pages Vertically Pairs pages in the vertical direction Rotate Selected Signatures Rotates the selected signatures by the amount chosen The options are o 90 Degrees Clockwise o 90 Degrees Counter Clockwise o 180 Degrees Rename Signatures Selecting this displays a rename box to search for and replace names Options are o Find Enter the characters to find in the list o Replace With Enter the text to insert in place of the characters found Use any valid characters including spaces If nothing is entered the characters found are deleted if one of the rename options is selected Ignore Case Choose whether the match is case sensitive Wrap Around Continue from the top of the list when the bottom is reached Rename All Rename all items that are found Rename Selected Rename the selected signatures if the characters are found Rename Current Rename the currently selected signature if the characters are found If more than one signature is selected the first one in the list is checked for a match and renamed if true o Find Previous Searches backwards o Find Next Searches forwards o Prefix With Append Two options to add characters before or after the names Import Signatu
279. olour to fill the frame thickness as defined Double click the colour display box to select a colour from a Special Colour Set Blackmagic Only or create a colour using the Lab CMYK or RGB sliders Note If the colour selected does not match the colourspace of the image a preview will not be available for viewing using the SoftProof application o Pick from screen button Activates an eye dropper tool to select a screen image colour to apply to a Colour wrap style Hover the pointer to see RGB values and a colour swatch of the current colour Left click to select This option is only available when using RGB as the selected colourspace e Save Saves the canvas wrap configuration but does not change the size of the asset image to fit the dimensions specified if they have been altered e Fit amp Save This option will fit the asset image to the configured canvas wrap settings and save the layout returning to the Studio screen Cropmarks are enabled by default when Canvas Wrap mode is in use This is to assist in cutting the canvas Two 2 types of cropmarks are available for selection configured via the Studio Settings Standard or Paper Saving Cropmarks Note Cropmarks standard will take up extra space around a job when selected for use changing the position of the job on the media and the total size of the job once rendered Paper Saving Cropmarks will not expand the overall rendered job size If multiple canvases are to
280. olution 72 DPI R Cancel t ec monitors This is used in SoftProof for calculating various fit methods Options include o UseSystem Settings The Client will calculate the system s monitor resolution o Custom Resolution Specify your own resolution o Calibration Expires Set a reminder to popup when a calibration needs updating Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 136 Additional Monitors Specific settings may be set for each monitor when in a multi monitor environment The 2 Client Settings will show additional sections with Monitor 2 Monitor 3 etc listed To identify which monitor is which press the monitor indicator button to display a graphic in the middle ofthe screen for the relevant monitor Calcheck Managed The Calcheck Managed option under Colour Management constantly reports the status of the monitor used for softproofing When this option is enabled a small tick or cross icon representing the Calcheck status will be displayed at the bottom right of the SoftProof window in the status Auto SoftProof Press v bar Application Shortcuts This tab displays a list of the Applications and Modules for which keyboard shortcuts can be created Note It is the responsibility of the user to check the created shortcuts do not conflict with any other Blackmagic third party software or operating system shortcuts hotkeys To add a shortcut 1 Highlight the selected application
281. on Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 67 e Set Target Sets the currently selected colour patch as the Target centre of chart 2 Swatch chart colours will change to variant colours of the new Target colour e Print Match Chart Prints the three 3 swatch charts displayed in the Match Chart panel for visual matching with original print press material Note The 3 swatch charts are printed as individual jobs and can be nested to save paper see Output Nesting Charts should be oriented with the bars and text to the top for patch selection Charts may not be nested in order so take note of the 1 2 or 3 bars when selecting a patch in the interface Colour List Panel The lower panel has two 2 tabs Variations and Colour Variations Tab This tab list includes a Colour Patch and Lab values for the original Target colour and the 26 variant colour patches A colour selected in the Variations list will be highlighted by a box in the Match Chart panel A colour selected in the Match Chart panel will be highlighted in the Variations list Colour Tab This tab fills the panel with the currently selected colour variant This option is useful for visually matching softproof special colours on screen e Save Saves the currently selected Target colour centre of Chart 2 over the original special colour replacing it e Cancel Cancels the Print and Match process without saving closing the window
282. on The values in the middle of the curve will also change Pros and Cons There are various arguments for and against setting a maximum density override In general the Match ICC profile would set the maximum density values so there should be no need to set them here However some users have found it to be an advantage to set the values to the target densities required for the final proof output and in doing so have achieved very good results Reducing the density of the output used to print the ICC chart will affect the gamut However as the gamut of a press is generally smaller than that of a proofing device this may not have any noticeable effects It is desirable to drop the top end densities of the output prior to ICC creation as sometimes there is a need to boost the values after ICC is applied This should only be used as a last resort and is not desirable as a general rule If the top end densities drop the ICC profiles are generally to blame and therefore should be corrected Note It is the Match ICC profile that has the biggest bearing on the output and sets the output top end densities Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 102 Monitor The Monitor application is an alternate user configurable version of the Jobs application central to the Serendipity Client interface see Applications gt Jobs Like Jobs it displays jobs before during and after processing and allows users to manage j
283. on DVD 1 Navigate to the drivers mac folder and run the file Serendipity Printer Drivers pkg 2 An installer window will appear Follow the prompts to complete the installation of the drivers The installer will require administrator access privileges Configuring a Pagesetup for Publishing as a TCP IP System Printer To configure a calibrated Pagesetup for Publishing _ Publish DropFolder 1 In the Workbench select the Pagesetup from the list of available data Nafaste types 2 Goto the Publish panel and enable the checkbox for TCP Port Activate Printer _ Mac _ Windows port number option TCP Port V Activate port number 10201 Flow Control Hold After Imaging _ Hold After Rendering 3 Enterthe TCP port number into the field and Save the Pagesetup Port Numbers It is recommended that the port number assigned to a Pagesetup be a port over 10000 to avoid any conflict with the operating system or an existing application Each Pagesetup to be published needs its own unique port number for example 10200 10201 etc Media When submitting jobs to a Published Pagesetup the default Media assigned to the Pagesetup is used If you wish to publish to different media on the same printer each Media required needs to be assigned to its own Pagesetup with its own unique port number Creating a TCP IP Mac OS X System Printer A system printer needs to be created and configured on the Mac OS X computer that is Mee i running the
284. once an item has been copied Used to paste the copied tweak from the clipboard to the rendering intent selected e Change White Point Change the white point of the paper Select the button and enter the X Y Z points If a Spectrophotometer is connected the white point can be measured directly into the system e Zoom Zoom in and out of the Lab colourspace to see the point being tweaked in relation to the whole space e value Move up and down the L value to see the point being tweaked in relation to the lightness Reset the value by clicking the ReCentre button e ICC Profiles Choose the input and output profiles being used to tweak These must match the ones selected in the Media as they are stored with the tweak set and are used during the mapping process e Spectrophotometer Choose an online Spectrophotometer to read values directly into the tweak set Once selected press the Activate button to connect and take measurements If the device is being used by another application including a Serendipity application it will fail to connect Quit or disconnect all others first Tweak Poirt Adjutionents Colourspace Input Profile H influence qmm 1 5 C m 100 Qs Red 0 M G 0 Magenta aeee Creen 29 Fd 100 Yi ly a ue 0 __ 0 Y a _ K Darker nnn Lighter 30 Perceptual Colorimetric Saturation CIE E I e6 Zoom New Tweak aye err L value c ReCent
285. ons Default Press and Default Camera View Options O EEEE tear orci Window tan Se i e Allow Multiple Windows When enabled allows jobs to be opened and u e viewed in separate SoftProof windows If disabled each job viewed will M ener Enmbaddod ICC Pon appear in a tab running along the top of the same SoftProof window If a sient EA job is dragged and dropped into SoftProof from the QueueManager it will mcd replace any open image in the viewing window selected E On Load M nae Pager Sections Status Bar Size Select the size of the status bar text from Small Medium or Large Rulers Show or hide the rulers Scrollbars Show or hide the scrollbars Honour Embedded ICC Profiles When enabled this will honour any embedded ICC profiles when viewing the image in SoftProof Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 109 Rotation Control the orientation of jobs when they first load The option None leaves the job in its imaged or rendered orientation Zoom Level Select the default zoom setting All fitting zoom modes calculate the size based on the monitor resolution This is set in the Colour Management tab of the Client Settings Show Back Page Checkbox Toggles whether publications with consecutive pages will open in SoftProof displaying back page show through based on Press settings by default Publications Enable Pager Thumbnail Enable or disable the thumbnail viewer w
286. op marks around a job Line width length and clearance can be Centering specified Convolution matrix Cropmarks e Edge Detect Remove all content and just leave the edges Edge detect e Fotoba Cut Marks Prints user configurable cut marks around jobs for subsequent Cut Marks cutting trimming by Fotoba Digital Print Cutter devices venas e Margins Specify margins around the job Negative e M Mirror Mirrors the job PRA e Negative Renders the job as a negative e Pagenumber Place the page number in the middle of the page as a watermark Scale factor and opacity can be configured and choose between page number of the job or the page number of the signature when using De Imposition Rectangle Draw a rectangle around the job inset at the desired distance line width and colour e Registration Marks When enabled this effect will add registration marks at each corner of the submitted job Line width Inner and Outer Radius are all configurable This is not available when using the Studio application e Signature Decorations Place page lines from the signature and page numbers on the job Further options are available Choosing lines for pages will print a line around the page Lines for spreads will print a line around paired pages spreads Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 49 e Slugline Place job information on the job There are a number of options available via the Edi
287. or Paper Profile Use this to make a Linearisation Curve o Yes Print to check Linearisation This applies all colour management so you can check a Linearisation This panel shows the Linearisation Curves for each ink channel Select individual channel checkboxes to view a channel Shift click to add more channel curves to the view Double click a channel to show all curves Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 100 Show Charts Selecting Show Charts will display another window with a chart for each channel in the linearisation curve At the top of the window is a series of tick boxes one for each colour Selecting one displays the single colour and hides all others Selecting another box changes the graph to that colour Select the same colour again and all graphs will be displayed Use SHIFT Click to show more than one graph Chart Types There are five 5 chart types available for selection Density History Plots the date of the curve on the X axis and the density values for each patch on the Y axis If the density begins to drop off it will be displayed in the chart Density Patches Plots the patches along the X axis and the density on the Y axis For each patch in the history a point is placed on the graph If the density for a given patch does not vary greatly the points will appear on top of each other Where there is some change a line will appear between points Dot History
288. or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held inv
289. or the note Page Index Panel The Page Index panel displays a numbered box for each page making up the loaded publication This allows for direct navigation to any page by clicking on the page number Hovering the mouse over a page number will pop up a thumbnail for the page The page boxes are colour coded L4 9 Light Green indicates the Publication pages are loaded and can be viewed These show as dark green when selected Purple indicates there are duplicate pages i e they have the same publication name and page numbers Dark purple indicates the pages are selected RI 3 wv 4 b d t J Clicking on these pages allows you to select and view the alternative page I 1 za ara d mmm avo roe ee rx 22 3 19532 GOLF TEXT job IMPOSITION Page 7 3a 3 19532 GOLF TEXT job Page 007 IMPOSITION 07 Light Red indicates the page is not yet available for viewing in SoftProof This normally occurs when there are page number gaps if pages have not yet imaged or rendered or when processing a de imposed publication with known signature defined page numbers As the missing pages image render close and re open SoftProof to update the publication pages Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 112 Spectro The Spectro application allows for the measurement of colours with a Spectrophotometer The accuracy of the measured value can be viewed against an imported v
290. other useful processing E information Click the icon again to hide the panel Loupe The Loupe is available via the sidebar menu Once opened the Loupe will appear with the default setting Loupe to Mouse enabled Loupe Options accessed via the Spanner icon e Screened Pixel Readout Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On only Toggles the HUD between crosshair point measurement of ink percentages and a square for measuring area average dot percentages The square resizes depending on the zoom level to always cover an area equal to a full halftone cell at the LPI defined in the SoftProof Settings e Screening LPI Enter the desired value for screen ruling for SoftProof in Lines Per Inch LPI The default is 150 e Loupe to Mouse This is enabled by default The mouse pointer location is used as the reference point for the Loupe display This allows you to position the Loupe off image and use the mouse to display the relevant part of the image within the Loupe for proofing e Rulers Turn rulers on or off The rulers will appear in the Loupe window with measurement units displayed The rulers are centered or at the mouse pointer location if held over the Loupe window Loupe Options coo geigqvr Screened Pixel Readout Orr Screening LPI 150 iv Loupe To Mouse Rulers Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 108 The Loupe is moved around the SoftProof by l
291. our Scheme of the BookMonitor window pick Font Options and choose the Language Encoding of the incoming poll data Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 72 ClientLog The ClientLog displays any messages that pop up during normal Client operation There are different levels of message from informative to serious errors All messages are held for a user determined length of 7 4 zm 008 E time Fetch back log Displays the log for the time specified For example it retrieves and displays the last 4 hours of messages Choose the time from the pull down list Trim older lines Trims the log based on the time selected in Fetch back log If this is set to 60 minutes the log file is trimmed back so only the last 60 minutes remain Export Allows you to export the log to a file FRPP EEES Note When you export the log file you can choose to export everything in view or select entries to export Use the filtering options and Fetch back log choice to limit the view before exporting Selecting export displays a chooser allowing you to enter a name and select the location to save the file You can choose to save the file as html or as a tab delimited text file Filtering Options You can choose which messages to display in the log and which to hide by ticking checkboxes for one or more of the following filters All messages are saved to the log even if filtered Question Used for messages
292. ours From Library 66 Adjusting Colour Intensity 67 Greate a new Clout sisirin 66 Delete ColoUT S ti tede 66 Duplicate colours 66 Export colours to a file 59 66 Import colours from files 59 66 Paint ModE Sironin dE NERA DA UTD 67 Print and Match 67 PRE SW al Cll s dogm ir dette 68 SDGULEO od acento metiresi ose N eod nodi 113 Yes c C 113 Export Values onus vifu aos 113 Eecreborci mte A 113 Starting the Client adatti iren 17 Starting the Server aquatica teas 16 SLAT imt 82 Stochastic Screening sss 41 SDEe CD E ACCOM S uncos pa bee vU RU 57 Sdi Oana ded DIS REVERSE 114 Asset Panelian ua 117 Canvas Wrap iecit riii aeu 118 Cloaking osa RETE RUM 122 COBEe DE andi ied lu debct onda 120 Creating a Nest teretes 121 Creating Templates 120 GEODBISPES sonne RO ORO OR ORUM 123 CEODDIBDE 5 unioteA toutou Eni 122 DOCUPIenDt it ene n icc 117 Edit Meni tics Rosso on Riu RI rU 115 Fram P E 118 Frame Menu conce o ups 115 Layout Area ecetacu pot stes 116 Loading Stored Templates 120 Market ossa Dd onn DP d d 118 Metian non e ena tn 118 Menu OpUlo nS iiss 6i mendis 114 Property Panel ote s i t d 117 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 160 Rendering Bilects nncuassuncuntae
293. p will be automatically sent for processing and colour management in Blackmagic eliminating the need for dropfolders or manual file submission Note Jobs printed via Blackmagic in this way must be in a file input format available to your Blackmagic version Megarip Printer Driver The first step before proceeding is to enable access to the Megarip inf driver file The Megarip printer driver is a proprietary Serendipity Software driver that Windows will use as the printer driver The file is located on the Serendipity Blackmagic installation DVD in the following directory drivers win win xp vista 7 Configuring the Pagesetup for Publishing as a System Printer To configure a calibrated Pagesetup for Publishing Publish Publish Dropfolder 1 In the Workbench select the Pagesetup from the list of available data Pwfsiiltr types 2 Go to the Publish panel and enable the checkbox for TCP Port Activate Printer L Mac _ Windows port number option TC Port V Activate port number 10201 Flow Control Hold After Imaging Hold After Rendering 3 Enterthe TCP port number into the field and Save the Pagesetup Port Numbers It is recommended that the port number assigned to a Pagesetup be a port over 10000 to avoid any conflict with the operating system or an existing application Each Pagesetup to be published needs its own unique port number for example 10200 10201 etc Media When submitting jobs to a Published Pa
294. plication Menu Windows Linux or Serendipity Client Menu Mac OS X esee nennen nnns 130 SUDI LU E01 ce fa NE RI RITTER RC 130 SART IV E o D DTO NEE E EE E E PE EE E A E N TE E NE E E e mn 132 Accounts Admin 7 Secure MOC G nia E iet ERU eoe aa ese a 133 Settnpg up Users and User GrOUDS arere eh eens ea edm MN D Ald E MD DEAE M et 133 ACH VaEITIP SOCIO VIO E A E A N EAEE E E E E O eren sce A E tni esce tse n trop E bed UR sd 133 GONMMCUTATION Panel t 133 Nudus anbiricde S 136 CHENES iude e DEMNM Mc n rd 136 sI2edjaerlrdh tcm P 138 WeD SerVOeE 0 ieeco sce eoe P ORI Io ETRAD E EEE EROS EPEXRLR CO EI PER OR PS EE Ce ERR ccu Oe Tree src MOM E Ere T Odi T ED MEE 140 Accessing Ele Web SEVE Sabana d AER UL a occa VOR eaten RAO tea UN etr dep te ine E seca ME RTL 140 Publishing a Pagesetup on MacOS X 10 6 x J erreina traer inpune Ce thu at uiuere st cepa a aaa Eaa roni cari dai aSa 142 Installing the Serendipity Printer Drivers c uarie dco erint cue ife tbe oerte ite eae eee Crewe epus 142 Configuring a Pagesetup for Publishing as a TCP IP System Printer eese esten tn tete nennt tntn tete natant n tnnt 142 Creating a TCP IP Mac OS X System Printer t nana
295. plications Window e Bring All to Front Shows any open window of the Client and can be selected to bring it to the front e Cycle Through Windows CMD or CTRL Cycles through the open windows within the Client Help e Server Info Provides information about the Server including version platform speed processors hostname IP product and vendor e Whats This Select this and click on any part of the interface to display a short help description Contextual Menu Right Click In addition to selected File menu options listed above the following options are available via the contextual right click menu e New Folder Folders are a great way to organise the data types list items Folders are Client based meaning each user can have their own folders if desired e New Folder with Selection Places any selected items into a new folder e Remove Folder Removes the selected folder placing items within the folder back in to the general item list e Open Close Selected Folders Expand or collapse the selected folders to show or hide the items within Note Folders in the items list are internal to the Serendipity Client used to organise database items They are not operating system file folders Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 26 Workbench Data Types There are eighteen 18 data types databases within the Workbench that can be used and configured to accurately process jobs E
296. possible to create multiple nesting or non nesting Published Pagesetup Pools to print via the same Output Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 51 Job Queuing Job Queuing is used to configure how incoming jobs are managed by the Pagesetup Pool e Priority Assign a priority to a Pagesetup Pool The lower the number the higher the priority Numbers can be negative for a higher priority The default is 0 Jobs waiting to Image or Render will be processed by a higher priority Pagesetup Pool over jobs submitted to lower priority pools e Pool type Decide what sort of pool to use There are two 2 options o Load Balancing Spread the jobs across the Pagesetups selected in the pool By Print Area Calculate the area of each job and the queue with the least amount of print area queued is sent the next job By Number of Jobs The queue with the least number of jobs is sent the next job Load Balancing is ideal for printing to multiple printers of equal quality using the same media with the priority being to proof jobs to the next available printer Each printer is calibrated separately to ensure quality By Print Area is more efficient as the larger the print area the longer it will take to image render and print Queue loading is determined at the time of imaging If a print queue is paused jobs will be sent to active queues o Prints to All Pagesetups Choose to print to all Pagesetups selec
297. processing via the RIPMonitor all jobs with a common Publication Part will be submitted to the QueueManager as one publication and will be viewable as such in SoftProof None means no Publication Part is being used IN OUT Optionally remap Publication abbreviations to full names For example smh IN becomes Sydney Morning Herald OUT Section Tab O O Section Part Select the filename part defined as the Section Part from the dropdown menu The default is None meaning the Section Part is not being used Various publications such as newspapers are comprised of several separate sections The pages of these sections often use a filename convention where the page numbers represent the number within the section not the page number within the whole publication The Section Part makes it possible to proof a publication made up of multiple sections and offset the pages of each section appropriately to allow viewing of the complete publication in the correct page order IN OUT If used the Section Part requires section names be entered although IN and OUT can be the same Page Offset If required enter a page offset value for the section for e g pages 1 2 and 3 of a section with an offset of 10 would become pages 11 12 and 13 Edition Tab O Edition Part drop down select the filename part defined as the Edition part None means no Edition part is being used Itis common for newspapers and other publications to be printed i
298. r or for ERU ANTONE 877 C poen printing on transparent media These device spot inks are handled outside the EEE ie normal colour management process and are not included in the output ICC colourspace for printing Spotcolour mapping The Spotcolour Mapping panel is used to remap incoming job spot special colours to a printer device spot channel e g remapping could be configured to print any incoming job areas covered by the spot colour PANTONE Cool Gray Add C Apply C Delete 2 1 C using the printer s white ink e Map Colour Enter the name of the spot special colour to be remapped e To band dropdown Select the white or metallic ink printer dependent to which the colour will be remapped e Add Add a mapped colour to white metallic to the remap colour list e Apply Apply a name or colour remap change to the colour selected in the colour list e Delete Delete the selected colour remap from the colour list Colour List The colour list has the following sort columns e Colour The name of the spot colour to be remapped e To band The printer device spot ink to which the colour is being remapped e DotGain Curve The dotgain curve applied if any to the listed printer device ink Adding DotGain Curves To assign an output dotgain curve to a listed printer device ink remap double click or right click on the colour in the colour list and select a dotgain curve from the popup window
299. r Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we
300. r Updates Check for Updates When Every B l 4 When Never B at 12 00AM at 12 00 AM v Notify when updates are available v Notify when updates are available Cancel ox Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 ZZ The Blackmagic Dongle Updater The Blackmagic dongle licenses the level version of software and enables the use of any input filters RIPs and output drivers that have been purchased If any additional licenses are activated the relevant dongle will require updating in order to access them Dongle Updater The Dongle Updater is a built in feature accessed via the Server File menu gt Update Dongle option Key Code 1 Key Code 2 To avoid any abuse of the software the dongle activation codes can only be used once and may only be entered against the assigned dongle serial number Any updating should be completed by your relevant Server administrator Important Note Before updating any dongles please ensure your Server is in Stop mode Close Updating the Dongle Before updating the dongle an email must have been received with the new codes This will either be sent from Serendipity Software directly or via a Dealer of the product Two 2 codes are required for entry in order to update the dongle referred to as Key Code 1 and Key Code 2 The codes are located in the Dongle reprogram string field in the email and are separated by a space The first long
301. rage minimum is set any job that would make the nest exceed the maximum height will be left in the queue the other jobs will be nested Any single job exceeding the Maximum Height will also not print If a job is too large the nesting parameters and or the printer media must be changed This makes it possible to effectively and efficiently nest using Cut Sheet media Maintenance The Maintenance panel allows Blackmagic to be configured to automatically perform printer maintenance functions This is not available for all printer drivers Maintenance functions can be performed at regular time intervals after a set number of print jobs or after printing linearisation charts and ICC targets Options include e When Select Every from the dropdown menu to activate time based maintenance with configurable time and day fields o Perform Actions Calcheck When enabled the printer will print a Calcheck Chart as specified by the user Clean Print Head When enabled the printer will clean the print head Print Nozzle Pattern When enabled the printer will print a nozzle check pattern to verify all print nozzles are clean and functioning Nozzle Check When enabled the printer will perform a nozzle check e Every Enter a number in the field or use the arrows to set the selected maintenance to be performed after the defined amount of print jobs o Perform Actions Calcheck When enabled the printer will print a Calcheck Chart
302. re Change White Point KC Profoes Choose Input Profile match NewSample Press K2 icc Choose Output Profile printers Px9500 0714 icc Spectrophotometer offibe COATS ISO 12642 file ol Activate Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 32 Job Genie Plate separated single bit screen TIFFs have become predominant in print industry workflows The TIFF Based Generic input filter is designed to poll jobs from RIPs that produce 1 bit TIFF files one file for each process or spot colour plate of a particular job While the TIFF Based Generic input filter has a limited intelligence and can recognise standard filenames such as jobname_plate tif it will not understand or be able to correctly poll a filename like J 371P1S1CCyan tif The Job Genie utility allows for the configuration of a TIFF Based RIP input filter to poll and recognise any filename convention no matter how unique or complex and stitch the 1 bit files into single jobs Job Genie can also be used to rename files to have more user friendly onscreen names or group files together into a single publication The configuration window is split into two 2 sections The column on the left is used to enter a Task see Tasks below The main panel displays the five 5 tabbed sections requiring consideration when setting up each Task After it is created the Job Genie is selected in a RIP queue using an input filter such as TIFF Based RIP User Con
303. res Import a signature made by another application The available types are o DynaStrip Files are usually named with a sheet number and a dsf extension o Preps Files are Prep Templates o Krause Files usually end in a number such as jobname 001 o JDF Files usually have a jdf extension o Facilis Files are usually named with a dai extension Selective Import Enable this to choose or alter any all Signatures from the source file prior to import The following options are available o Group Pages Group the pages together as they are imported The pages must be the same size and align for grouping The diagram shows a pink line around individual pages when they are not grouped or around all pages when they are grouped Pages must group for pairing to work o Inclusive This option attempts to group pages with parameters alignments differing by very small amounts o Rotation Choose to rotate the signatures during import o Offset Page Numbers Offset the page numbers of those signatures imported by a number O O O Oo O0 Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 63 Imported JDF files generally need to have the Offset Page Numbers set to 1 otherwise the first page will begin at 0 This can be changed after import if necessary e Top Align Left Align Optional ways of viewing the interface depending on the display and preferred layout e Close Page Number Gaps Use this to close the
304. rgins etc as required in the other panels of the Pagesetup See the Workbench Pagesetup section of this manual for further details on the options available 10 Save the Pagesetup configuration when complete by selecting File menu Save Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 18 RIP Configuration If your Blackmagic install requires proofing a RIP output a RIP setup will need to be configured to poll the RIP jobs for processing 1 6 Select RIP from the Data Types list in the Workbench and create a La new RIP by selecting File menu New s A warning message will appear Dismiss the message The RIP name Untitled will appear in the item list highlighted for ST renaming Rename and select the item In the Driver panel of the gray configuration area select the ure EN appropriate RIP driver for the CTP RIP input from the dropdown list of licensed drivers Configure the RIP driver options by enabling checkbox options and or choosing Custom Settings by clicking the Edit button Tick the Enable Polling checkbox in the Polling panel Set a poll interval time for example 2 minutes Note Some RIP drivers and polling methods require the use of a Job Genie in order for the Blackmagic RIP setup to recognise incoming RIPped files See the Workbench Job Genie section of this manual for further details Also refer to the Support section of the Serendipity
305. rint it Measure the rectangle and enter the value If the size is 98cm enter 0 98 If the size is 102cm enter 1 02 Back Page Opacity Enter a value between 0 and 10096 This controls the amount of show through of the back page through the front page when reverse page viewing in SoftProof Back Page DotGain Curve Select a DotGain Curve to apply to the back page when using the Show Back Page option in SoftProof Back Page Rotation Select the relative orientation of back page when using Show Back Page in SoftProof Top Page Choose Even or Odd This is used to determine which page backs onto which so the correct back page is shown when requested Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 57 P Regular Expression The Regular Expression data type is assigned as a filter to an auto proofing RIP queue Here the user constructs a set of rules whereby only files with a particular naming structure will be submitted for auto proofing Expressions Expressions Ignore items B using all of the following B E E E E Expression 1 Similar to the Job Genie the Expressions search tasks are entered Match nag i begins with total and displayed in the left list Each expression is made up of one or does not contain brick more strings used to match or ignore files The Expressions are handled in the order they appear in the list If the first expression matches a job name and that expression
306. riority The default is 0 Jobs waiting to Image or Render will be processed by higher priority Pagesetups over those submitted to lower priority queues Auto Publication Name Create unique publication names for each job passed through the Pagesetup Use this feature for duplexing from PDF or PS files Submitting a multi page document as one job will allocate all pages with the same publication name 16 Bit Processing Enable or disable 16 bit processing for jobs submitted to the Pagesetup This is the default option for any new Pagesetups created Change Output Epson 7880 Antialiasing None 4 Note Blackmagic V5 is able to accept files submitted in a 16 bit format The files are normally processed and rendered in standard 8 bit colour which for many workflows is sufficient for proofing 16 bit processing improves render quality and can be useful for finding artifacts within a job When enabled files submitted to the Pagesetup in 8 bit are upscaled to 16 bit for processing 16 bit mode requires more system memory for imaging rendering jobs and produces larger output files Publish Allows Pagesetups to be published on a network as a Drop Folder or as a network print destination for printing from another software application To Publish a Pagesetup it is necessary for the Serendipity Megarip PPD to be installed on the same system on which the Blackmagic Server runs Server menu gt Download PPD e Publish DropFolder Allocate a fo
307. ristics can be changed prior to rendering Once the job is rendered it is submitted for printing to the output device or file format Multiple output queues can be created and multiple devices can be printed to simultaneously Most of the output devices supported use a direct printer driver allowing the Server more control of options such as the selection of specific media and print directions The Client monitors the whole process from start to finish showing a jobs progress in a QueueManager and QueueStatus window Jobs can be managed separately by placing a job on hold releasing a job cancelling or promoting as desired The processes queues can be paused at any time holding all jobs from spooling imaging rendering or printing If a job fails the error can be examined rectified and the job retried There are logs reporting all Server and Client functionality and job information from first detection on the RIP to final output The logs can be searched filtered or saved to a file The system creates a database of all configurations calibration curves and other settings This database can be backed up on demand or automatically so a working copy is always available It can be copied to any other Serendipity Blackmagic as a whole database or as individual items This applies to any output characteristics If any changes are required for the Imaged File e g changing plates resolution etc the file will need to be re submitted from th
308. rt options are e IP address The network IP address of the Node Checkboxes become available to enable the node and select if it is to be used for Imaging and or Rendering tasks Once enabled the Master handles the clustering in the most efficient manner possible e Hostname The network name of the Node e Speed The relative speed of the Node calculated by Blackmagic e Platform The operating system kernel version of the Node machine e CPUs The number of CPUs in the Server machine e Product The Serendipity Blackmagic software being used for the Node e Version The Server software version of the Node e Processing Pool Optionally choose a Pagesetup Pool see the Workbench Pagesetup Pool section for which the Node will perform image and render tasks Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 87 Image Shows the number of simultaneous Imaging tasks that can be performed by the Node Click on the field to change the number Render Shows the number of simultaneous Rendering tasks that can be performed by the Node Click on the field to change the number see the Server Settings for details on Imaging and Rendering task settings Refresh The Refresh button polls the network for active Nodes and registers any Nodes in the list that are offline Cluster Node activity can be monitored in the ClusterStatus module see the Modules ClusterStatus section for more information Menu Optio
309. rule is to ignore items the job is not passed to the next expression for further consideration Expressions can be reordered by selecting the item and dragging up or down the list as required Add Duplicate Delete does not contain r2 List Options e Add Adds a new expression to the list e Duplicate Makes a copy of the currently selected expression Delete Removes the currently selected expression Match Specify what to match and the rules to apply Enter one or more strings to match and apply different rules to each Match options e Match Items Matches the strings entered If no other expressions exist the job is submitted for auto proofing e Ignore Items Ignores anything that matches the strings entered If a job name matches it is ignored and not submitted for proofing or passed to other expressions for further matching e Any of the Following The match is true if any string match conditions are met If there are two or more match strings in the one expression and either of them match a job name the Match Items or Ignore Items rule is applied e All of the Following The match is only true if all string match conditions are met String Enter the string to match in the text field at the bottom of the screen This is a job name or part of a job name The match depends on one of the following conditions selected with the string e Contains The job name contains the entered
310. s Windows Contains the Serendipity Blackmagic installation package for Windows Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 7 Windows Installation Administrator rights are required to install Serendipity Blackmagic and the Serendipity Agent If upgrading from an existing installation to version 5 4 see Upgrading to Version 5 4 within this manual Installing the Dongle Driver The first step is to install the dongle driver To install Remove all SuperPro USB dongles On the DVD navigate to the dongle windows folder Double click the Sentinel Protection Installer exe file to launch the installer Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation Restart the computer when finished pras imm Installing Serendipity Blackmagic The next step once the dongle driver is installed is to install Serendipity Blackmagic There are two 2 Windows files available for installation 32 bit or 64 bit version Select the appropriate file for your system to install 1 Either select and run the Blackmagic installer by clicking the link on the browser page if it pops up as an Autoplay when the disk is inserted or go to the DVD and navigate to the Windows directory to run the file blackmagic msi 32 or 64 bit version 2 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation Note You can type your own path and the installation program will make the folder for you provided your cho
311. s Paper Saving will not expand the rendered job size The type of cropmark used is configured via the Studio Settings e Overprint Enable this to convert the selected frame to overprint mode Not available in Canvas Wrap mode Canvas Wrap ano Canvas Wrap Options Using an appropriate canvas print media paper the Canvas Wrap option allows you seni to turn any asset into a canvas ready for stretching around a wooden or other 6 ae frame Heu mem A Print hack wrap Canvas Wrap options include wrap sve Coton e Front width The width of the front of the canvas e Front height The height of the front of the canvas Colour Space aca e Frame thickness The thickness of the canvas frame The default size is 1 25in e Back wrap The length of canvas to wrap around the back once the canvas is stretched around the frame This will always remain as an unprinted area The default size is 20mm o Print back wrap Prints the currently selected wrap style to the back Cancel e anase wrap in addition to the frame sides of the canvas e Wrap style The style of canvas to create Further options are o Gallery This is the default canvas style stretching the image to expand to the frame thickness as defined above o Mirror This option will mirror the edges of the image to the frame thickness as defined above Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 118 o Colour Select a c
312. s Blackmagic Softproofing Add On only Toggles the HUD between crosshair point measurement of ink percentages and a square for measuring area average dot percentages The square resizes depending on the zoom level to always cover an area equal to a full halftone cell at the LPI defined in the SoftProof Settings e Ink Weights Opens a window displaying the ink weights source and print inks for the job e Proof Colours For use with RGB images only Automatically select a Press Configuration to display onscreen what the RGB image will print like using a specific Press profile The selected Press will appear in the status bar at the bottom right of the Tabs gt screen Clicking the status bar button will allow you to adjust which profile is used gt nd T em a e Zoom In Out Zoom in or out of the image snow Fage boundary X E Show Notes N e Show All Fit the entire job into the SoftProof window e Show Actual Pixels One pixel of the screen is equal to one pixel of the Screened Pixel Readout job This is shown at 100 This view mode has the quickest load time amp Ink Weights tel as resampling for scaling is not required e Show Actual Print Size Show the print size of the job m e Fit Width Height Fit the job to the height or width of the SoftProof amp Zoom In d window Q Zoom Out 38 e 90 CW Rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise RA Show All 3e 0 e 90 CCW Rotate the image 90 degrees counter clockwise amp Show
313. s and allows configuration of the Server Clustering The use of multiple machines on a network for distributed processing CMM Colour Management Module CRT Cathode Ray Tube Describes the type of monitor CTP Computer to Plate CUPS Common UNIX Printing System Data Types Database groups such as Pagesetups or RIPs etc DPI Dots Per Inch resolution EPS Encapsulated Postscript File FTP File Transfer Protocol Method for copying files between computers across networks GUI Graphical User Interface ICC International Color Consortium ICC Profile A colour lookup table used for converting colour of a job from one device to another LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LPI Lines Per Inch Screen Ruling Master A Master Server controlling Slave nodes in a Clustering environment QueueManager Client module that displays job queues and jobs in those queues QueueStatus Monitors the progress of a job through the system Real Density Colour content of a patch as measured RIP Raster Image Processor Server Software module that handles the processing of jobs Slave Node A separate processing node on the network Used for processing jobs by a Master TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Visual Density The darkness of the patch measured how much light is absorbed The more light absorbed the darker the Visual Density WAN Wide Area Network Wor
314. s on the machines are open for the node to connect to the Master and they are not being used by anything else The port numbers for the node are as follows o 9103 tcp Server connects here and submits jobs via this port o 9103 udp Listens to broadcasts so the Server can enumerate available Node Servers e Make sure the node is the same version as the Master Nodes Blackmagic Slaves should always be upgraded at the same time as the Master Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 147 Printing to a Pagesetup on Windows Here are some suggestions of where to look if you run into trouble and experience problems when printing For all of the methods documented in this guide test each step to see where the problems arise For example when a printer is created try printing a test page Printing From Mac to Windows When printing from a Mac to a shared Windows printer there are a couple of utilities available to verify whether or not the printer is installed correctly and working These are The CUPs printing system on the Mac has a web interface that lets you view and test printers To access this do the following N G http localhost 631 1 Open a web browser and enter the following address http localhost 631 MEE a This will connect to the local print system Pest a ofa pron 2 Choose Manage Printers or select the Printers tab and the list of sesu ae as MN MS printers configur
315. s to be specified in order to ensure a complete job is submitted e Minimum Plate Count Specify a certain number of plates that must exist before a job is submitted for AutoProofing e Must Have Select which process plates must exist in the job before AutoProofing e Filter Select a filter to use for AutoProofing See the Regular Expression section for further information on Filters e Delete Jobs From RIP After AutoProofing Delete jobs after a successful AutoProof This is only available when jobs are locally hosted Localhost polling This may be used when a temporary file is created for example when adding halftone dots to unscreened data e Hold After Imaging Places the job on hold in the Rendering queue after imaging has successfully completed e Hold After Rendering Places the job in a held state in the Output queue after rendering has successfully completed Job Filtering This is only available when the RIP driver is set to poll imposition RIPs Specify if AutoProofing should be carried out on All Jobs or just Imposed Jobs Testing Once the configuration is complete it must be saved before a test can be done If it is not saved a prompt will appear to save and test A test poll checks RIP connection Path validity and job presence Messages appear in the window to alert you to any problems or give confirmation of a valid configuration Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 62
316. sed in the InkKeyViewer SoftProof and in Calculate Ink Weights QueueManager Spectrophotometer Choose a supported Spectrophotometer or file fomat to read or import measured values directly into the Special Colour Set O O O Print and Match Colour Match Chart Panel Print and Match Colour is a tool used for visually matching special colours used in proofing to original print material accessed via a button in the Special Colour Set toolbar The window has two 2 main panels an upper Match Chart panel and a lower Colour List panel Workbench Braebutan swidevel serendpty soitware com s 9100 NIR inot for resale Prea 0 Match Chart Variations Coo amp m n 1 The upper panel displays three 3 swatch charts comprised of variations of the colour selected in the Special Colour Set The selected target colour is the centre colour of the middle chart chart 2 Any of the 27 patches can be selected to save as a new special colour to save over and replace the originally selected colour or set as the target centre colour for printing a new swatch chart set Variation Controls the level of variance the swatch chart colours have from the original colour Variation value steps in 0 5 increments from 0 5 to 10 The units represent L a and b variations from the Lab value of the original colour Use the slider up down arrows or type in the text field to change the current variati
317. see Workbench DotGain Curves for more information on curves Calcheck Info A Media can have its calibration status checked using the Check Media catcheck into option within the Calcheck application see Applications Calcheck for more RAW ae an a aL information SOEPEN EEAS UNEN This panel displays the current Calcheck calibration status of the Media with pone v the following information displayed E e Chart The Calcheck Chart used for verification Soois soni 727 e Date The date and time of the Calcheck e Score An internal calcheck rating from 1 to 100 AE AH and AC tabs show the following data for each of the standards if measured e ACyan AMagenta AYellow ABlack AGray A Paper e Pass or Fail As designated by a green tick or red cross e Average AMaximum AStandard Deviation Usage The Usage panel shows the amount of media used based on the values entered for Media Length above e Usage Meter Bar showing the amount of media used Text o under the bar shows the exact amount as Used X Units of Ses Total Units percentage Logged Period Time period date and time from and to the Media has been tracked since the last reset e Printed Number of jobs and total printed area of jobs tracked since the last reset e Reset Counter Reset the usage count for the Media Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 39 Colour Correction There are three 3
318. sen location has valid permissions Use back slashes X to separate directories Installation of the Serendipity Agent If you are polling a RIP or RIP folder on a Windows machine the most efficient method is to use the Serendipity Remote Agent This runs a service on the Windows machine where the RIP is located Serendipity Blackmagic communicates with the Agent to poll and transfer jobs To install 1 Either a Select and run the Blackmagic installer by clicking the link on the browser page if it pops up as an Autoplay when the disk is inserted or b Runthe agent32 msi 32 bit or agent64 msi 64 bit file located in the agent windows folder of the installation DVD 2 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation Once the installation has finished proceed to the Running the Software section of this manual Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 8 Mac OS X Installation Administrator rights are required to install Serendipity Blackmagic and the Serendipity Agent If upgrading from an existing installation to version 5 4 see the Upgrading to Version 5 4 section within this manual Installing the Dongle Driver The first step is to install the dongle driver To install 1 Remove all SuperPro USB dongles 2 On the DVD navigate to the dongle macosx folder 3 Double click the Sentinel System Driver pkg file to launch the installer 4 Follow the onscreen instruc
319. sion 3 4 spot colour handling This is a compatibility setting eee See ivi CMS dithering for users with Spot colour setups upgraded from Blackmagic v3 4 or earlier to get consistent results from spot jobs It is recommended as a temporary setting only and setups should be recreated using the improved and more accurate post v3 4 spot colour handling e Apply ICC Correction to CMYK Specials Select this to apply ICC Change System Specials Reference Lab Unknown Specials None k Cance Oke Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 138 correction to CMYK Specials Force Relative Colourimetric Media White Various ICC profiling packages and some older ICC v2 profiles included an Lab value for media paper white in the Relative Colourimetric Intent LUT This has the effect of printing a paper layer when printing with Relative Colourimetric rendering intent When enabled this option ignores the Lab value for paper in the Relative LUT leaving paper white areas unprinted CMS Dithering Disabled by default Use CMS Dithering for smoother results whenever conversion between 16 bits to 8 bits is required Change System Specials Select a default Special Colour Set for plate matching This is used by the RIPMonitor and polling service for plate assigning Colours in this set are automatically assigned in the RIPMonitor Unknown Specials Select a Special Colour Set optional to which unknown
320. space e Resolution Select or enter the desired resolution DPI If the output is a printer only the supported resolutions are eon available If it is a file format your own value can be entered pono e Colourspace Select the output colourspace as desired The co WE moO selections will change depending upon the chosen output on se driver re arenend M ete etme e Media Width Length Sets the width and length of the Media merges Paea eaen Only jobs submitted with a width and length equal to or less Hos 0 9 en Advanced BOW Prete eMe Yonah than the assigned values will be printed Jobs of greater width swe e ia and length will be held in the QueueManager until an appropriate Media or new width and length values are assigned Note Media Width Length values override the width length settings in the Nesting section of the Output meaning jobs will not nest or print until within the width length settings of the Media to which they were submitted e Cut Sheet Enable this if the Media being printed to is Cut Sheet The media to be used is selected from the dropdown menu o Total Sheets Enter the number of cut sheets loaded in the printer Jobs will stop printing to the Media and be held in the QueueManager when MediaStatus has tracked that the assigned number of sheets have been used A Total Sheets value of zero 0 assumes an unlimited sheet availability for tracking Sheet count is reset using the Reset Counter button in the Usa
321. special spot colours included in PDF or Postscript jobs can be automatically added Working Paths Working Paths lists the default location of the paths the Server uses to process jobs Raster Holds all the imaged rendered and print jobs while in Sener Settings they are live in the system General Colour Management Working Paths Spool The location where the job is spooled prior to aD e processing Spool Applications Serendipity bmagic spool Temp After spooling the job is moved to the temp directory Fore 09090 eT where it is worked on Drop Applications Serendipity bmagic drop Drop The default location for the DropFolders The Raster directory holds all jobs while they are in the system and as such can be very large If this is moved it needs to be placed on a disk with plenty of space A Server restart is required if any paths are changed in order for the changes to take effect Important Note All existing files in the new working path directory are deleted when the Server is restarted Ensure the new working path directory Server Working Path All existing files in the new working path directory wil be has no essential data A warning message will popup to confirm whether to deleted at server restart proceed with the path change Do you wish to proceed Yes Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 139 Web Server The Blackmagic Server has a built in we
322. st N Wiese itta ie erteilen eus TT Nestle uia aaa AAE dein ias 43 Gap Between JODS see isis cro 43 O Open ALDAPCDIVEs aiti kd a RES aida 84 Ordered Ditheting eco tereti 41 OO ULDUU oomen anh mes 42 Colla Ug sao deae ucc tbt 43 Add Separator Page 43 Automatic Nesting 43 Duplex oa aora pa eee us 43 IN GS CRO asennan 43 Destinations atm tert interdu runs 42 Maintenance treten tnit entes 44 GUI A eect 42 P Page Head Direction Signature GTOUD ei aactor cede 65 Page Number CITATI sinisi Nna 77 Papgen i DEL sifon aa tions 49 Pagesetlpynsmoene ense hohe nett 45 Colour COPE CUON succ nieve n 46 COIOUP KEY Satius petere eiui 48 ColOUEKeyS used i foo aesti en 48 ETICCUS asoubt oma aon a n edbda en 49 IC C PEOLIES Uu opu asd a RE nano Mr 46 Input Screening sss 48 Fo 49 vids m 45 Postscript PDF Options 48 Priority aene toto tls prt ed eceondediuti 45 PUbliSUzs ce riseaee sapivestninnesessinivetd ade teo deii 45 ReSanmpliWg uon eife t 49 Papgesetup Pools sorne cata ide nad 51 Job Queuing sucus cai ota AH 52 Pagesebus studeo ans 52 PEIOFIDy aeaee esed nd cos 52 Part Mode poete ori tb Ms tat foa 67 Pair Pages SIBD EUG S quain sitse pariente npient 63 Paper PrOBlGsssmaonieistiiuv d adimit ndo 53 Change Media issoria 53 Configure Inklimit Chart 53 Density Patches ies ceo n 53 OLSDDL s uita up AEA 54
323. starts the Server Update Dongle Allows users administrators to update the dongle with activation codes to enable various input and output licenses See the Dongle Updater section for further information Close Closes the window If the Server is running you are warned and asked to confirm Server shutdown Startup Options Start Server on Launch The Server will start once the application is launched Restart Server On Crash Restarts the Server automatically after a crash Start as Cluster Node Starts the Server as a Cluster Node to be used by another Blackmagic Server for imaging and rendering tasks Important Do not use this option before reading further information in the Applications Clustering section of this manual Start in Safe Mode This option starts the Server but ceases all job processing and RIP polling tasks Safe Mode is used for maintenance in the event a RIP queue Pagesetup or other database item is corrupted or is functioning incorrectly Once maintenance is complete the Server will need to be restarted in normal mode Help Menu Update Options Configure a time for Blackmagic to periodically check for software updates Check for Updates Choose this to immediately check for any software updates Install Local Updates Allows users to manually update the Serendipity software package by downloading pax package files See the Installing Manual Updates section following for further information For furth
324. string e Begins With The job name begins with the entered string e Ends With The job name ends with the entered string e s The job name matches the entered string exactly e Does Not Contain The job name does not contain the entered string e Does Not Begin With The job name does not begin with the entered string Does Not End With The job name does not end with the entered string e s Not The job name is not the entered string exactly Match String Options e Add Adds the match string to the list e Apply Apply changes to the selected match string in the list e Delete Removes the currently selected match string from the list Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 58 Replace Colour Set The Replace Colour Set is used to match and replace certain colours as they pass through the system Match and replace process or spot colours and choose to match by name or position Colours can be created directly or imported from popular desktop applications or a Special Colour Set There are a few uses for the Replace Colour Set It is used to create a digital blue line which replaces all colours with varying hues of blue allowing traps MES to be easily seen It can also be used for replacing special colours where the e name varies such as Pantone 101C and Pantone 101CVC Toolbar Options nee e New Colour Creates a new untitled colour in the list Click on m either the Matc
325. string is Key Code 1 The second shorter string is Key Code 2 To update the dongle 1 Plugthe current USB dongle into the computer and run the Server application 2 Select the Server File menu Update Dongle The Server will stop If there are any Clients open a Connect to Server window and or disconnection message may appear A window will open for the Dongle Updater 4 Enter Key Codes 1 and 2 into the relevant fields It is best practice to copy and paste the codes to avoid any keying errors DO NOT copy the space between the codes Once the codes have been entered correctly the Update Dongle button will enable Click it 6 Aconfirmation message will appear after the dongle has been successfully updated and a Server restart is required 7 Quit the Server application and restart The dongle is now updated and any new filters or drivers will appear in the Client for use S SE When Updating from Version 3 or Prior Before Restarting the Server 1 Gotothe installation directory for Blackmagic on the computer for example Applications Serendipity Serendipity Blackmagic Open the lib folder Open the printers folder Sort the files by date Delete all old files ending in v so Once the files have been deleted the Blackmagic Server can be restarted oe T9 Failure to remove the old files from the printers folder will noticeably slow down the Server when it is restarting Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Upda
326. t button If using a narrow format paper and the full slugline doesn t fit select Custom Slugline and turn all options on This will show an item per line Within Custom fields selected will only be printed if they are relevant to the job The Slugline may also be mirrored a useful option when printing to film using a white ink printer e Unsharp Mask Apply an unsharp mask to the job The Unsharp Mask affects the edges within an image and can be controlled with the available parameters The radius tells us how large an area to affect around the edges The larger the radius the greater the effect and the longer it takes to process If the preview resolution is high a given radius will have less effect than if the resolution is lower If the detail is quite fine a smaller radius should be used Higher radius values can also cause halos at the edges The threshold gives a level that should be affected where 0 affects more of the image and 255 very little The amount states the size of the change where a higher value is a greater change at the edges e Watermark Place a watermark across the job The scale of the watermark is proportional to the size of the job 10096 represents the same size as the job in the smallest direction If the stretch option is selected horizontal and vertical sides are stretched to the scale amount The watermark will be scaled in an anamorphic manner EPS files only e ThruBlack Set a black threshold level above which
327. t is not necessary to enter anything in this first tab if all the files in the RIP input filter path are valid for collection and proofing As with tasks each collection action is performed in order Once a file has been excluded by a task it is not looked at again so the order of the actions is very important Action Options e Ignore Files Do not include any files matching the definition specified when the input filter collects the ready for sorting e Ignore Directories Do not look in directories matching the definition specified when collecting files ready for sorting e Descend Directories Only look in directories specified by the definition when collecting files ready for sorting e Include Files in Directories Include all files in the definition specified directories when collecting files ready for sorting e Include Files Only collect files as specified by the definition Note Of the above actions Include Files in Directories has precedence over all other actions If this is matched files and directories at the same level are ignored Files and directories within the directory matched are then subjected to a search governed by any other specified action Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 33 Definition Options e Ending With Any file or directory as specified in the action with a name ending with this text gt e Beginning With Any file or directory as specified in the act
328. t is started or users are changed The Seren dipity Blackmagic username and password are both case sensitive The Accounts Admin menu option is selected in order to display the panels for configuring any Users and Groups and these should be created prior to activating Secure Mode Nme Password golem swdevel serendipity software com au 9100 The Log Out option only appears once Secure Mode has been activated Selecting this while using Blackmagic in Secure Mode simultaneously logs the current user out and generates the Login window with options to login as a new user and select a Server to connect to or Quit the application While the Login window is displayed the Client is effectively locked to all users The Server will continue to operate normally Quit 3 Choose Server Setting up Users and User Groups Blackmagic s Secure Mode is set inactive by default The software will continue to function normally whether or not Secure Mode is activated Important Note It is recommended all users and groups requiring access be setup BEFORE activating Secure Mode Secure Mode cannot be activated until at least one 1 user has been created This would usually be the Admin account as this is automatically created when the Accounts Admin option is selected for the first time 1 Select Server Menu Accounts Admin to display the configuration panels Activating Secure Mode Once the initial user account s have been se
329. tandards use the Import Patches From Files option Patches This section of the Calcheck Chart window displays the patches in the set Each patch shows its respective colour name and Lab values There is also a patch type and the tolerances for each standard The tolerances are assigned when the patches are created or imported and are based on the settings on the left A tolerance setting can be altered by selecting the colour and entering a new value in the relevant box BN The Chart type can be altered via the dropdown menu above the patches and Chart type Lab 7 a Press ICC Profile will appear if allocated The Press ICC Profile button only becomes available for CMYK chart types Search Above the patches list is a search box Enter a string to filter out any patches not required and locate those that are All fields within the panel are searched The search can be inverted using CMD SHIFT I Mac or CTRL SHIFT I Win The box will appear black when the inverted search is enabled Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 30 Camera The Camera data type is used to define an RGB or Camera ICC profile colourspace for use when viewing RGB images in the SoftProof application Users can configure whether the default Camera profile or image embedded ICC profile is automatically selected and applied to an RGB image when opened in SoftProof See Applications gt SoftProof gt SoftProof Settings for furth
330. te and time from and to the Media has been tracked since the last reset This information is shown hidden using the Show Extended Info option Printed Number of jobs and total printed area of jobs tracked since the last reset Calcheck Info Displays the complete Calcheck summary information for the selected Media resulting from the last Calcheck Includes the Calcheck Chart used internal Calcheck score Date Time of Calcheck and Avalues ISOcoated v2 eciF39 Score 88 44 A contextual right click menu has the following options Change Media Change the selected Media for display in the status window Edit Media Edit all or part of the selected Media Copy it or create a new one Calcheck Media Opens the Calcheck application Once a chart has been printed and measured the results are saved to the Media and the Calcheck Info for the Media is updated in the MediaStatus window Media Order Allows you to configure which queues are viewed by the MediaStatus window Move Media between the Available and Showing columns in the popup chooser Show Extended Info Show Hide the Logged Period and Printed information for the selected Media Show Calcheck Info Show Hide the full Calcheck Info summary for the selected Media Metric Units Toggle between Metric or Imperial units for measurements shown in the MediaStatus window This is enabled by default Increase Decrease Status Width Increase or Decrease the width or all Media panels in
331. ted 16 July 2014 23 The Serendipity Client The Serendipity Client is a graphic user interface GUI used for configuration maintenance and monitoring of the Blackmagic Server The Client can be installed and run locally on the same machine or from any supported computer on the network using TCP IP protocol There is no limit to the number of Clients that can be connected to the Server and each Client will have its own settings specific to the user Once installed the Client connects to a Blackmagic Server and loads the settings from the Server into the Client interface Any Client can access the job management information and view the current status The configuration can be open to all users or protected via Secure Mode which allocates specific access for created users and user groups For more information on how to setup access see the Secure Mode section of the manual Look and Feel There is a common theme and functionality to the Client There are many ways to complete the same task such as configuring a Pagesetup from the QueueManager Various options are available using the right mouse click to bring up other contextual menus This will vary depending upon the section of the Client interface being used Anywhere there is a chooser to select an item from the database a search field will be indicated by a magnifying glass Entering text in the search fields filters the list showing only the matching items O Search The searc
332. ted in the pool The option Prints to All Pagesetups is ideal to print a job locally and remotely One Pagesetup can be configured to drive a local printer and another can create a JPEG image and transmit it to a remote Serendipity Blackmagic Alternatively create a PDF file to send to a customer at the same time as printing a hardcopy Pagesetups This displays all Pagesetups configured in the system The sort columns show the Output Input Screening and Media used by each Pagesetup Tick boxes are available to select which Pagesetup will be included in the Pool A context menu for each Pagesetup in the list allows the user to edit any or all selections of the highlighted Pagesetup it s assigned Output or Media Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 52 Paper Profile e Configuring a Paper Profile is a fundamental part of calibrating a printer for optimum colour output The profile is assigned to a Media and matches paper and ink characteristics to the output driver resolution colourspace and custom settings of the Media The user interface for Paper Profile comprises of a toolbar containing options and functions to assist in creating the profile and a tabbed panel where the printer s dot sizes Density Patches Ink Limits are configured Genety Pues cm nomi Separaios Contra Toolbar Options e Measure Patches Use this to measure a printed density chart using a supported Spectrophotometer
333. ted tab Job Queues Tab The default tab layout Job Queues for the Jobs application contains the following modules e QueueManager e Thumbnail Imaging Preview e Thumbnail Rendering Preview e QueueStatus Imaging Queue For information on each module see the Modules section of this manual Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 98 Lineariser The Lineariser application creates a Linearisation Curve for an output device printer Assigned to a Media after paper profiling it brings the output device to a known linear state This means a 50 Cyan will print at 50 The user first prints a stepped wedge chart for a selected Spectrophotometer Densitometer to the output device in the colourspace specified by the Media The chart is measured and the resulting curve is saved assigned to the Media and a History E _eREee recorded EL E os am ue ra un Sak a t GS RN UN V USUS At this stage ICC profiles can be created and applied for zz oss cBBSBEEEZEDH accurate colour representation If the printer output varies due n to ink batches or head wear a quick re linearisation process is all that s required to get back to the same linear state initially NEN created The original ICC profiles can be re applied to achieve the same colour output ee The Interface The Lineariser window is made up of a Toolbar and a number of panels Available Media Linearisation History Measurement Adv
334. tem Settings window and apply any changes Sa gom Manual Client Configuration This section will explain how to setup a basic configuration in order to print a file to a printer and monitor the job throughout the process For detailed information on specific modules mentioned see the relevant sections of the user manual The default monitoring application Jobs opens with a factory standard layout including the QueueManager Thumbnail and QueueStatus modules System queues Image Render Asset Spool and AutoDetect will be displayed in the QueueManager Specific queues will need to be configured for the abovementioned process There are four 4 sections within the Client that require configuration in order to begin processing jobs from the RIP to the printer These are in no particular order e ARIP where the jobs are polled e A Pagesetup and Media where jobs are processed and e An Output where the print job will be sent Note Before a Pagesetup can be created first create a Media and an Output as each Pagesetup must be linked to a valid one of each type To begin configuration 1 Select Application menu Workbench Output Configuration 2 Select Output from the Data Types list on the left and create a new Output by selecting File menu New Mirco 3 The Output name Untitled will appear in the items list n highlighted for renaming This is the name of the Output that will appear in the Pagesetup Select the item
335. the user to customise the size and layout of tabs and job management modules 1 If you would prefer to have any new output queues automatically added to the QueueManager for future use enable the Auto Queue Order checkbox via the Toolbar spanner icon AAN ere 84 om ec mom eet 3100 Select Application menu gt Monitor to open a Monitor window The default view will include a Queues tab and a Logs tab a The Queues tab contains the QueueManager Thumbnail and QueueStatus modules b The Logs tab contains the ClientLog and ServerLog GEB atas aims Mo modules A RIPMonitor tab will need to be added to the Monitor in order to poll jobs 6 7 Select Tab menu New Tab to create a new tab for the RIP Monitor Rename the tab to RIP Queues or similar to differentiate it from the other tabs Select Layout Add RIPMonitor A module window will appear for the RIPMonitor The window may be resized and positioned by selecting Layout Edit Select the window corner and resize it by dragging the mouse Select Layout Use when done Click the spanner icon to expand the Toolbar If no jobs appear in the RIP Queue click the Poll button three 3 times consecutively Jobs appearing may now be submitted for processing Additional Tabs and Modules may be added to the Monitor as required See the Monitor section of this manual for further information Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Up
336. the Layout area Click on the box within the Property panel to view further options Create Vertical Line SHIFT 3 Create a frame containing a configurable vertical line in the Layout area Click on the box within the Property panel to view further options Create Colour Box SHIFT 4 Create a frame containing a configurable colour in the Layout area Click on the a box within the Property panel to view further options Note For all Create options a 1x1inch frame will appear at the current mouse pointer position if using the shortcut keys If selected from the menu the frame will appear in the centre of the current Layout view Special Characters Displays a character map for selecting any special text characters or symbols Frame Menu Bring to Front Move the selected frame to the front top layer of the layout Bring Forward Move the selected frame one layer forward up in the layout Send Backward Move the selected frame one layer backwards down in the layout Send to Back Move the selected frame to the back bottom of the layout Group Group multiple selected frames for movement deletion locking or asset multi drop Ungroup Ungroup any currently grouped frames Align Left Align grouped frames along the left edge of the leftmost box in the group Align Right Align grouped frames along the right edge of the rightmost box in the group Align Top Align grouped frames along the top edge of the upp
337. the flatbed media Cloaked images are not reprinted when a new nest is submitted for printing Cloaking Before and after submitting to print If desired it is certainly possible to place jobs over others that have already been printed Any new image will print exactly where it is placed regardless of whether or not anything has already been printed in that area Important Note The cloaking feature is disabled by default It is not recommended for use with printers using roll media unless the device has the ability to roll back to previous areas of unused media Tiling with Media Studio s tiling feature allows you to set the total document area and BUR create a tile grid based on pre configured print media dimensions and overlap EE Tiling is useful for billboard printing or any type of printing where the image is larger than the available print media paper To tile a job 1 Activate the tiling mode by ticking the Tiling option in the Property panel 2 Enterthe width and height of the area to be tiled Enter any overlap size if required 4 A Media width and height must be entered for tiling mode Enter these in the relevant fields This is the size of the print media paper being used 5 Once the above have been entered an image similar to the Tiling enabled with overlap specified example shown will appear Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 122 en 8 Drag and drop
338. the values measured are displayed The columns can be resized or reordered as required by dragging the header to the preferred position The columns are e Name The name of the colour read Defaults to Untitled but can be changed by selecting the name and entering a new one e Colour Shows the dominant colour read i e the one with the highest density value This may not be the colour you perceive it to be but the contents making up the colour are recorded and the colour is calculated and shown e Density The density value for the colour This is the highest density read from C M Y and K It shows the density of the colour stated in the Colour column e Cd Md Yd Kd The C M Y and K densities of the colour read e Dot The dot percentage of the colour shown in the Colour column e C M Y K The C M Y and K percentage values for the colour measured If any of the 96 columns are blank the reference paper white or solid density for that colour has not been measured Export You can export the values from the Colour List to a file The available options are e All Saves all entries in the list e Selected Save the selected entries in the list only Selecting either of these options displays a window allowing you to choose the values to be saved The choices are Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 89 e Name Save the name of the colour nun e Colour Density The high
339. therwise the machine name is used If the user s name cannot be selected the user has selected the Away option and is not available Broadcast Message This allows messages to be sent to all users connected with a Client to the same Server Selecting the Broadcast option displays a message window to type into and send The message is displayed on the users window for a short time and will automatically dismiss if itis not acknowledged by clicking OK Download PPD This option downloads the Megarip PPD from the Server to the desired location A chooser will appear to navigate to the location for saving the PPD file on the drive This saves having to get the PPD off the disk Use the PPD when installing a local printer When installed the Megarip PPD Postscript Printer Description is selected as the printer driver when setting up a Blackmagic Published Pagesetup as a print destination for third party applications see Workbench Pagesetup and the Publish to a Windows Printer sections for more information Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 132 Accounts Admin Secure Mode Blackmagic gives users the option to login using Secure Mode which allows the administrator to create accounts for users and groups with each group configured to allow or deny its users access to particular applications and functions When Secure Mode is active users are required to enter a username and password whenever the Clien
340. ting e Height The height length of the media being used for printing Frame Canvas Wrap Marker This section of the Property panel displays options for the currently selected frame The frame and contained asset can be edited from within this panel the Canvas Wrap style can be applied to the frame and edited or various markers may be generated for use Frame e Left The offset distance of the frame from the left guideline Offset is measured from the top left corner of the frame e Top The offset distance of the frame from the top guideline Offset is measured from the top left corner of the frame e Width The width of the frame This field will lock when Canvas Wrap mode is selected e Height The height of the frame This field will lock when Canvas Wrap mode is selected e Lock Button Locks the current proportions of the frame size if resized along one dimension The locked proportions are overridden by free resizing with the mouse within the Layout area Frames can be unlocked and resized to any required dimension e Cropmarks Enable this to add cropmarks to the selected frame The cropmarks will appear when viewing the rendered printed preview in SoftProof Cropmarks will appear enabled by default when Canvas Wrap mode is selected Note Cropmarks Standard will take up extra space around a job when selected for use changing the position of the job on the media and the total size of the job once rendered Cropmark
341. ting the queue for all future jobs not just the currently selected job Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 798 QueueStatus The QueueStatus module is a progress meter that shows the current status of active jobs on the selected queue The look and feel can be adjusted for the QueueStatus module and the queue it is monitoring The options are available by right clicking on the window Note Not all options listed are available on all QueueStatus windows Some are only available while the job is in progress e Cancel Job Cancels the currently active job and is only available when a job is active e Job Info Displays info about the currently active job e Pause Printing Processing Pauses the queue so no further jobs will process Any job currently active in the queue will finish The text in the window changes to red showing the paused state e Resume Printing Processing Takes a queue out of a paused state Any waiting jobs will now be processed Note The Pause Resume function can be toggled using the tick box to the left of the progress bar This function also affects the Output for the queue changing the status to Active Inactive Inactive Output s are displayed in red in the Workbench Output Items list e Change Queue Allows you to choose which queue the status window will show e Edit Output Allows you to edit the output or create a new one You can only edit if the queue is showing
342. tions to complete the installation 5 Restart the computer when finished Installing the Serendipity Printer Drivers The Serendipity Printer Drivers are used when setting up a Published Pagesetup for printing from a third party application e g Photoshop directly to Blackmagic The installation package is located on the Blackmagic 5 4 Installation DVD 1 Navigate to the drivers mac folder and run the file Serendipity Printer Drivers pkg 2 An installer window will appear Follow the prompts to complete the installation of the drivers The installer will require administrator access privileges Installing Serendipity Blackmagic 1 Goto the macosx folder on the Blackmagic installation DVD 2 Double click the file Serendipity Blackmagic pkg to launch the installer 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation Important Note Before starting the software after installation see the Running the Software section Mac OS X only Installation of the Serendipity Agent If you are polling a RIP or RIP folder on a Mac OS X machine the most efficient method is to use the Serendipity Remote Agent This runs a service on the Mac OS X machine where the RIP is located Serendipity Blackmagic communicates with the Agent to poll and transfer jobs To install 1 Selectand run Serendipity Agent pkg file located in the agent macosx folder on the installation DVD 2 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation
343. tly in the QueueManager to be measured This option assumes a Calcheck Chart for the job has been printed It immediately opens a window to select the chart for measuring and initiates measurement on the selected Spectrophotometer On completion results are saved to the Job Info and previously calchecked jobs will be updated Print Label Print a summary label of the currently displayed Calcheck results to a system printer Print Report Print a Calcheck report on the job media or choose to save as a PDF Page Setup Allows the user to configure the label printing properties for the Print Label option above Show Graph Displays a representational graph of the Ae for each patch of the currently loaded Calcheck result Checkboxes toggle pass fail views Results can be displayed in one of three formats selected via dropdown menu o Show Error Bars Shows two 2 coloured spheres joined by a bar for each patch positioned in a 3D Lab colourspace The dull sphere represents the reference value for the patch the shiny sphere is positioned based on its Lab values in the colourspace The relative distance between spheres shows the Ae between them o Error Plane Shows a line of coloured spheres representing each patch lined up in order The larger the sphere the higher the Ae o Error Spheres Shows a coloured sphere for each patch position in a 3D Lab colourspace The larger the sphere the higher the Ae Contextual Menu Options
344. to Archive Selection Allows you to select individual items from the database to add to the Archive Selecting the type for e g Gradation Curves displays a chooser with all the Gradation Curves allowing you to choose one or more to add to the Archive e Add to Database Choose to add items from the Archive to the database You can add the whole Archive or selected items e Remove from Archive Remove the selected items from the Archive e Collapse Collapses the selected items if they are expanded e Expand Expands selected items if the item contains references denoted by a For example a Pagesetup will contain at least a Media an output and ICC Profiles Expanding the Pagesetup will display the other items connected with it e Open Save Save version 5 3 Close Archive Open save or Close the Archive as mentioned previously Wednesday 11pm Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 84 Calcheck The Calcheck application is used to verify the calibration status of a printer ensuring proofs are printed accurately Calcheck Charts are generated by either manually defining or importing Lab or CMYK values Each chart represents print press standards against which the printer and media are to be checked see the Workbench gt Calcheck Chart section for more information os 7 The selected Calcheck Chart is printed from the Calcheck application to the Pagesetup and Media be
345. to the default angle Main Return to the FlipBook control panel screen Press Config Change the press settings for FlipBook muam oae ee Pages Open a Show Pages panel to skip to the desired page Close Close the FlipBook window Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 127 Touch Console Menu The Touch Console menu has the following options Touch Console Settings ann Default job viewing and touch screen navigation options can be configured using the Touch Console Settings There are two tabs TouchConsole and SoftProof Touch Console Font Options Control the font size for the Touch Console text Queue Order Select which Output queues are made available for view proofing in the Publications and Jobs lists on the Touch Console Bookfilter Order Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add On Only Select which BookFilter queues are made available for view proofing in the Books list Search order Select whether Publications Jobs and or Books are available to the search function in the Home panel of the Touch Console Search results are displayed grouped by search order e g Books Publications then Jobs TouchConsole Settings See below for more information TouchConsole Settings l TeuchConsole SoftProof ScrollBar M Enable Default Left Default Right Thumbnails Publications M jobs M All View Wi imaged _ Rendered M Flipbook ScrollBar Enable or disable the scro
346. to the previous or next tab when viewing multiple tabbed jobs e Page Boundary Toggle a red line showing the page image boundary of the proof e Signature Overlays the signature used to de impose the job page if it was submitted for de imposition This is only enabled when viewing a de imposed job publication e Deimposed Pages Veripress Blackmagic Softproofing Add on Only De impose a job submitted as an imposition on the fly into separate pages defined by the signature attached to the job and return it to its original state see RIPMonitor Submit as Imposition for more information e Back Page Display the reverse back page through the page currently loaded as if the final print was being held up to light The Back Page Opacity setting in the Press Settings controls the amount of show through e Spread View the spread of the selected page for example pages 2 and 3 as a spread e Show Channels Opens a simplified Channel Viewer touch console interface featuring a coloured and labeled button for each process and spot ink channel Selecting each button will toggle the ink channel on or off If the Channel Viewer see SoftProof is open the channel s on off state will be reflected in the panel Touch the Main button in the Mode Bar to return to the Main screen e Ink Keys Opens the Ink Key Viewer for the current proof on the main SoftProof display A custom set of controls on the Touch Console allows for switching between Channels
347. to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
348. tries separated by commas where each entry searches for a match i e you can specify To Separator a b c where if any of the separators a b or c are matched it is valid Separator Options Separators are the characters that determine the end and beginning of a part For example with cyan tif the full stop between cyan and tif is the separator As this is part of the filename you still need to decide what to do with this separator There are three 3 options e Discard Separator Ignores the separator e Include Separator with this Part Includes the separator with the part being described e Include Separator with the next Part Includes the separator with the next part described Example With a filename such as job cyan tif where we parse the name in the forward direction we describe the first part as name to separator full stop and the next part as plate to full stop Discard Separator creates the two parts as job and cyan Include Separator with this part for name would produce a part as job Include Separator with next part plate produces a part as cyan This is only used if the separator is a character you want to display in the RIPMonitor such as a page marker The most commonly used option is Discard Separator In the above example if the option Include Separator with Next Part was used we could not identify the colours as it will be called cyan Tabs 3 Jobname Plate This tab allows you to configure
349. ts Reserved except as specified below Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this software or portions thereof for any purpose without fee subject to these conditions 1 Ifany part of the source code for this software is distributed then this README file must be included with this copyright an no warranty notice unaltered and any additions deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 151 2 If only executable code is distributed then the accompanying documentation must state that this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group 3 Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code not just to the unmodified library If you use our work you ought to acknowledge us Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author s name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it This software may be referred to only as the Independent JPEG Group s software We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products provided that all warranty or liability
350. tup Secure Mode can be activated by checking the tick box located via Server menu Server Settings General tab Secure Mode can only be activated or deactivated by an administrator a member of the Admin group Configuration Panels Users Panel The fields within the Users panel are e Name The username of the account This is case sensitive e User ID This is a numerical ID assigned automatically but may be changed by the administrator e Password Verify The password is entered and stored here New passwords must be verified by entering the details in each field The password is also case sensitive e Permission The level of permission for the user is created here Click Edit to make changes to the user read write execute permissions Note The Group second line and Everyone permissions in the Edit popup determine whether jobs submitted by a user are able to be seen deleted edited in the QueueManager by other users in the same user group or by users outside the group e Email Enter the users email address here e Comment Allows the administrator to enter a note on the particular user account if necessary e Group dropdown Assign a user group to the user account Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 133 e User Privileges Privileges other than those in the user s group can be added here e Notifications Select which email notifications the user is to receive by clic
351. uM Mr iade 99 Chart Type Scoir i ma cir d 101 Customise Patches 99 Densitometer osssisenia nn nie hrodeedins 100 pii n MN S 99 Last Linearised 5 tcn cases 100 Maximum Densities Override 102 Print Chartis aonana 100 SHOW Claris aat eoa idis 100 Use L3b stituit orien 99 Yule Nielsen Number 102 Linux What s on the DVD dai vie 7 Linux Installation sss 10 Installing the Dongle Driver 10 14 Serendipity Blackmagic 10 Load Balancing siruri 52 Localhost Poling skenaristi 28 Log File Web Seb Vels acida Eres dettes ee 141 Foo m 49 M Mac OS X Installation 9 Dock Start ICONS annos 9 Dongle DEIVEEcucuseqitatus tilt ei Aiit 9 Printer DPIVeESecase vot neta n dne 9 Serendipity A pent cerana 9 Serendipity Blackmagic 9 Macintosh Installation What s on the DVD sss y Manual Client Configuration 17 Mediak Senerara 18 OUTPUT naiinip aniis 17 PAS CS OUD eaae a in 18 RIP en a udeo tei atn renale M 19 hi Ewa pane MM NES 49 50 Match Items Regular Expression 58 Maximum Densities Override 100 102 Maximum Ink Weight 57 MG Ga me Pd 38 Borderless Printing 38 Galcheck INO svi its
352. ubstantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE XFREE86 PROJECT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the XFree86 Project shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the XFree86 Project XConsortium CPYRIGHT sgml v 1 2 95 01 16 13 17 39 kaleb Exp Generated from XFree86 xc programs Xserver hw xfree86 doc sgml CPYRIGHT sgml v 3 3 1995 01 28 16 01 20 dawes Exp XFree86 xc programs Xserver hw xfree86 doc COPYRIGHT v 3 8 1995 07 24 06 52 11 dawes Exp CIECAMO2 Copyright Copyright c 2003 Billy Biggs lt vektor dumbterm net gt Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so sub
353. uch interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Progr
354. ultaneously e Import Patches from Files Import a patch set from a colour data file such as those of colour standards or ICC profile makers e Reorder Patches Reorder the patches Selecting this will display another window to select one or more colours and drag them into a new order Use the up and down arrow keys and shift or control to multi select e Generate Patches from ICC Select an ICC profile from which to create a set of patches Selecting this option displays a file chooser to select an ICC profile A prompt will appear for the number of patches to generate The minimum number is 16 and maximum is 512 e Add Colours From Library Add colours to the currently selected Calcheck Chart from a Special Colour Set Note When creating or importing new colours they are stored with the default tolerance settings This is user configurable and should be set before the patch set is created Patch Definition On the left are a series of controls used to define each patch Selecting a patch from the list will load the colour into the colour match box at the top and load the Lab CMYK values into the respective fields To change the value simply type the new number into the relevant field b 33 13 L 78 88 a 2 63 e Lab or CMYK The Lab or CMYK value for the selected colour ui e Ae tolerance Set the maximum Ae value for the selected colour aes e AH tolerance Set the maximum AH value for the selected colour e AC tolerance
355. uly 2014 93 These summaries show Calcheck results for the monitor s in relation to the Calcheck Chart used at the time of checking shown at the bottom left of the summary The summaries are independent of the currently assigned SoftProof Default Press Calcheck Chart although in most cases they will match the current Calcheck summaries see above section Clicking on a Display name under the History header e g iMac will allow the user to review past results of Calchecks for the monitor The window shows a sort list of previous Calcheck results with the time and date the Calcheck was performed and the Calcheck Chart used Selecting a history item will display a summary or the detailed results Calcheck history within the Displays application is only kept for a period of 30 days from creation for each history item Ambient By clicking on the Ambient header the option to select a supported ses Spectrophotometer becomes available to measure the ambient cd m o and white point K of the light source e g a light booth or room e Instrument offline online Instrument Name Displays the currently activated instrument e Measure Select from the list of supported ambient mode 167 1 cfm Wvepoo of 40672 Spectrophotometers to use for measurement VIRO RIRCIMEGE Note For some Spectrophotometers after initial instrument calibration an ambient light filter will need to be attached before measurement The lower white area displays
356. und the Layout area Release the mouse button to drop and place the frames o Right click Opens the contextual menu with options depending on where in the Layout area the click occurred o Double click on a selected frame containing an asset Activates Crop Mode for the selected frame A frame in crop mode will appear with a green border see Cropping Assets section for information on this feature o Spacebar Left click hold Activates the grip tool allowing you to pan around the Layout area The mouse cursor will change to a hand o Thefollowing resizing options are available when clicking at the borders of a frame Left click Drag Enlarge or shrink the frame Proportions are maintained Resize is anchored at the opposing edge or corner of the frame ALT Left click Drag Enlarge or shrink the frame Proportions are maintained Resize is anchored at the centre of the frame Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 121 SHIFT Left click Drag Free resizing of the frame ignoring locked width height ratios Assets within the frame will fit or fill the resized frame depending upon frame settings Resize is anchored at the opposing edge or corner of the frame CTRL Left click Drag Windows users Snaps the frame proportions to the asset s native proportions and resizes Resize is anchored at the opposing edge or corner of the frame Left click Drag Mac OS X users
357. up Pool Name Printers Choose to publish the Pagesetup Pool as a network print destination allowing third party applications to print directly to it O O Mac Enable to publish the Pagesetup Pool as a Bonjour Zeroconf network destination for Mac OS X and Linux This option also publishes the Pagesetup Pool as an AppleTalk destination where the Pagesetup Pool name is used as the printer name Note When adding a new printer through System Preferences on Mac OS X select the Bonjour address pagesetup pool name computer name as the printer and Serendipity Megarip PPD as the driver Windows Choose to publish the Pagesetup Pool as a Windows local printer port destination See the Serendipity Software website for details on how to create the Windows printer TCP Port Choose to publish the Pagesetup Pool to a TCP Port allowing it to be setup as an IP printer destination or as a destination for other Serendipity Blackmagic Servers O Activate Port Number Enter the TCP port number the Pagesetup Pool will publish to It is necessary for the port number to be 10000 or over and for each Pagesetup Pool to have a unique port Note When adding a new printer through System Preferences on Mac OS X select IP printer HP Jetdirect Socket for the protocol The address should be in this form computername 10063 Select Serendipity Megarip as the driver When adding a new printer through Windows Select Create a New Port Standard TC
358. ut and configuration options of the original e Use Layout Switches the Monitor to Use Mode Use This is the normal user mode It locks the module sizes and position and allows you to configure the modules preferences and manage jobs Select this after Editing to use the configured layout Menu Options Layout e Edit Switches the Monitor to Edit Mode see above explanation e Use Switches the Monitor to Use Mode see above explanation e Dynamic Update Enables or disables updates to the modules while in Edit mode Show Titlebars Shows or hides module titlebars e Add Modules See the Modules section for further information on each module e Load Loads a previously saved Monitor configuration e Save As Saves the current Monitor configuration e Search UI User Interface Activates a search bar for finding buttons and functions in the current Monitor tab Note Module Toolbar functions can only be searched if the toolbar is open e New Tab Creates a new tab e Rename Tab Renames the currently selected tab e Duplicate Tab Duplicates the currently selected tab and all modules within it e Choose Tab Colour Allows the user to select a colour for the currently selected tab e Choose Tab Image Allows the user to select an image for the currently selected tab background Valid types are PNG and JPEG It is recommended a large image not be used as it will take up memory e Clear Tab Colour Image Reverts to the d
359. verLOg undc ocaecat 81 Troubleshooting PONN O 5ucsethoseti niam eect eae 148 U Ungroup pages Signature Group eee 63 Unsharp Mask nee pieds 50 Upgrading Importing a Database Backup 12 Upgrading to Version 5 4 11 T3 ELUEC S uda uem AU karta es Five ind 14 MacOS Xiram 13 WY TG OWS osse nme ee ds E 11 V View ETOT S s diosa Dvd afa aiat 77 Mado aga ea Mr ADR Tiu 77 Rendered secti tiiit 77 VIEW 9 D T 96 View as Calendars eio uedeteetetinen 96 View TEE OM Sieb MA HANURMRUU UII Li ERE 77 Virtual Press tiere ananiita 82 Edit Plate Colour 82 HIStOEV etuer UR Odds 82 DIC ESUDIBIE doo ed mere rts 82 W Watermark 222r ond teet teta 50 Wep SeEVGTu Sd ecc cts ctr 140 Accessing the Web Server 140 LOGE Mea smod M UN UN ERU 141 UIS M 140 SUDO Usenet trente rtile nue 141 System TiO ccpit rotas 141 Windows Installation 8 EFA A E ANN euet EI EU 8 22 DIU ABO Sii debi ede uri 8 9 OA DIU sas testers cats eaten aunts 8 OA DIVAS OMS oaa oco iiie 8 9 Dongle DIVER dessen PCR ERE 8 Dongle Driver Update 11 Serendipity Agent sss 8 Serendipity Blackmagic 8 Whats on the DVD iiec 7 WOPERDGIED uti deed peces d pco ERE 24 Menu ODUOllS ocn attt petiere teorindeas 25 Organise Data Types
360. want to read values and export them for plotting on a graph There is no requirement to use this for the normal operation of Serendipity Blackmagic Densitometer Measurement Paper Options e Yule Nielsen Number Enter the YN number for the paper you are reading if known The default is 2 0 e Densitometer Choose one of the supported instruments from the available list e Instrument Default Density Standard Select your desired density standard from the available list e Activate Deactivate Connect or disconnect the chosen device e Add Add the measured values to the list This appears after the Densitometer has successfully connected To begin measuring 1 Selecta Densitometer from the dropdown list and click the Activate button 2 The status field is shown when the device connects without error 3 Follow any instructions when prompted Calibrate Measure Cyan Solid etc Measure Targets In order to read percentage tint values of any plate you must first read the paper white and the solid density value for that colour The Measure Targets menu or contextual right click menu allows you to measure the solid reference densities for the process colours and the paper white With these values stored colour percentages can be calculated and displayed You can measure or update an individual Solid density or Measure All Targets Colour List This is a list of readings taken if the Add is enabled Each reading is appended to the list and
361. when printing from Windows applications The name should be unique for the Published Pagesetup d Click Next 13 Printer Sharing e Select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it f Keep the default printer name or enter a share name g Click Next 14 You ve Successfully added Printer Name h Choose whether the Published Pagesetup destination is to be the default system printer i If desired click the Print a Test Page button The test page job should appear in the Blackmagic QueueManager j Click Finish to close the wizard Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 145 Printing to a Published Pagesetup Printer across a Network Printing from Mac OS X gt Mac OS X or Windows gt Windows Printing to a Published Pagesetup printer across a network where both computers the machine sending the print and the machine running the Blackmagic Server share a common operating system is straight forward If network sharing has been enabled for the system printer destination created for use with the Blackmagic Pagesetup the printer will be available in the printer options of any other computer on the network Printing from Mac OS X gt Windows or Windows gt Mac OS X Printing from a computer on the same network but with a different operating system to the computer running the Blackmagic Server requires the creation of a new system printer on the computer wishin
362. will need to change it save and re measure The limits are e Average For all the patches in the chart that will be measured by Calcheck the average must be below this value for a pass e Maximum This is the default value used when creating or importing patches This value is only used for assigning maximum tolerance for the import When the target is measured the tolerance set per patch is the one used to determine a pass or fail status e Standard Std Deviation The standard deviation across all the patches must not exceed this value The Calcheck will only report a pass for a proof or monitor if all patches in the target chart are within tolerance e Patches Per Strip Specify how many patches are printed per line allowing the use of existing target standards such as the Fogra Media Wedge Spectrophotometer Use one of the supported online instruments to measure colours directly into the Calcheck Chart To measure colours 1 Selectan instrument from the dropdown menu and click on Activate The device must be connected and turned on 2 Follow the on screen instructions as some devices require calibration before measuring When complete click the Turn Off button 4 Ifthe Lab text option is chosen you will be prompted to choose a file to import The format must be Lab values Space or tab delimited and no header information ps Note If importing characterisation data from one of the ICC profile packages or colour s
363. y Blackmagic Servers O Activate Port Number Enter the TCP port number the Pagesetup will publish to It is necessary for the port number to be 10000 or over and for each Pagesetup to have a unique port Serendipity Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16t July 2014 45 Note When adding a new printer through System Preferences on Mac OS X select IP printer HP Jetdirect Socket for the protocol The address should be in this form computername 10063 Select Serendipity Megarip as the driver When adding a new printer through Windows Select Create a New Port Standard TCP IP Port Enter the computer s network name in the Host ID field When Windows requests additional info for the port select Custom Settings Rename the Port Name if desired Set the Protocol to Raw and the Port Number to the one set in the Pagesetup to be published 6 Select Serendipity Megarip as the driver If the driver is not already installed choose Have Disk and get the driver megarip inf from the Serendipity Installation DVD found in the drivers win OS Version directory pd NEN den Flow Control Select whether to hold the submitted file after Imaging or Rendering in order to prioritise jobs or make rendering attribute changes before releasing Options include O Hold After Imaging Hold jobs submitted to the Published Pagesetup after imaging has completed Held jobs can be released to continue processing via the QueueMana
364. y Blackmagic User Manual Version 5 4 03 Updated 16 July 2014 134 Hosts Panel The Hosts panel allows for the configuration of automatic Client logins for selected host computers or network IP addresses when using Secure Mode Users ji Groups Hosts Host p Test Hostname IP 192 168 0 30 Automatic Login Name Test The fields available are e Name Enter a name for the Host setup e Hostname IP Enter the Hostname or IP address of the computer the user will automatically connect to e Automatic Login Disable or Select a User from the dropdown list Only one user may be selected per Host setup Activating Secure Mode Secure Mode should be activated after any users and or groups have been created Only an administrator or member of the admin group can activate or deactivate Secure Mode To activate AO nm siu General Colour Management Working Paths Default Units in 3 1 Select Server menu gt Server Settings 2 Click on the General tab a Rae ea NaN 3 Tick the checkbox at the bottom of the screen Secure mode to Jtos quality Bambsall xad Compression Faster rq activate or deactivate Maximum Print Preview Resolution 180 gt 4 Click OK and close the settings when done Maximum Memory For PS RIP OMe Polling Service Refresh Oh 0m 4105 5 If activating Secure Mode a login window will appear as soon as UNS Cafes um JUR you close the Server Settings Processes image 1
365. y this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for s

User Manual - Serendipity Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents